m^ 110 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [286-286 From now on the special vocabulary will be discontinued and all new words (except the verbs) will be found only in the general vocabulary. 285 Strong Verbs to drive away tjertretben t)ertrteb tjertrteben to forgive t)er^ei^en Derjie^ tjersie^en to die fterben ftarb geftorbeu to make one's way fi(^ burd)f(i^la= Wm fic^ fic^ burc^gefrfilagen gen bur^ Weak Verbs to live leben to sigh feufjen to love tithtn to snow fc^neien to permit eriaubeu to weep toeineu to play f^ielen to believe to be gutrauen, traute to be afraid fid^ bangen capable of ju, gugetraut to deserve tjerbienen to pay be5a{)len 286 2Bo ^at ber (Sc^netber gemo^nt? ^at er allein getuo^nt? 2Bie t)iele ^inber f)atten bie 2iiitt? (Stub fie f^dter (later) atlein gen?efen? 2Ba§ tuirb ber ^ater tim, U)enn ber (Bo^n fortlciuft? SSann Mrb ber @o^n tt)ieber!ommen? SSirb t)iel ^etb ba fein nad) be§ SSaterg Stob? SSirb bie 9Jlutter t)er5tt)eifetn (despair)? SBarunt tuirb fie m6)t tJergiDeifeIn? SSie toirb fie fic^ burd^fd^lagen? 3ft ber Wann geftorben? SBoran ift er geftorben? §attt er ben (So^n fe^r geliebt? SSie ^attt er i^n be^anbett (treated)? §at er fi(^ tia^ gorttaufen be§ (So^ne§ fe^r gu ^erjen genommeu? SSie fe^r ()at er e§ fic^ gu ^erjen genommeu? SSirb ber So^n tuieberfommen? SSon tt)em mirb i{)m bie SJlutter erjdfilen? SSeffen t)at ber ^ater in [einer Xobe^ftunbe gebac^t? 2Ba§ ift ein Sc^neiber? eine ©c^neiberin? ein ©d^u^moc^er? geben fie ein anbere§ (other) SBort fiir (Sc^u^mad^er ! 2Ba§ ift ein Set)rer? eine Se^rerin? ein (Sc^iiter? eine Sc^iilerin? '^a^ ift eine 287-289] FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT 111 Sd^ule? eine SSerfftott (workshop)? SBag ift ein 3lrbeitcr? eine Wrbeiterin? 287 Translate: 1. I shall have a story for you which you will like. 2. I shall have returned when your brother is in school. 3. When the youth returns he will not find his father. 4. Does the mother think of her son in the hour of her death? 5. The father h.ad taken the departure {\i^^ ?^ortge^en) of the son so much to heart that he died. 0. The mother will not make her way through life and will not see her son again. 7. Will the latter have become rich? 8. The former will have become old. 9. I shall have run away. 288 Change all the above sentences so as to use the present tense; the perfect; the preterite. LESSON 28 289 ADJECTIVE DECLENSIONS Nominative ^a§ ift bet gro§c S&awm, ^er SBaum ift gro^. S^ie 93lume ift fi^bn. 5)ag ^inb ift flcin. ^a§ ift cin grower S3aum. ^a§ ift btc fd^onc S3hime. ^a§ ift eine fc^one S3lume. ^a§ ift ba§ ftetne ^iub. ®a§ ift ein fleinef ^inb. M. bet grogc 93aum ein grower S3aum F. bie f^onc Slume eine fc^oue 93tuTne N. btt0 fleine ^tnb ein fleineS ^inb Observe that when the article has an ending which shows the number, gender, and case of the following noun the adjective has merely a perfunctory inflection. In the nominative case this is e. When the article has no inflection m MEMOmAM J. Henry Senger Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2008 with funding from IVIicrosoft Corporation http://www.archive.org/details/elementsofgermanOObeckrich tlbe Xahc (Berman Series Elements of GtErman A PRACTICAL COURSE FOR SCHOOL, AND COLLEGE BY, HENRIETTA K. BECKER, Ph.D. THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO CHICAGO SCOTT, FORES MAN AND COMPANY 19 3 IN MEMORIAM COPYRIGHT, 1903 BY SCOTT. FORESMAN AND COMPANY BOBT. O. I^AW CO., PSXNTBKS ANJ> BIKDXJRS, OBI.CA.aO, TYPOGRAPHY BY MARSH, AITKEN & CURTIS COMPANY CHICAGO PREFACE The idea of effecting a compromise between the "natural" and the "classical" method in the teaching of modern languages is not a new one. It has been tried for some time and often with considerable success. The advantages of each method are so obvious to the thoughtful teacher — and the disadvantages no less^ — that it is but natural for a renewed attempt to be made to secure a perfect amalgamation of the benefits of both methods. In the book herewith presented a thorough study of the essential principles of German grammar lies at the foundation of the lessons. But the means by which these principles are to be inculcated are inductive rather than deductive. The student is first given a literary unit — a story or poem selected because of its fitness to illumine the particular point to be studied. From this as a text the grammatical rule is inferred, informal exercises based upon the chosen unit follow, and finally the new words thus used are impressed upon the memory by con- stant repetition. The use of a story or a poem as illustration, instead of disconnected sentences, tends to arouse a real interest in the mind of the student, besides presenting language facts in their natural relationship and environment. These points are so well taken, it is hoped, that their pedagogical importance need not be further dwelt upon, A word as to the grammatical arrangement. The value of first impressions scarcely requires emphasis. It is safe to say that the beginning pages of a grammar and the opening lines of any one chapter in it impress themselves upon the mental vision of the learner with far greater incisiveness than do the 91^656 2 PREFACE facts which are subsequently brought out. The picture grad- ually becomes more and more blurred as the mind grows weary a»d as details iiicifease. Thus it would seem highly advisable to begin with the most vital element of the language and to gH^^tj^^Jiliis preeminently the emphatic position. For this reason the Verb has been made the leading motive of the book. Under this arrangement the various elements of the lan- guage are grouped around one central point and the student deals not with a large number of isolated facts, but with a totality each part of which with its organic functions becomes gradually clear to him. When he has finished the book he should feel, it is true, that many details remain to be filled in, but that no large or important portion of the whole is unfa- miliar to him. The book is divided into ten chapters each one of which contains a number of lessons. Every chapter has as a main theme some form of the verb which is to be thoroughly learned. This theme is generally the subject of the first lesson. Subse- quent lessons treat of the main features of the verb form in question, supplemented later by the other forms of the language and by the syntax which the student is required to learn dur- ing the first year of his high-school German or the first six months of German in college. The exercises in the book are of a two-fold nature. In the first four chapters they consist mainly of such brief questions as will bring into strong relief the words and constructions previously studied. But from the fifth chapter on the ques- tions become wider in scope and afford a larger freedom of originality in treatment. For it is expected that the habit of analyzing the connected stories will by this time have so gained upon the student that he will experience small difficulty in retaining for individual use the longer phrases which they contain. The final lesson of each chapter contains a careful review of the grammatical statements made in the preceding lessons of the chapter. By means of these summaries the PREFACE 3 student may bring up all the points previously dwelt upon, and by running through the review exercises he may test his ability to apply these facts. The lessons are supplemented by an appendix which seeks to give in succinct form a synopsis of the elements of grammar. It may be used both for ready reference and review. The first part of it (§§ 1-89) deals with the inflected words so arranged as to bring together those which are alike in form, e.g., the definite article and the demonstrative pronoun, the indefinite article and the possessive adjective, etc. An attempt has been made to present each page in a form which will render classi- fication and enumeration graphic, in order that visualization may assist memory. The second part of the appendix (§§90-249) enunciates the more important rules of syntax with accompany- ing illustrations. In both parts the procedure is: article, noun, pronoun, adjective, verb. This appendix, if so desired, may be used as a reference grammar in later courses devoted to composition work or to the reading of texts. In explanation of a few innovations, chief among which k perhaps the inflection of the subjunctive mode, it may be said that in every case actual usage as found in modern writers and in accepted speech rather than grammatical tradition has served as guide. The new official orthography sanctioned in the year 1901 and now in force in the public schools of Germany, Switzer- land, and Austria has been adopted without change. The seventh edition (1902) of the inexpensive and excellent Duden's Orthographisches Wbrterluch is cordially recommended to all who wish a safe guide in vexed matters of spelling. The Elements of German endeavors to give to beginning students of German an opportunity to acquire a firm grasp on the essential facts of the language. It is hoped at the same time to stimulate interest because of the chance which it affords for the reading of good German and for the continu- ous practice of the spoken language in the classroom. For 4 PREFACE only in this way can a sure feeling for correct form be devel- oped. It is a most pleasant duty to acknowledge the unusual debt of obligation which the author owes to Professor S. W.- Cutting of the University of Chicago. From first to last he has shown a tireless interest in the book, has offered many helpful sugges- tions and has stinted no effort in his desire to be of constant assistance. Professors C. von Klenze and Max Batt have also done much to further the progress of the author's work. The editorial connection of Philip S. Allen of the University of Chicago with the Lake German series during the early stages of the preparation of the book and his continued generous aid to the time of its publication have been an invaluable help to the author. Henrietta K. Becker. Chicago August, 1903. CONTENTS CHAP. PAGE I. Indicative Singular Present 9 1. Verb: Third Person ; Nouns and Pronouns : Nominative and Accusative Singular 9 2. Continuation of Lesson 1 12 3. Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns: Nomina- tive and Accusative 15 ®er ^aufmann unb ber ^unb 4. Verb: First and Second Person : Possessives 18 5. Grammar Review 21 II. Indicative Singular Perfect 25 6. Tense Auxiliary f)a6en 25 ®te ^a^e unb bie Wlau^ 7. Tense Auxiliary fein 29 ®er Sc^neiber unb ber ©c^u^inac^er 8. Genitive 33 ®er Wiener he^ ^dnig§ 9. Dative 38 %aS @Jenji[fen be§ SSolfg 10. Prepositions with Accusative 42 ©onntagmorgen 11. Dative and Accusative with Preposition 46 @in Unterfd^ieb. 2)a3 S3ac&lein 12. Grammar Review 51 III. Indicative Preterite. Plurals 55 13. Weak and Strong Verbs 55 SSa§ jcber fa^ 14. Weak and Strong Verbs— Continued 61 ©efunben 15. Plural of Verbs 64 S)ie SSoget • 16. Plural of Nouns— Strong Declension — Class 1 68 ®e§ ajlanneg SSerbtenjt. 9^ad)taeb 17. Plural of Nouns — Strong Declension — Class II 73 ^ie SSolfe 18. Plural of Nouns— Strong Declension — Class III.. 77 ^erbftaeb. Ulbenblieb 5 6 CONTENTS 19. Weak and Mixed Declensions 80 2)ie 3a()lett 20. Grammar Review 84 IV. Indicative Pluperfect 87 21. Pluperfect Tense 87 @r l^atte ©pa^en imter bent ^utc 22. Personal and Reflexive Pronouns 90 ^er aJlorber 23. Possessives 93 (5ein 9tid)tgfpru(t) 24. Demonstrative and Indefinite Pronouns 97 ®er einfaE 25. Relative Pronouns 101 ®er ^rin§ bon |)omburg 26. Review 105 V. Future and Future Perfect 107 27. muttetikbe 107 28. Adjective Declensions Ill 29. muitexikbc {(Bdjln^) 115 30. ^ie gaule unb bie ?5Iei§i(;c 119 31. ^ie ^auie unb bie gleifetge (gortfe^uncj) 121 32. 2)ie f^aule unb bie ^(cifeige .©c^lufe) . .' 125 33. Grammar Review 128 VI. Reflexive Verbs 130 34. ®ie SSerirrten 130 35. Cardinals and Ordinals 133 ®te SSerirrtcn (5ortfc|ung) 36. Fractionals 136 2)ie SSerirrten (f^ortfe^uug) 37. ^ic SBerirrten (©c^Utfe) 140 38. Comparison of Adjectives 144 ^eutfc^eg ©d^ulmefen 39. ^eutfd)c§ Sc^ufnjcfen (Sdjlufe) 148 40. Grammar Review 151 VII. Passive Voice 153 41. ®eutfd)Ianb 153 42. Word Order 156 (Srlfonig 43. Transposed Order 160 3Benn ber ^riitiling auf bie S3erge fteigt 44. Conjunctions 162 ©iegfrieb » 45. Grammar Review 165 CONTENTS 7 VIII. Modal Auxiliaries 167 46. Present Tense 167 S3ttte ail bie Whittet 4!7. Preterite of Modal Auxiliaries 170 (Siegfrteb (gortfc|ung) 48. Perfect and Pluperfect of Modal Auxiliaries 173 ©tegfrieb (©djrufe) 49. Future and Future Perfect of Modal Auxiliaries and Passive Infinitives 174 ^riem^ilbe^ Xraum 50. Grammar Review 177 IX. The Subjunctive 178 51. Present Third Person Singular 178 2)ie ©Dime unb bcr 2Binb 53. Present and Preterite 180 ^ie ©onnc unb bcr SBinb 53. Perfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive 184 2)a§ treue dio% 54. Future and Future Perfect Subjunctive 187 ®cr ©chafer unb bcr ®Dlb[d)micb 55. Subjunctive Passive 190 ^ag gefto^lcne ^ferb 56. Ideal Condition 193 ®er ^hig ber Sicbe. ®er ^'onig uiib bcr iianbmaim 57. Wish— Unfulfilled .' 197 ®ie t)ier 2Biinfd)e 58. Wish— Fulfilled ; Desire and Prayer 199 2)cr 9Jlai ift gcfommcu 59. Subjunctive of Doubt 301 •Der giite ^amcrab. Xu btft lutc eiuc S3Iuuic 60. Grammar Review 303 X. Imperative. Compounds. Infinitives. Participles 305 61. Imperative 305 ®eutfd)er ffiat Xic SO^a|ming 63. Compounds 308 ©in f^ricb^ofggang 63. Infinitives 313 ®ie beutfd^en ©table 64. Infinitives 215 Xic beutfd)cu ©tdbtc (©d)lufe) 8 APPENDIX 65. Participles 216 5)ie beutfc^e ®ef(i)id)te 66. Participles 218 ^ie beutfc^e @efrf)ic^te (©djlufe). ®ie SSad^t am 67. Grammar Review 232 APPENDIX Alphabet 224 Pronunciation /. 227 accidence Article 231 Nouns— Gender 232 Declension 233 Pronouns 237 Adjectives— Declension 239 Numerals 241 Comparison 242 Verbs— Conjugations 245 Tense Auxiliaries 245 Modal Auxiliaries 256 Causatives 259 Reflexive Verbs 259 Impersonal Verbs 259 Table of Strong Verbs 260 SYNTAX Word Order 265 Use of Article 266 Nouns— Syntax of Cases 368 Nominative 268 Genitive 269 Dative 273 Accusative 377 Pronouns 280 Verbs— Mode 282 Indicative 282 Subjunctive 284 Imperative 288 Infinitive 288 Participle ' 290 Passive Voice 291 Modal Auxiliaries. . . . , 292 Impersonal Verbs 295 ELEMENTS OF GERMAJST CHAPTEE I INDICATIVE SINGULAR PRESENT LESSON 1 Verb: 3rcl person Nouns and Pronouns: Nominative and Accusative Singular I Masc. 2)er ^cA\6)i fliegt fliegt Fem. 2)ie $enne ift grog. ift Neut. ^ttg Siii^Iein^ tjt fleiiu ift M. ^et^ §abic^t fliegt, er^ ift ein SSogeL er F. ^ie ^eiuie fliegt, fie ift and) ein 9?ogeL flc N. 2)ag tii(^Iein fliegt nidjt, e§ ift ein SSoglein.' e« 2 VOCABULARY ^ flies fliegt hen bic §enne wrd tin ^ogel is ift large grOg also aUC^ chick 'ha^ ^iic^Ieiu not nic^t hawk ber §abic^t smaii !(ein iittie bird ein SSoglein 3 ^ The syllables leilt and ^etl may be added to any noun to ex- press diminutive size or endearment. Such nouns are always neuter (see App. 13a). 2 In German the article and the personal pronoun denote the varia- tion of gender even where no sex designation is felt. ^ In the vocabularies the words that represent the new principle will be found first. After these will come the other new words in the order in which they occur in the story or exercise above them. 10 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [4-8 4 Subject Object 2)te .^emie fie^t ben §aiir|t. ®ie fur(^tet t|n. 2)er ^abi^t fie^t bie §enne. @t jagt fie. 2)te $enne Itebt bag ^nt^lein. ®ie ruft eg. 5 sees fie()t chases jagt calls ruft fears furd^tet loves liebt 6 DEFINITE ARTICLE AND PERSONAL PRONOUN Nominative Accusative Def. Art. Pers. Pron. Def. Art. Pers. Pron. ber er ben illtt bie fie bie fie ba§ ee bag ee 7 INDEFINITE ARTICLE Nominative Accusative @ln ^abid^t fliegt. ©tne .^eitite ftel)t etuen^abid^t. (Sine §emte ruft. ©in ^abi^t fie^t eiue §eune. Gin Mdjietu fommt nidjt* (5ie l)at ein Su(J)Iein. 8 M. F. N. j Nom. \ Ace. Def. Art. ber ben ludef. Art. eiu ^ eiuen Pers. Prou. er itin ( Nom. ] Ace. bie bie eiue eiue He lie ( Nom. 1 Ace. ba§ bag ein ein eg eg 9-12] 9 INDICATIVE SINGULAR PRESENT Sine ®eft|i^te 11 Sine ^enne fte^t eineu ^abi^t. ©r fliegt, S)ie ^enite i)at ein Mc^Iein, ©ie ruft e^, 2)a§ Siid^Iein fommt nid^t, eg ift ungef)orfam» S)a fommt ber ^abic^t unb ijolt bag Siid^lein, ®g jd^reit laut, aber ber ^abid^t frigt eg unb fliegt fort, 2)ie §enne ift fe^r traurig, ®ag Md^Iein ift nun tot. 2)ie SJlutter ijat !ein ^iic^lein nte{)r/ ®ie §enne f)a§t ben ^abid^t unb fie fiird^tet i^n and). 10 VOCABULARY has t)at and unb comes !ommt aloud taut fetches ^olt but aber yells, squeak s ^c^reit away fort devours frigt very W hates mt sad traurtg does tut • now dead mother uuu tot bie gjJutter story bie OJefd^i^te disobedient ungei)oiiam no !eiu then ba more me^r « « 3ft bie §enne ein SSogel? ©ie ift ein SogeL 3ft fie gro§? ©ie ift gro§. 3ft ber ^abii)t ein SSogel? (£r ift ein aSogel 3ft er tiein? ©r ift nidjt flein. gliegt ber §abid)t? ©r ftiegt. ^(iegt bie §enne? bag tii^Iein? 9?uft bie ^enne bag tii^Iein? ©ie ruft eg, tomntt eg? ©g fommt nid^t, 3ft eg ungel)orfam? §oIt ber ^ahii)t bag ©iid^Iein? gri^t er eg? 3ft bie 50?utter traurig? 12 ' ^ttt fein ... me^r = has no left. 12 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [13-15 13 LESSON 2 SBer fliegt? S)er ^abi^t fliecit. SBag tut er? ©r fliegt. 2Ba^ tut bie ^tnxitl @ie fliegt auc^» 3ft ber ^abic^t fe^r gro§? ®r ift uic^t fe^r grofe. SBa§ ift bie ^euue? ©ie ift ein SSogeL 2Bie fliegt ber §abi^t? ©r fliegt fi^uell, Sliegt bie ^tnm fi^ueU? 9iic^t fo fd^uell tt)ie ber |)abidjt» 2Sie fliegt ba§ Mi^leiu? ©§ fliegt laugfam, e§ ift fleiu. 3ft e§ au^ eiu 3Sogel? 3a, e§ ift eiu SSogleiu, Answer the following questions : i4 SBer fliegt? aSa^ ift bie ^tmtl SBie fliegt ber ^abi^t? aSa§ ift bag Siic^leiu? 3ft bie ^txmt grofe ober fleiu? %i\tQ,t bag ^iid^leiu? 3ft ber ^abii^t eiu 9Sogel? 3ft bie ^tUMt eiu SSoget ober eiu SSogleiu? giiegt ber SSogel fi^uell? 1 5 PRONOUNS 3Beu fie^t bie ^mm'i @ie fie^t \^tn ,^abid^t. Siebt fie i^u? 9teiu, fie liebt i^u uidjt, fie ^^t i^u. SSeu fie^t ber ^abit^t? ®r fie^t bie l^txmt. gri^t er fie? 3a, er jagt fie uub fri^t fie» Siebt ber ^abi^t bie |)euue? 9ieiu, er liebt fie ui^t, 3Beu ruft bie ^tmxt'^ ®ie ruft bag Sii^leiu. Siebt fie eg? 3a, fie liebt eg. ^rifet bet ^abi^t U^ M^leiu? 3a, er frifet eg. 2Beu liebt bie ^tMMt'i giir^tet fie beu ^abid^t? 393eu fri^t er? 33Sag fiet)t bag Siid^leiu? ^ort eg bie SUJutter? 2Ber ruft? SBeu ruft bie ^tMXitl SSer fiir^tet beu ^abi^t? aSeu fiir^tet bie ^zxiM'i S^iirc^tet bie ^twxiz lG-17] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PRESENT 13 ben ^abic^t? aBarum? SBag tut er? 2Sag ift ber ^abi^t? me ift ba^ Mdjlein? SBer Itebt eg? S)a§ Sinb Itebt bie ^^enne, ober bag ®tnb l^at bie ^entie gern* SSBag liebt bag Sinb? SBer Itebt bie ^entte? ^at ha^ Sinb bie |)enne gern? SSag ^at eg gern? 2)er 9Jfann I)at eitten ^unb* ©r ^t ben ^uttb gertt» ^^at bie^enne ben ^abidjt gern? SBaritm ni^t? Ser ^abid)t fri^t bag Suc^Iein, 2)ie 9}Jutter ^at bag tinblein gern, 2Ber liebt bag Slinb? SBen liebt bag tinb? 16 VOCABULARY hears I)ort slow langfam likes i)ai ... . gem yes ja ■ or ober who? toer? whom! ? mn? what? toa^? no neiu how? tvk? why? tuanim'? quick frfinea child ba§ ^inb so fo man ber Wann as tuie dog ber |)imb 17 GRAMMAR REVIEW 1. Verbs in third person sing, indicative pres. end in t. 2. All nouns are masculine, feminine, or neuter, as shown by the form of the article. 3. The definite article nominative singular is bcr, bic, bttS. 4. The definite article accusative singular is bctt, bie, bal. 5. The indefinite article nominative is eitl, ciltc, tin. 6. The indefinite article accusative is cineit, cine, citt. 7. The nominative and accusative forms of the personal pronouns in third person arc : er flc el i^tt fie eS 14 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [18 18 REVIEW EXERCISES I, Fill out vntli verbs: Ste ^ettne — etn Ru^Ietn, 2)er ^abic^t f ^neU, ®ag Sii^Iein — tiein. ®er ^abi^t "^a^ ^u^Iein. ®a^ Siidjletn nt^t ^ie §enne laut. 2)ag Siii^Iein — uiiQe^orfam. S)er ^abic^t ba§ Mi^Iein unb e^, //. Fill out with noun and definite article: f)at etn Siid^Ieitt, fdegt fie^t i^n, 2)ie §enne ruft . tommt nii^t fommt mtb fri^t , jdireit, — frtfet bag Sii^tetu. ift tot 2)ie 9Kutter I)at nii^t mef)r, {}a§t ben ^abic^t, fltegt langfam. fltegt jdjnell. ift flein, tft etn SSogel. tft an^ ein SSogel ift ein SSoglein. III. Fill out with noun and indefinite article: ift tranrig, S)er ^abi^t frifet . ^enne f)at . ®ie ^enne fie^t . ■ fiiri^tet ben §abi^t. ift nnge^orfant. fliegt f d)nell, fliegt langf am. ift tiein, ift grofe* fri§t . f^reit lant* 3)ie 3Jlntter ^at ntel)r. IV. Fill out with personal pronouns: 2)er ©abi^t ift ein SSogel — ift gro^, — fliegt f^nell. t)ie ^enne ift anc^ ein SSogel — fliegt langfam. SDa^ ^it(^lein ift ein ^^ogelc^en. — ift nnget)orfant. ®ie §enne rnft — nnb — fontntt nic^t. 2)er ^abit^t fontntt nnb bie ^enne fief)t — . ©ie l^a^t nnb fiirc^tet — . S)ag Sitd^lein fie|t — ni^t, ®ie gjJntter rnft — , — fontntt nic^t. S)er ^abi^t frifet — . S)a§ M^= lein ^ort — ni^t, 2)er ^abid^t fie^t — . 19-21] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PRESENT 15 LESSON S Demonstrative and Interrogative Pronouns : Nom. and Ace. 1 9 ^er Sttufmatitt untJ ber ^unli ©in Saufmann ^ai etn ^ferb, ©r reitet eg. S)iefer Saiifmann ^at ehte Sorfe» S)iefe fdflt unb ber Sauf= maun jie^t ba§^ nid^t. ®er .^unb jiel)t bie^/ er beUt iinb jprittgt. S)er Saufmaun benft: ,,2)iefer §unb ift toll!" 2)ann nimmt er bag ©eme^r unb f^ie^t ben |)unb. ®er §unb ftirbt nnb ber Saufmann reitet traurig ttjeiter; er ^at biefen |)nnb je^r gem. S)a t^ernti^t er feine SSorfe unb get)t juriid unb finbet fie, Stber eg ift jn fpdt, ber ^unb ift nun tot. S)er Saufmann ift fefjr traurig. ©r ^ai ben §unb gem, unb eg tut i^m leib/ bafe biefer tot ift.^ VOCABULARY merchant ber ^aufmann 20 rides reitet falls fdHt barks beat jumps fpringt thinks benft takes nimmt shoots frfliegt dies ftirbt misses tjermifet' goes gef)t llnds finbet horse ba§ $ferb purse bie Sorfe mad toll then bann gtm \ias> (SJett)el)r' on tueiter back guriid' too late m fpat ^ sorry leib that ba§ 2 I ' btt§, ilieS— neuter demonstratives referring to preceding sentence. 2 Observe inversion of subject and predicate caused by prece- dence of the adverb tiann. ^ eg tttt i|m leitl = lie is sorry. * Note that the verb comes last in the dependent clause. 16 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [22 20 22 Demonstrative and Interrogative melc^er Saufmann? Norn. itx Saufmann biefer Saufmann jener Saufntann JDcId^eu Saiifmann? . Ace. ben Saufmann biefeii Saufmann jenen ^aufmann welijt 33orje? Norn. & Ace. V\t 93orfe btefe 93orfe jene Sorfe tt)el(^e§ ^ferb? Norn. & Ace. bag $ferb bieje§ ^ferb jene^ ^ferb 23 Masculine Norn -^ 3SeI(^er Saufmann reitet? { Siefer Saufmanu reitet. ( 2)iefett §unb f^ie^t er. 24 Feminine ^^^ f 3BeIc^e Sorfe fadt? ^'""- t Sent «orie follt. ^^^ J SBeldjc SSorfe fiel)t ber |)unb? 2)iefeg ^ferb fri^t. 3ene 33orfe fietjt er. 25 ' Neuter ^,^^ j SBelc^eg $ferb frtfet? ^^^ j 2SeI^e§ ^ferb reitet ber Saufmann? \ ®iefe§ ^$ferb reitet er. 26 The demonstrative and interrogative pronouns biefcr, btefe, biefcS (this), jencr, jene, jencS (that), iDetc^cr, mi^euue t)idt bag Soru. 3BeId)er §uub beat? 3eber ^mh beUt, S8eld)eu .g)uub ^at ber Saufmauu? @r ^t biefeu ^uub. S?e(d)e ^cnm ruft it)r ffiic^Ieiu? 3)iefe .^euue ruft eg. ai^eld^er ^abic^t ftie^t? Qeuer ^abidjt fliegt. ®iet)t ber ,^abid^t biefeg ober jeueg tiidjleiu? ®r fri^t jebeg teiic^Ieiu, bag^ er faucet. Sft biefe ,^enm traurig? 2BeI= i)en ,^uub fc^ie^t biefer Saufumuu? SBeli^e 93orfe tjermifet jeuer Saufmauu? SSeldjieu ^uub ^at biefer Kaufmauu geru? 28 VOCABULARY 29 notices Itterft true lDaI)r picks picft animal ba§ %kv catches fciugt gray (^mu every jebcr, jebC, jcbCg faithful treu grain ba§ ^OVW now je^t which ba§ ^iia*f, rel. pron. = which. For word order cf. 21, 4. 18 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [30-3J Verb: 1st and 2nd person. Possessives 30 9^a^ iii VnU ^6) liebe bte Slunte, Sd) liebe ba^ ©piet, Sc^ liebe bie @d)ule, ^d) liebe gar t)ieL ^(^ liebe ben SSogel, ®r ftngt gar fo fdjon/ 3?c^ liebe bie SBieje, ^6) liebe bie ^^o^'n, ®ie ©rbe, ben ^immel, 2)ie Sonne, ben Stern, Qd) liebe ba§ aHe^v 3d} f)ab' e^ fo gern,' 3d) liebe ben 5!]{cnfd)en, Da^ ^^erj nnb ben 9)htt, 3d) liebe I)erjinnig, St?a^ fd)on \]t nnb gnt 3 1 Hove id) (iebc ^ I have id) I)abc you love bn Uebft you have bn I)aff he loves er liebt he has er Ijaf I call id) rnfe I sing id) fingc you call bn rnfft you sing bn fingft he calls er rnft he sings er fingt 32 VOCABULARY flower bie 33(unte heaven ber .^immcl game ba^ 'S^icl sun bie Sonne school bic @(f|Mle star ber ©tern a great deal gau Uiel all aUe§ exceedingly C\aV man ber SOfJenfdj beautiful |c^on heart ba§ .^er,^ meadow bie 2Bieje courage ber mm heights bie |)oI)en heartily l)er^innig earth bie @rbe good gnt 33 ^ gttt fo fi^Ott— idiom : so very charmingly. 2Cf. 10. 3 Note omission of h before ft and t, an example of the wear- ing-off process which words undergo. 34-36] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PRESENT 19 34 ^i) Itebe bie ©onne, liebft bu fie? ^a, ii) liebe bie Sonne imb ben ©tern* Siebft bu bie aSiefe tne^r ate btn SSatb? 9iein, i^ liebe ben aSalb ebenjo jeljr tnie^ bie SSiefe, §aft bu bie ^lume gern?^ 3a, ic^ i}abe bie 33lnme, bag Spiel unb bie @d)u(e fel^r gern* SBag ^aft bu lieber,^ bag Spiel ober bie Sd^nle? 3cf) l^abe ta^ Spiel gern unb and) bie Sdjule, aber ic^ glaube bo^/ ic^ ijabe bag Spiel etwa^^ lieber, 3[8el^e 23lume liebe id)? ^d) liebe biefe 93lume unb jene, id) liebe jebe 93lume. SSag i)at biefer SKenj^ gem? ®r ^t atteg gem, tnag^ ji^on ift SBeld)er SSogel fingt fc^on? ^at biefer SSogel ein ^erj? 3a, jeber 9Sogel ^at ein *^erj, SBag ijat jeber 3Sogel? SSelc^eg Sii^= lein i^at biefe §enne gem? 3ene §enne i)at biefeg Sii^lein gern, SSeld)en .^unb t)at biefer 50Jann gem? ©r ^at biefen |)unb gem. 35 POSSESSIVES aSen l)at biefer 9)iann gem? ©r i)at feinen 3Sater unb feine Tlntt^x gem. |)aft bu beinen SSater unb beine 3Kutter gem? 3a, gen)i^! 3^ ^cibe nteinen SSater unb meine 5!JJutter feljr gem. §aft bn beinen Dnfel lieber alg beine S^ante? 3d) l)abe fie^ gleic^ lieb.^ §aft bu einen ®ro§t)ater unb eine ©rofemutter? 2iebft bu fie? 36 1 eBenfo fe^r mie =±= just as much as. ^ ^ttft iiu . . . . flem, cf . 10. ^ Ott ^aft Itfber = you prefer. Ml^ glttUk iJOli^ = I rather think. 5 ctttiaS = somewliat. 'ttae§ toltt§ = all that. ' fie = they, them (see she, her = fie, p. 10). ^ tj^ ^ttfte fie gleid^ Uefi = I love them alike (see \^ Ittht . . . ebenfo fe§r ttlie, note l above). 20 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [87-40 37 ,^aft bu behieii ©ro^dater ebeitfo geru \me beine ©roBmntter? §aft bn fie glei^ lieb? aSelc^e^ M^= lein f)at bie .f>enne gern? @ie ijat xi)x Sn(J)Iein gern. ©ief)ft bn bie ^enne nnb i^r Sii^Iein? 3a, id) fe^e fie» ^aft bn fie gern? SBa^ ^aft bn lieber, bie §enne ober 'i)a§> Sit^tein? SSSeldje §enne ^aft bn lieber, biefe ober jene? SKa^ ^at ber Sanfmann lieber, feinen §nnb, fein ^ferb ober feine 33orfe? .^at ber Sanfmann nnn noc^ eine 33orfe? 9?ein, er t)at feine 93orfe nte^r nnb and) feinen ^nnb. |)aft bn einen ©^tnager? 38 XOMINATIVES tin ©olcr cine abutter cin ^inb ic^ tnein Sater meine 9)Jntter nietn Kinb bu betn n beine ,, betn ,, er feitt ft feine fein „ fie tlir ff it)re \¥ „ e0 fein ft feine fein ,, teitt It feine ,, Wn „ 39 Accusatives cinctt 35otcr cine 9Wuttcr cin ttnb meinen 93ater meine 9JJntter ntein Sinb beineii beine ,, betn n feinen feine fein ,, i^ren i^re iDtr n feinen feine ,, fein „ feinen feine ,, fein „ 40 Note that the po^Hessivc pronouns and the word fein (no) are inflected like the indefinite article in nominative and accusative. 41-48] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PRESENT 21 41 3a, id) ^abe etneu (S(f}tDager uiib eiiie @d)tudgerin uiib id) ijahe nteiiteu Sdjiuager imb meine ©d)it)dgerin ie()r gent* 3Keii I)aft bu lieber, beinen SSetter ober betne tSoujiue? 3d) I)abe meiiten i^etter ebenjc gem me mehic Soujiue* |)aft bu feiiien 35ater uiib feine 9)cuttcr? JJetii, id) ^abe feineu Skater unb feine aifutter. Sag Kinb ^t lueber i^ater nod) SUJutter, e§ ift eiite SBaife, 42 VOCABULARY father bei* S3ater suii noc^ yes, certainly ja, gett)!^ brother-in-law bcr Sd^tUagcr uncle ber £)n!el sister-in-iaw btc (Srf)tudgerm^ aunt bie ^ante cousin (male) ber S5etter grandfather ber (S^rofeDater cousin (female) bie ©Ouft'ltC grandmother bie (^rO^lUlltter neither ... nor tOebcr . . . Itod) orphan bic SBaife 43 Compare ber (Sc^luager, W Ci^ Md)tein gernfen? ^ai e^ ge()ort? ^at bie ^enne :)a^ Siidjlein gern geljabt? ^ai W^ Siid)lein bie 5Ilhitter ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [62-65 gettebt? ^at bie ^enne ben .f)abi(^t gettebt? 9fein, jie i)at il}n md}t (^eliebt, fonbern^ fie l}at tlju geljafjt aS?en f)at bag Sinb gern ge^abt? SSen ^at eine ^eiine gern ge^afat? 2Sen i)at fie (^efiir^tet? 62 63 Present AVeak Perfect \6) fiirc^te id) ^nOc gefiirc^tct „ I)ore „ „ ge{)ort „ ^Qbe /, „ Q^t)M . ^affe n /, Q^¥i^ „ i)aht gern Strong „ „ flern ge^abt id) fef)e tc^ f)abe gefef)en „ tne „ „ getaii . freffe ,/ „ Qefreffcn // nife „ „ gerufen PARADIGM Perfect Tense— -Singular Weak Strong icf) f)abe gefitrdjtet ic^ I}abe gerufen bu i)a\i bu !)aft „ er f)at fie ^at 64 ^ie ^tt^e ttttb bie SJlang Sine Sa^e l^at immer eine 9}la«§ Q^i^Qt. 3)a ^^i bie 9J?au§ bie Sa^e feljr gefiird^tet imb fe^r ge^a^t ©ublic^ f)at bie 9]?aug einen ©infad ge^abt ®ie f)at gebadjt: ,,Sc^ ge^e au^ iinb faufe eine Stfjelle, bie^ pnge 65 1 fontlem = but, used after a negative clause to introduce an affirmation, the opposite of what has been denied, W^tX is used for h\d to introduce an additional thought (after either positive or nega- tive statements). ^ tlie = demonstrative fem. , masc. lier. neut. ba§. 66-68] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PERFECT 27 id) hex ^a^e^ an. 2)amt f)ore id) immer, luenn bie ^ai^e fommt." ®te I)at aljo' bie SdjeUe gefauft. ,^at fie biefe ber fialie augel)dugt?^ 9leiu, fie fiird)tet bie ft'a|e fo fe^r, ba^ fie fd)uell fortlduft,^ iuenn jeite fommt @o gef)t bie Sa^e itoc^ ()eute* o^ite (Sd^eUe ^erum. 66 VOCABULARY chased gejagt had gr!)QBt feared 9efurd)tCt thought gcba^t hated 0Cl)aSt bought gcfaitfl hung geljdugt cat bic ^a^c I hang onto id) ()ange an always tmiltcr I hear [^ ()ore mouse bie Wan^ when tueuu then bd so a(fo (resumptive) finally twhlid) I run i(S) (aufe, (bit Idufft, idea bcr ©iiifatt cr Iditft) I go out tc^ gefjc au§ without o[)ue I buy id) faufe about I)cntm bell bie (Scfielle 67 SBag I)at bie .^atje irnnter getait? ®ie t)at bie 9JJau§ gejai^t. ,^at bie Siau^ bie Statue (]ern gefjabt? 9iein, fie I)at fie uidjt gem gel)abt, fie Ijat fie ge^a^t uub gefiird)tet. a^a^ ^t bie 9JJau^ gefauft? ,^at fie ber Sa^e bie Sd)etle auge^dugt? aKarum uidjt? .gat bie Sa^e nun eine ©djeUe? aSie gel)t fie uoc^ tjeute Ijerum? 68 ^ bcr Saa^ mind nothing now, well } (expletive) \ sauerkraut iiic^tg mm ba§ ©mierfraut against typhoid fever at once gegen ber ^9|)()U0 ^fogleic^' hunger ber |)mtger to cure hirie'ren woman, wife bie e^rau to kill toten 79 2Ber ift trauf (^emeieii? aBa§ I)at er c^e^abt? aSa^ i)at er getan? Sft ber Sottor fogleicf) gefommen? SBa^ ^at ber 3)oftor getan? SBa§ f^at er befo{)Ien? §at ber S^neiber ha^ getan? a93a§ ()at er gern getan? SBer ^at §nnger ge^abt? 2Ba^ ()at bie "Svan gefoc^t? aSie t)iel I)at fie gefodjt? JJiir tuen I)at fie e^ ge!od)t? $at ber 3)fann e§ gern gegeffen? Sisie ift e^ i^ni befom=^ men? (How did it agree witli him?) S'g ift i^m fel)r gnt betommen, 3ft er gefnnb gemorben? SBa§ ijat ber 3)o{tor gelernt? ^at er e» be^aCten (remembered)? 3Sa§ t)at er gefi^rieben? Q^ft fonft jemanb (anybody else) franf gemorben? SSe(d)e^ SiJtittel ^at ber 3)oftor Derfd^rieben? ^\t e§ i^m gnt betomnten? SBie ift e^ if)m betomnten? SSa^ f)at ber 2)ottor nnn gelernt? 2Ba§ ^aft bn gern ge(}abt? 3Ben i)abe id) geliebt? SBer ift gefommen, at^ ber Sd^nfjmac^er franf gemefen ift? Sft ba^ ^ndjtein unge^orfam getnefen? 32 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [80-83 80 GRAMMAR 1. The perfect tense of both strong and weak verbs is formed by means of the tense auxiliaries l^rit or ifl + per- fect participle of the verb. 2. Only intransitive verbs of transition (of place or con- dition) take ift; all others take |ot. See App. 68-70. 8 1 PARADIGM Strong ic^ ^abe gefe^en ic^ bin gemefen bu l}aft „ bit bift „ er^at „ er ift Weak ' \d) ^aOe gefiirc^tet tc^ bin gefoljt \>\\ ^aft „ bu bift „ er :^ot „ er ift „ 82 SBag 1:\(ii ber ^aWd^t getan? ©r ift geflogen, 2Sie ift er geflogeu? ©djnell ift er geftogen? SBa^ ^at bie Sa^e getan? ©ie ift gefprungen, 2Ba^ ()at fie fonft no^^ getan? ©ie Icjdt bie 2)iang g^jcigt- ^at fie fie gefangen? 9lein, fie \)ai bie 3JJan§ nic^t gefangen, aber bie 3Kan§ l^at bie Sa^e gefiird^tet, SBa^ ^at bie SKanei getan? ©ie ^at eine ©c^eUe getanft. §at fie fie ber fe'a^e ange^cingt? 9?ein, fie ^ai ba§ ni(^t getan, fie t)at feinen 9Knt gef)abt, 3ft ber Sanfmann geritten? 3ft ber §nnb gefprnngen? Sft ber SSogel geflogen? aSer ift gefontmen? 3Ber ^^ai ben ^abic^t gefetjen? 3Sen ^at bie ^enne gernfen? SBen l^at bie §enne gem ge^abt? aSer ift geftogen? 3ft ber §abi(^t fd^neU geflogen? SSer ift getomnten? aSa^ Icjdi ber ^abid^t getan? 3ft ^^d^:} Siic^Iein ge^orfant getnefen? 83 ^ fonft no(| = besides; cf. no^ immer, <>8, 4; noi| fj^nettrr, 76,3. 84-8«] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PERFECT 33 84 WRITTEN EXERCISES /. Write the perfect paradig7)i of: bu fotgft, bu bx\t, er ruft, er ^at, er tut, id) fiird^te, fie jagt* II. Aiisiver: 2Ber ^at ben ^abic^t gefei)eu? 2Ba§ ^at ber ^aufmann t)erIoreu? Sft ber ^unb gefprmigen? ,^at er gebeHt? 2Ben {)aft bu geru? SBa^ I)at ba§ Siub tieber, ben 33erg ober ba^ SKaffer? 2Bie ift ^a^ Siid^Ieiu gefommeu? 2Bie ift ber 3Sogel geftogeu? SBa^ t)at bie ajJau^ gefauft? ^at bie Sa|e bie ©c^eUe an? ///. Translate: The dog jumped and barked. The merchant lost his purse. When did the dog jump? What did the hen see? What did the mouse fear ? Whom did you love ? What did I love ? How did he come ? The doctor prescribed much medicine. The sauerkraut cured the shoemaker, but killed the tailor. The doctor came quickly. The girl became ill. The chick died. The dog died suddenly. LESSON 8 85 Genitive 2)ag ift ber ^Juub beg 9}Jauue^. ©ie liebt bie Sa^e ber grau* ©r fiel^t ben 35ogeI beS Siube^* NOM. Gen. M. ber 9JJaun (etn) be§ ajJauueS (eiueg) F. bie fjrau (eiue) ber grau (eiuer) N. bag Siub (eitt) beg SiubeS (eiueg) ttjer? ttja^? lueffen? 86 Note that the inflection of the genitive masculine and neuter is alike (c8) both in the noun and the artide; that the feminine noun is not inflected; and that the article in feminine genitive ends in ct. 34 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [87-90 87 Observe that the genitive follows the noun it limits. 88 2)er ftopf ber ^euiie ift Hein, SLVeffen Sopf ift ftein? 2)er giiicjel beg §tttii^t« ift ftarf. aSeffeu gtiigel ift ftarf ? Der Sorper beg ^it^Ieing ift !(ein/ SBeffeii ftorper ift fleiii? 2)ie g^arbe einer ^emie ift grau ober tueig, aSeffeu garbe ift grau? 2)cr 5tii9 ^itt^€^ §tt6i^t0 ift I)o^» aBeffeu ^lug ift l)od)? 2)ie ajhtttet beg ^inbeg ift l)ier. aSeffeu mnitex ift I)ier? 89 VOCABULARY head bcr ^'opf - color bic ?^arBe wing ber ?^lugcl flight ber glug strong ftar! high ()£)d) body ber ^or^er here I)ier 90 Xtv 2)ieiter beg Itiinigg Gin ftouig ^at eiiimal eiiieu Sieiier ge^abt, 3)er 5Dieuer beg Souigg I)at bie ffiadje ge^bt, aber er ift miibe geiDefen uiib ift eiiigefdjlafeiL 2)er Sonig ^t if)U gerufeU; aber ber Sieuer beg Souigg t)at eg uidjt get)ort. ®a ift ber Souig gefommeu unb l)at U)n gefu^t. ©r ^at einen aSrief beg Sienerg gefunben. 2)er 33rief ift an bie 9Kntter beg 2)ienerg gemefen, ®er ^onig l)at 91-92] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PERFECT 35 ben 35rief gelefen* 2)a i)at geftanben\* ,,Sd^ bin je^t jo miibe, benn i^ ^be lange nic^t gejdtilafen. Qc^ i)abe fo Diel jn tnn ge^abt, nnb nnn fc^icfe id) bir ba§ @elb/' 2)a l)at ber ffonig SOJitteib gefiitjlt nnb i}at @elb t)in'gelegt nnb ift fort'gegangen, ®er S)iener ift balb anf gema^t, i}at ba^ ®e(b be^ S^onig^ gefnnben nnb ift ^nerft je^r erfd^rocfen, ®ann f)at er ade^ geprt nnb f)at fic^ fe^r gefrent nnb ijat ha^ @e(b be^ ^onig^ an feine SKntter gef^ictt, 9 i VOCABULARY Masculine NoM. Gen. king ber ^'onig bel ^ouigl servant ttt Xieiter bcl ^ieuevl letter bcr 23nef beS 33nef8 Feminine NoM. Gen. story bit 6Jefc^ic^te ber ^efc^ic^te watch bie 2Boc^e ber2Bad)e mother bie 3)hitter ber SOhitter Neuter NoM. Gen. pity ba0 SD^itleib bel mnum money baS ®elb bel ®elbel Pres. Perf. I go to sleep ic^ fc^lafc etii' ic^ bin ein'gefc^Iafen he hears er ^ovt er ^ot gef)ort you seek bu flK^ft bll l^oft QefllC^t I find i(^ finbe ic^ ^abe gefimbeu you write bu f c^reibft bu ^aft gefd^rtebeu 92 ^ §at Qefianben = stood ; subject is the following clause. What is the order? 36 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [93-94 Pres. Perf. he reads er licft cr l)at gelefen he sleeps er fd^lftft er f^at gef^lafen I feel ic^ fit^le id) I)abe gefui)tt I do i^ tue id) ^be getan you lay money dow-n bu legft ^clb fjllt' bu ^a\t (^elb ^tn'gelegt he goes away er ge{)t fort' ^ er ifit forfgegaugen I wake up [^ lt)OC^e Qltf id) tin mif gemac^t I watch id) tva^t id) 'f)aht geujod^t you are frightened bU erfd^rttfft' hn hifi erfc^ro'cfen^ he rejoices very much er f reut ftC^^ f e^r er ^at \id) fe^r gefreut I send to my mot^her td^ fd^irfe ait metite tc^ 1)aht on meine 9}^ut= ajJutter ter gefd^icft tired mube a long time lange (adverb) for beuu at first ^uerft' all aHeg 93 aSer f)at ben 33rief gejd^rieben? 3ft er eiugefc^Ia^ fen? aSer I)at i^n gefnnben? ,^at ber Sonig ben Srief gelefen? 9ln tuen ift ber 93rief gemefen? 2ln meffen 9)httter ift er getDefen? 3ln bie SKntter be§ ®iener§, 2Ba§ {)at ber S)iener be§ Sonigg gefdjrieben? ^at ia^ ben Sontg geriil^rt? 2Bag l^at ber ^ontg l^ingelegt? aeSeffen ®elb ift eg getnefen? j^iix^ wen ift eg getnefen? 94 ^ Observe that an adverb closely associated with a verb, is written with the perfect participle, like a part of the verb. In the present tense it comes last in the sentence. This particle always has the accent. See App. 80. 2 Note that when an unaccented prefix is attached to the verb, the perfect participle omits the augment gf. ^ flli^ is reflexive for third person. * fiir tuen? = for whom ? 96-97] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PERFECT 37 ^at ber 2)iener be§ Sontgg ba§ ®elb gefunbeu? 3ft er erfdjtoden? ^at er jidj gefreut? 2i>ag f)at er baim getan? 3Seffen @o^n I)at gej^Iafeu? SBeffeu Sieiter Ijai bie SBa^e ge^abt? SBeffen Sonig ^at if)n gefunben? aSeffen ^uiib l)at bag @elb geje^en? &^efjen ^ferb ift j^neH gelaufen? SBeffen 33orfe ift gefaUen? SBeffen ftud)tetn f)at ber §abi^t gefreffeu? SSeffeu 9Jtutter ift bie ^enne? 95 Mil m witJi articles: 3)te ^enne ift bie SUJutter fiiid^Iein^. S)er §unb ftaufmann^ I}at bie 33orfe gefet)en. 5Da§ ^ferb SWanue^ ift grau, S)ie garbe ^unbe§, ^eiiue, ^Mdjlein^. S)er I51ug ,^em\e ift nidjt ^odj. Sie SRutter Sinbeg ift ^ier, 96 Answer: SBeffeii Siidjieiu ift uidjt gefommen? SSeffen §unb I)at bie 33orfe gefe^en? SSeffen Sruber ift ein Dntel? SBeffen SSater ift ®roBt)ater? SBeffen Sorfe ift gefaUen? SSeffen ©^ttjefter ift eine STante? SKeffen glug ift t)oc^? aSeffen ajJutter ift ^ier? SBeffen Sopf ift grofe? SBeffen gliiget ift ftart? 97 Translate: The hen's chick did not hear the mother. The merchant's purse fell. The horse of the merchant was large. The merchant's dog saw the purse. The chick's mother called it. The king's servant did not go to sleep. The grandfather is the father's father or the mother's father. Is the nephew the son of a brother or of a sister? The uncle of the brother of the father or of the mother. 38 ELEMENTS OF GEEMAN [98-100 LESSON 9 Dative 98 Indirect Object 2)er 2)iener t)at bcr SJlutter mten Srief gef^rieben. 3)cr Koiiig I)at bem Wiener ba^ ®elb gegeben* 2)ie 9Kaug :^at bcr ^a^c !etne Sc^elle auge^dugt ®er ^uub t)at bem ^aufmami 'i)a^ @elb iii^t gerettet 2)er Sauf= mami l^at bem SJJferb bie ©poren^ gegebeiu S)er Wiener l)at feittet SJluttcr eiueii 33rtef gefdjriebeu. 2)er tonig ]^at feittem ^itntv bag @elb gegebeii, Qeiie Wlam l^at blefet ^a^e feiiie ©djette auget)diigt, 2)iefer §uub l^at itntm ^attfmttiitt feiit ©elb nidjt gerettet. 99 KoM. Dat. bet Stoiiig bem ^ontg bie 5Jlutter bet ^ntttv bag ^^ferb bem ^ferb 100 SBem l)at ber 2)iener einen Srief gefdjrieben? I)er Stttttter ijat er i^n gefdjrieben, aaSag ^at er beir SJlutter gefd)riebeu? ©iueu Srief t)at er i^r gefc^rieben. 3Bem ()at ber ftaufmami bie ©poreu gegcbeu? Setnem 5pferb ijat er fie gegeben, aiJag l)at er feiuem ^Pfevb gegebeu? 2)ie Sporen ^t er ti||m gegebeu. SBem Ijat ber Sonig bag ®elb gegebeu? ®etnem 2)iener Ijat er eg gegebeu, aSag ^at er ttm Wiener gegebeu? ^a^ ®elb ijat er t^m gegebeu, * tie @|iprctt = spurs. 101-103] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PERFECT 39 101 Nominative J and Dative Nom. ber bie ba§ Dat. bem ber bem Nom. jener jeue jene^ Dat. jeucm jener jenem Nom. eiit etue eiii Dat. eiiiem eiuer ctnem Nom. metii metne nieiii Dat. meiitem meiiier meiuem Nom. tuer? Dat. mem? 102 Dative after Prepositions ^tt§ ©emiffeii be§ SBoIfS ©in ©jel fonimt einnml an^ bem Sl^albe nnb begeg^ net einem SBolf.^ liefer Ijat feit bem Xag 3nt)or nidjt^ gegefjen nnb ift fe^r Ijungrig. ®a uerfnc^t ber ©jel, fid) jn retten. ,,^cibe^ SOJitleib mit mir, id) bin arm nnb franf, id) tomme eben t)on bem 9BaIbe, ino id) anf einen SDorn getreten bin. 3d) ge^e nnn nadj ber @tabt, p einem 2)ottor, ber foU mir l)elfen.^ Unb er ^^eigt bem a55oIf feinen %n^, tnorin rid)tig ein 2)orn ftedt. 2)od)^ bei bem 2Bolf fte()t e^' feft/ ha^ er ben &)el frigt. ®o fprid)t er, nad)bem er fid) ein inenig befonnen \}at: ,,5!Kein ©emiffen befief)(t mir, bid) t)on beinem Seiben ^n be= freien." Unb im 9?n t)at er ben (£fet anfgefreffen. 1 03 1 Note that ficgepet takes dative as direct object. See App. 133. ^fidht, imperative. *lier jott mir ^ctfen = he is to help me. J )I0(^ = but. yet (adversative) cf. 78, 5. ■' Anticipatory object — in apposition with the foUowing ba^ clause. '^bct . . . feft = it is a settled matter with the wolf. 40 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [104-106 I04 Prepositions that always govern the dative: to (a place) na^ out of au^ to (a person) git near, with bcl from t)On since jeit with mit 105 VOCABULARY Masculine ' NOM. DAT. wolf ber SSoIf bent SSolf(e) donkey ber @fel bem efel woods ber SSalb bem 2Batb(e) day ber Xag bem Stag(e) thorn ber ^orn bem ^orn(e) doctor ber ®o!tor bem Softer foot ber 5u§ bem 5it§(e) FemininI: NOM. DAT. city bie Stabt ber ©tabt Neuter NOM. DAT conscience ha§> (^etOtf feU bem ^emif feu pity 'i)a^ mtki'o bem $mitleib suffering ha^ Seibett bem Seibeu Pres. Perf. I come ic^ !omme i^ Bin gefommen I meet i6) begeg'ne id) bin begeguet he eats ertgt er ^at gegeffen I try td^ t)erfu'c§e tc§ \)aU t)erfu^t he saves himself er rettet fid)* er ^at fic^ gerettet I step i^ trete i(^ Bin getreten I go i(i) ge^c t^ Bin gegangen he shows ergeigt er f)at gegeigt * Observe that the infinitive phrase, flt^ jtt tettCU (to save him- self), occurs in the text. 100-107 INDICATIVE SINGULAR PERFECT 41 PRES. Perf. it sticks e§ fterft c§ ijat geftedt he devours ei* f ri^t er i)at gefreffeit he speaks er fpric^t er l)at gefprod^en I consider ic^ befin'ne mic^ ic^ ^ahz mid^ befonnen he commands ei* Beftel^It' er f)at befoti'len he frees er befreit' er f)at befreit before 5ut)or' in -w rhich tuorin' hungry l^ungrifl really ric^ticj I)oor arm but boc^ sick !ran! firm feft just eben after nac^bcm' (conjunction) where tl)0 a little eiii mentg now nun in a trice im 9fJu I06 Seit tvann ^t ber SBoIf ge^nngert? 3Sie ift er je^t? aSem bec^egnet biefer 33?olf? 35>em begeguet ber gfel? SBag Derfud)! ber ©fel 511 tun? 2Ba^ geigt er bem aSolfe? aSBa^ i)at er in bem gn^? 2Bo^er ift er gefommen? SBo^in gef)t er? Sffier lnot)nt^ in ber ©tabt? 3u tuem ge^t ber (£je(? SBa^ jo(l ber 2)oftor bem ©fel tun? 2Ba^ ftectt in bem 5nj3 be^ ©fete? 2Bag fte^t bei bem SSolfe feft? 2Bie lange ^at \\i) ber SSoIf befonnen? 3ft \)a^ ©emiffen be^ 2Bo(fe§ fef)r jart?' SBa^ befie^It e^ it)m? @e^ord)t^ er feinem ©emiffen? SBag tnt er im 9lu? aSo!)in reitet ber Sanfmann? 9?ac^ ber Stabt reitet er, ajlit mem f priest ber 9Jlann? $IJit feinem 9?ater 1 07 ^ ttio^ttt = dweUs. ^ jUtt = tender. ^ (je^Orj^t = obeys. 42 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [108-110 j<)ri(^t ber Tlamu ^u tuem ift ha§> tiidjlein gelaufen? Su jeiner mnttn ift e§ gelaufen, SBo^er^ ift ber SSoIf gefommen? ©eit wann ^at er nid)tg gefreffett? 93ei tuem l^at ber ®iener be^ Sonigg getebt? SBem i)at er eineu Srief gefi^riebeu? 3u ttjem ift ber Sotiig gegangen? LESSON 10 pREPOSITION^S WITH ACCUSATIVE 108 ©in S)orf liegt fe^r einfam itn gelbe, ®g ift feit lange^ ffrieg getDefen, unb je^t ^ort mm, ba§ ber geinb gegen ba§ S)orf jie^t. 2)a§ 2)orf ^at feine Slrmee' miber \>n\ geinb 511 fc^icfeu unb man fiirc^tet fi^ fe()r, 3)a bittet ber ^farrer ®ott nm feinen ©d^n^, ©r foil ettt)a§ fiir ba§ 35orf tnn.^ ^n ber 9iad)t fommt and) ber geinb, bod) er jie^t Doriiber ol^ne SJJorb, <5ener ober S^otfd^Iag, 2Bag ^ai nur ben Drt bef^it^t? 3n ber ')ilcii)i \)ai eg gefd)neit nnb eine SSanb t)on ©d^nee \)ai fii^ nm bag Sorf ge^ogen, fo ha^ ber g^nb nid)tg bauon* gefe^en \)Cit ®a§ ^at "ba^ Sorf gerettet, 109 Prepositions that always govern the accusative: through, by means of buvrf) against, contrary to tUtbcr for fiir without of)Ue against, toward QCQCU ai'oiind UTtt f iO * tUO|er = whence. 2 feit lOttge = a long time. ^ fott iVin = is asked to do. >iiatiott = of it. Ill] INDI CATIVE SINGUL AR PERFECT 1 1 1 VOCABULARY Masculine NOM. Acc. war bcr ^'rieg belt Srieg enemy ber ^^eiiib belt geinb pastor ber starrer belt ^farrer God ber (^ott \)tn (^ott protectiou ber @C^U^^ ben ^d)u^ murder ber mvvh ben moxh slaughtei ' ber Xotjdjlag belt Xotfdjiag place ber Drt ben Ort snow ber (Sdjitec ben 8^nce Feminine army bie 5(rmee' bie ^Irmec' night bie ^ad)t bie 3lad)i wall bie 3Boub Neuter bie SBmtb village \)a^ ^orf ha^, ^orf field ba^ Tsd't) 'oa^ gelb fire \)a^ gcuer bo§ geiier Pres. Perf. It lies e§ liegt c§ I)at gclcgen one hears luaii I)ort man I)at gel)i)rt he marches er 5iel)t er ift gc^ogeit he sends cr irf)tcft cr I)at gefd)idt one is afraid iimu furd)tet ]id) man t)at jid) gefiird)ti he prays, heg s er bittet cr ()at gcbeten he prays er betet cr I)at gcbetet he does er tut cr l)at gctan he protects er bc}d)ufet cr I)at bcjd)ii^t it snows e» jd^neit e§ I)at gefd)neit it draws abont C» ^tct)! ftd) e^ t)at fic^ ge^ogen he sees er fiel)t cr I)at gefel)en this saves 'oa^ rettet ta^ hat gerettet 43 44 ELEMENTS OF GERJMAN [112-114 lonely ein|'am something et'tUQ^ for long feit lange past uorii'ber now je^t only mir 1 12 SBJte Uegt ha^ ®orf? 2Ber jie^t gegen bag ®orf? ^at bag 2)orf feine Strmee? ®egen tueu fdjidt man eine SCrmee? S^iird^tet man fid^ fe^r? 3u ft^^nt betet ber starrer? 28er bittet nm ®otteg ©^n|? 33ittet er nm ©otteg ©(^nfe fiir bag 2)orf? SSag ^at ®ott fiir bag 2)orf getan? 6r l^at eg befi^ii^t ®egen tnen? SBer lommt gegen bag ®orf? Snt er ettnag imber bag ®orf? aSie 3iel)t er t)ornber? SSag i)at ben Drt bef^it^t? 2Bo tft bie aSanb gemefen? 3ft fie aug ©c^nee getnefen? 3Bag ^at ber geinb nidjt gefef)en? 395ag tear um bag 3)orf? 1 13 ^onntagtnorgen ®te^/ ber 9Jiann !ommt ang ber SBette, Cangfam bnrc^ ber SSiefe ©lan^, Unb er ijixlt in ^anben^ Ijente, ©tatf beg ^flngg ben Stofenfranj. aUntter fommt mit i^rem Sinbe, Unb eg^ eitt bie ©c^nitterin, ^immelggarben^ l^ent^ p binben, 3u bem §ang beg ^immelg ^in. I 14 iM= behold! ^ttt ^iillilCtt — stereotyped phrase = in his hands. ^ fiatt — preposition governing the genitive = instead of. These prepositions are not so frequently found as those that govern the dative, or the accusative. See App. 126. * e8 — merely introductory; do not translate (somewhat like English there). ^ p'mnitU^nvttn = heavenly sheaves— picturesque figure of speech for "laying up treasures in heaven." 116-118] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PERFECT 45 SlHe^^ ^ie^t nadj einem^ ^iri^ Slu§ ber 9id^e, an§> ber S^ernV^ SSeg t)om^ lauten SSeltgetDit^te §in sum* ftiUen §aii^ be^ |)ernu binbet bag Qid hit D^d^e bie gerne ba§ SSBettgetDiiljl ftia ber §err (gen. be§ |)errn) 1 16 SBie ift ein ©onntagmorgen? 9(r6ettet bann alle§? SSa§ tut jeber? SBa§ ^at bie SSiefe? ©ie ^at eiiien ©(aiij, SBer gieljt burd^ ben ©lans ber 3Siefe? SKa§ ^d(t ber 9JJann ()eute in |)dnben? aSa^ ^dlt er jonft (on otlier days) in ,^dnben? Strbeitet er mit bent ^ftug? Setet er mit bem 3?ofentranj? SJJit mm fommt bie 9JJutter? SBa^ binbet bie ©c^nitteriu fonft? aBa§ binbet fie ^eute? SSo jie^t aUe^ ^in? I 1 7 Insert nouns in proper cases : 9lIIe§ fomntt a\\^:> unb ^ie^t nac^ , 2)ie 9JJutter fommt mit t)om , §um , ®er SJfann ^dlt in §dnben« ©onft ^dlt er . (£r ^ieljt 1 15 VOCABULARY Sunday morning bei* (Somitag' binds morgeii draws toward distance bie 2Beite goal brightness ber (^\mi neighborhood to-day ^eiite distance plough ber $flug away rosary ber 9iofen!ran5 rush of the wo she hurries away fie ettt I^IU quiet reaper (fem.) bie (Sc^nitteriii Lord sheaf bie (JJarbe burd) , gu ■ ■" ^ (lfff§ — neuter as collective, very common in German, mea- ning all people, but seeming to include all beings. ^ etnem ^ielc — emphasize einem in reading and translate : one goal. ^ ^U§ . . . i^f ttt = from near and far. *tiom, pm — contractions of tion tiem, ivi bem. ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [119-121 LESSON 11 Dative and Accusative with Preposition to express Position and Transition 1 19 Dat. 2Bo ift bie ^Jeniie? 3u bem ©arten. Ace. aSoljiu geljt fie? ^w ben ©arteiu Dat. aSo ift bie Sa|e? Sluf bet ©trafte. Ace. aaSo||itt fpringt fie? Sliif bie Strafe. Dat. ago ift bie 9Kutter? SJor "^m C^aufe. Ace. . aSa^itt get)t fie? aSor ba§ ^pan§. 120 Observe that the prepositions in, ttttf, tior may express either position or transition from one place to another, accord- ing as the verb expresses a state of rest (as ftc^eit, lilciben, fi^en) or a motion towards an object (as gc^cn, Ittttfen). When a state of rest is expressed, tlie preposition is followed by the dative, when motion towards an object is expressed, by the accusative. The prepositions of this kind arc: by an over liber upon auf behind ()inter under lintcr in, Into ill beside ncbeit between gtDljd^en before, in front of t)Or 121 SBofjiu ift ber Sonig be§ 2)ienerg gefommen? ®r ift in ba^5 ^intmer gefommen. ^ffio(}in ift ber |)abid)t geflogen? 9lnf ba^ 5!iic^Iein ift er geflogen, 3Bo ift ba^ Siic^Iein getuefen? 3n bem ®arten ift e^ gemefen. 3Sof)in ift e^ nirfjt gelanfen? Unter ben ^liigel ber 9J?ntter ift e^ nid)t gelanfen, 3)er tanfmann ^ai anf bem ^ferbe gefeffen nnb fein §nnb ift neben i^m t)ergetanfen. 2So ^ai er gefeffen? 2Bo ift ber .^nnb tjergelanfen? 2)ie 33orfe ift auf ben 33oben gefatlen, SSo^in ift bie 93orfe 122-124] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PERFECT 47 gef alien? ®er §unb ift jtDtj^en bem Saufmann unb ber 33()rfe ^in unb l)er gefprungen. 2Bo ift ber §unb Ijxn unb ^er gejprungen? ®ie SKaus ift Winter ben ©tu^l gefprungen* SBo^in ift fie gefprungen? Der Stnl)I I)at Winter bem Xifd) geftanben^ SBo ijat er geftanben? 122 Pres. Perf. er ftl3t er f)at cjefeffen id) iQufe l)er irf) bin I)erge(aiifen fie fdllt fie ift gefalleu where:- tt)l)? room 'i)a§> 3^^^^^' where to!- lUOl^ilt"? to and fro ij[n Ullb ^er garden ber kartell chair ber (3tut)l street bte Strafje tawe ber %i]<^ house hCl^ ^a\l^ 123 (§in Uttterft^ieb Sluf einem Sirrfjtnrme l)at einmal ein ©tord) gefeffen. 9((§ er niiibe gemorben/ ift er t)innnter anf hie Strafe geflugen. S)a0 !)at ber Sater gefel)en. ©^ l}at i(}m^ gut gefallen unb er ijat bei fid) gebadjt: „®i, ba^ tue id) andj!" ©r ift alfo anf ben 2:nrm getlettert, Ijat .anf bie Strafe gefe^en unb Ijat fid) bann l^inunter anf ben Soben geftiirst, 9l6er ba§ Ijat iljm^ fe^r inelj getan unb er Ijat laut gefdjrieen, 2)a I)at er gefagt: ,,2)ag gUegen^ Ijat fidj gemadjt, aber ha^ SUeberfi^en^ ift ehva^ befd)tner(idj gemefen," 124 1 Supply ift. - Dat. obj. of ^ttt gefaUen. 3 Dat. governed by ^at ttie^ getdll. * Verbal noun ; note gender. 48 125 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN VOCABULARY [125-120 Pees, Perf. he sits on the tower CY ft^t OUf bettt Xuritte er f)ot auf bent Xurme gefeffen you become h\l W'u^t bu bift geU)orben he flies down cr fliegt fjeruuter er ift ^erunter geflogeu it pleases me well e§ gefdUt Htir gut e§ ^at mir gut gefalleu he thinks er beuft er i)at gebac^t he climbs on the er ftettert auf ben er ift auf ben Xurm ge^ Xurm flettert he casts himself down er ftur^t ftC^ f)i luiuter er ^at fic^ f)tuuuter ge= ftiirgt that hurts me \)a^ tut lulr tDCf) ba§ 1:)at mir mi) getaii I scream ic^ fd)reie id) t)ab^ gefd^rieeu I say id) fage id) i)ah^ gefagt that does pretty well e§ inad^t \xd) e§ ^at fic^ geiuac^t it is e§ ift e§ ift gett)efeu difference ber Uii'terfc^ieb why: ei! steeple ber £*ird)tiirm tower ber Xurm stork ber Stord^ ground ber Sobeu when aB flying 't>a^ ^luQtn tired llulbe sitting down ba§ ^Hcberft^eu down f)initn'ter somewhat et'tDO^ tom-cat ber ^akv difficult befc^mer'tic^ 126 2Bo I)at ber ©torc^ (]eie|fen? aBo^iu ift ber Skater (]e!lettert? §at ber Stored bem Sater gefallen? SBo{)in f)at ber Sater gefef)en? SBofjin ^at er fi(^ geftiir^t? ^at i!)m bag tuef) getan? 3Sag l^at i^m rt)e^ getan, ha^ gtiegeu ober bag 9iieberfi^en? 127-130] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PERFECT 49 2)er ©tor^ fi^t auf bent 2:unn. SBorttttf fi^t er? 2luf bem Sturm. aSobur^ I)at @ott bag Sorf befc^li^t? ®ur(^ ben @^nee» SSorin lebt ber gifd)? Sm^ SBaffer* aSoritt lebt ber SSogel? Su ber Suft Siegt ba§ ®orf in bem 2BaIb? ^a, eg liegt bartn. 2i^ag lebt tm2Bajfer? ©in %i\^ lebt baritt. ka^ ift urn bag 2)orf? ©ine SBanb aug ©i^nee ift barum. 1 27 Note that mag and the demonstrative pronouns that repre- sent lifeless objects are not used as the object of prepositions, but are replaced by too and ba (before vowels tt)or and bar) and written as compounds with the preposition. in what? tDorin'? in that barin' at what? tporan'? at that baran' on what? tDorauf? on that barauf under what? hjorun'ter? under that banm'ter with what? Itjomit'? with that bamit' before what? tr)ot3or'? before that batior' for what? tDofiir'? for that bafitr' wherefore? ioarum'? therefore barum' 128 Similarly are compounded the interrogative adverb too and the demonstrative adverb bo with the adverbial particles ^in (thither) and ^cr (hither) where? tt)0? there (place) 'iia whereto? tDO'^in'? there (to) baf)in' where from? tVO^tx'? from there ba^et' 129 ^ag Sai!^lein ®u 3Sac^Iein, filber^ell unb flar, 2)n eilft t)oruber immerbar; 2lm Ufer ftet)' i^, finn' unb finn': aBo tommft bn t)er,^ tt)o get)ft bn l^in? i30 1 Contracted form of in bent. - tOO^tn and tOO^er are sometimes separated in colloquial usage. 50 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [131-182 ^i) !omm^ aii^ buitfler %eV]e\i ®d)oJ3:^ 9)leiu Saiif i]e()t iiber Slunf luib S)coo§; Stiif metitem Spiegel jdjiuebt fo nitlb ®e^ blaueii ,S^imme(^ freunblid) Stib. 3)rum ^aV id) frol}eu ^tiiberfinn;'^ ©^ treibt mid) fort^ iueif3=^ nidjt tuoljiu, 3)er^ mid) ncruf^n^ au§ bem Stein, ©r,^ beuf' tdj, iuirb meiii g^ul)rer jeiii,^ 131 VOCABULARY you hun-y bit cilft bu Bifl flccilt I meditate id) finiie ic^ I)abe nefoinien it hovers c§ fd)li)cbt c§ I)nt gcfdjlucbt it drives me on c§ treibt mid) fort ca§ fjat auf bem ©piegel be^ 33ad}lein^ n^frf)^^^6t? ai^ei^ ha^ 33ad)(ein luo^iu e^ i]e()t? 21% ()at e^ gerufeu? 3i^oI)er ()at @ott bag 33ad)leiu gerufen? LESSON 12 1 34 GRAMMAR REVIEW 1. The perfect tense of all verbs is formed by the tense auxUiary ^ttbcn or fcin + perfect participle; fcin if the verb expresses transition, jobctl in all other cases. 2. The perfect participle of all verbs is formed by prefixing the augment jjc to the stem (except for verbs that have an unaccented prefix) with endings as follows: {a) Strong verbs alter the vowel of the root and add cjl — ic^ fpringe, id) bin gcf^itungcn ; gc + stem changed + en. {h) Weak verbs do not change the root vowel, and add (e)t — ic^ folge, id) bin gcf o(gt; gc + stem unchanged + (c)t. 3. The participle stands last in the sentence. 4. The genitive masculine aild neuter has the article bcS, cincif, and the noun = ending (c)8. The genitive feminine has the article bcr, cittcr, but the noun has no inflection. 5. The dative masculine and neuter has the article bcm, eincm, and the noun has no inflection (monosyllables may add e). The dative feminine has the article bcr, cincr, (like the genitive), the noun has no inflection. 6. The dative is used after some verbs as the direct object; such verbs are: 16;) folge, ic^ begegne, ic^ f)elfe. See App. 132-138. 7. The dative is used after many verbs as the indirect object; such verbs are: ic| gebe, id) fage, ic^ jeige. See App. 141. 52 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [135 8. The following prepositions always govern the dative: ttO(^, Hon, au8, mit, JU, hti, fcit. See App. 146. These must be learned. 9. The following prepositions always govern the accusa- tive: bur^, fiir, gcgcn, tnibcr, o^ne, urn. See App. 164. 10. After the prepositions of position : an, ouf, Jitltcr, in, ncbcn, fiber, nntcr, tior, jmifr^cn, the dative is used if the verb expresses rest, and the accusative if the verb expresses motion toward the object. See App. 147. 11. tUOg and the demonstratives that represent lifeless ob- jects are not used as objects of prepositions. Instead of them we use nio(r) and ba(r) to form a compound with the prep- osition. See App. 171. 12. The definite article + preposition are contracted when euphony permits : an + bem = ttm, an + 'i>a^ = on8, in + bent = im, ill + \>a^ = inS, ju + bem = jum, 511 + ber = jnr, bei + bem = Mm, 135 VERBS Perfect Ten^se Strong t^ })ait bag 33u^ gefe^en bii ^ttft ha^ Su^ gefe^en er ^at bag 95uc^ gefe^en ic^ Bin in bag dimmer gelammen hn iift in bag dimmer gefommen er ift in bag dimmer gefommen Weak t^ me ben a3rief ge^ttW bn ^aft ben Srief ge^ait er ^at ben 33rief ge^ait id) Bin bem aJZanne gefolgt bn 6ift bem 9Kanne gefolgt er ift bem Wanne gefolgt 136-137] INDICATIVE SINGULAR PERFECT 53 136 NOUNS Definite Article and Demonstrative Pronoun Masc. Fern. Neut. N. ber"^ aTcann btefe abutter jeneg Stnb G. be^ 9JJanne§ biefer 9Jiutter jeneg ^Hitbe^ D. bent SJJanne biefer 9)Zutter jenem ftinbe A. ben 9Kann btefe 9JJntter jene^ Stnb Indefinite Article and Possessive Pronoun N. ein §nnb meine S^tuefter nnfer 23 ud) G. etne^ §nnbe§ nteiner ©djtnefter iinfere^ 23ud)e^ D. einent ^unb(e) nteiner @(^tne[ter nnferem 33ud)(e) A. einen |)nnb ntetne ©c^tnefter nnjer 33nd) 137 REVIEW EXERCISES /. Give present and perfect paradigms of: etlft, bift, iiaft, ruft, !aufe, fpringft, folgt, geflettert II. Decline: ber 9JJann, ber SKalb, bie 33Iume, \>a^ 23dd)Iettt, \>(i^ 33ilb, ba^ Ufer, ber giiljrer, bie Sal^e. Ill Fill out: 2)er ©tord) ji^t anf 2:nnn» ©r fliegt t)on 2^urnt, ®er ^ater flettert anf Xnrnt. 2)te ©rofetnntter ift anf ©trage, ®ie fflJntter ge^t in (Sarten, 2)er gifd) leOt — Staffer. 2)er 55ogeI lebt in Snft 2)er ©tordj fliegt t)on — 2^nrin, IV, Ansioer: SBo^in fliegt ber ©tord)? 3Bof)er fontntt ber 33ac^? aBoriiber ge^t fein £anf? aSSent ^at bie aJlang bie ©^eUe ange^dngt? SBent f)at ber 2)iener *For full declension of the articles and pronouns see App. 11 Wd \% '■ 54 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [187 beg Sonig§ ben 33rief Qejcfjrieben? SSem ift ber SSoIf begegiiet? 3Bot)er ift ber ©fel (]e!ommeii? aSoIjiu ift er gegangen? SBag ^at er in bem gug geljabt? 3Beni ift er begepet? 33Jag t)at bei bem SBotfe feftgeftaubeu? aSag I}at bag S)orf gerettet? aiJoraug ift bie Sl^aiib ge^ madjt? SKo ift bie "i&anh getucfeu? SKer ift gegen bag S)orf gefommen? 2Beu fdjicft man luiber ben 3^eiiib? V. Translate: 1. The man went to the house of heaven on Sunday morning. 2. The mother came with tlie child. 3. The Lord saved the village. 4. The brightness of the meadow. 5. The hen's chick. G. The pastor of the village begged God for protection. 7. The servant of the king wrote his mother a letter. 8. The king gave the servant the money. 0. The wolf met the donkey. 10. The doctor did not help the donkey. 11. The wolf devoured him in a trice. 12. The cat sat on the tower. 13. The stork flew from the tower upon the ground. 14. The cat jumped from the tower upon the street. 15. Where did the cat sit? 10. Where did he jump (to)? 17. Whence did he jump? 18. AVhat hurt him? 19. Where does the brooklet go? 20. Whence has it come? 21. Whither does its course go? >^ \ 138-141] INDICATIVE PRETERITE 55 CHAPTER III INDICATIVE PRETERITE. PLURALS 138 139 I40 LESSON IS ^er Stord) ^t^i aiif bcm Xurmc gcfcffcn. ©r fog mif bem Xurm. ^er tater tfl auf bic ©trnfic gcf^jrungcn. @r flirttitg aiiT bie 8traftc. ^er .^ater ift ant ben Xurm gcflcttcrt. ©r flcttcrtc auf bcit Xurm. Ta§ glicgen ^ot fid) gcmttf^t. Xa§ gfi^G^" mai^tc fid). Strong InQnitive Preterite Perfect Part. fi^cit fflfe Oefeffeit fpringcit flirong Weak gcfprungcn flctteru ftettcrtc c^etlettert mad)eit ma^tc (]cmac^t 1 4 1 Observe that strong verbs form their preterite from the infinitive by an alteration of the stem-vowel, and that no suffix is added. To form the preterite weak verbs add it to the stem. The stem is found by dropping the Ctt of the infinitive. The infinitive, preterite, and perfect participle constitute the principal parts and on them are based all the modes and tenses. The principal parts of every strong verb must be learned. 56 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [142-145 42 paradigm- Strong fe^eit, fo§, gefe^en bu faf)|l er \di) PRETERITE "Weak fragen, fragtc, gefragt ic^ fragte bu fragteft er frogte Note that in the preterite singular of both strong and weak verbs only the second 2)&niOn shows a personal ending, (c)flt. 143 9Bag icbcr {a§ ©in 8pec^t befuc^te einmal eiiten "^^axu Sine %anbt gtiig mil. „9^un, iDie ()at bir I)eute ber ^a^ dJefieber be§ ^fau§? GRAMMAR 147 Strong Verbs 1. The principal parts exhibit a vowel variation in the stem. 2. The preterite has no suffix. The personal endings of the singular are: — , (c)fl, — . 3. The perfect participle ends in en. 4. The imperative is formed by dropping the fl of the second person singular. Note, however, that only c verbs change the vowel. 5. In the present tense, the personal ending of the second 1 48 ^ Jtt ^attfc = at home. ^ an bem $f au = about the peacock. 58 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [149-150 and third singular formerly was of a nature to produce umlaut (cf. App. 7), hence: e becomes t e " ie a '' a an ' ' an 149 In the following t becomes t: give gebeu gab gegeben Present Preterite , • id) geOe id) gab hn gibft bu gabft er gibt er gab speak fprecf)eu fprac^ gefprod)eu icf) f precipe id) fprad) bii iprirf)ft bit fprad)ft er fprirf)t er fprad) f break brcd^CH brad) gebroc^en id) breeze ic^ brad) hn hv\(i)\t hn brad)ft er brid)t er brac^ become toerbeii tuarb (tuurbe) getuorbeu id) tDerbe ic^ tt)urbe or ttjarb^ hn it)irft hn iDurbeft or trarbft er U)irb er iDurbe or toarb throw tDerfen tporf gett)orfen ic^ tperfe ic^ rt)arf hu n^irfft hn tt)arfft er tt)irft er trarf I50 ^Note that ttiettlen lias two preterite forms, one strong, one weak; tuurbc is more frequently used. The second and third person singular present has undergone the same assimilating process that we observed in |afi and l^ttt. The imperative is weak. 151] INDICATIVE PRETERITE 59 151 In the following C becomes \t : see fel)en fal) Gefel)cn td^ fc()c i^ fo^ \>u ficl)ft bit fa^ft cr jtc()t cr \al) read lefcit Ia§ gclefeii i^ lefc ic^ la§ bit licft bit iQfeft er licft cr ia^ steal ftctjien ftal)! gefto()tcn i^ ftc^Ie id) fta^I \)u fticl)Ift bit fta!)lft er ftic^tt cr fta()( step treten trat gctrcten id^ trete id^ trat hit trittft* bit tratft er tritt cr trat take ncf)incn na^m gciiommcn id) ncl)mc i^ ita^m bit nimmft* bit iialimft er nimmt cr na()m Irregular fein iDor gciDcfcn tc^ bin id) tvax bit bift bit tDarft erift Imperative er luar flib! fpric^! bric^ ! ttjerbj ;! mirfl tritt! ntinm ! f ict) ! lk§> ! fticl)(! fei! * Observe that in tretcil and ne^men the long c is changed to short I and the following consonant is doubled. 50 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN Two Exceptions go ge^en Qtng gegangen Present Preterite i^ ge^e tc^ ging h\t ge^ft \>n gingft er ge^t er ging stand ftel)en ftanb geftanben x6) fte^e i '&ad)Um? ©tie^It ber ^aufmaiut U^ ^elb au§ ber SBorfe? ^u trtttft in ba§ Simmer. 2Ba§ tue i^? 28a§ tut ^arl? SBeu fie^t ber^ater anf bem Xurm? 2Ba§ tut ber ©torc^? ^a§ 9}Zabd)eu tt)irb eine ?5rou uub ber ^uaOe tt)irb eiu 9}^auu. 2Ba§ tpirb 9Jlarie? 2Bq§ tnirft bu? S33a§ tragft bu gur S^ule? 2Ber fallt t)on bem Xurme? 28a§ Ijciltft bu in ber §anb? ^ie %anU antn)ortet bem 9 1 65 Translate^ using preterite: Where was I walking? I was walking by myself in the forest. Where did you go ? I went into the forest. Why did he go into the forest ? He went into the forest to seek^ flowers. Did the man find anything [etlt)a§] in the forest ? Yes, he found a flower. What did he do with it? He carried it to the garden by the house. There he planted it, and there it still grows. Change these sentences to the present and to the perfect. LESSON 15 Plural of Verbs 1 66 ^er Wiener be§ ^onig§ fi^t in bem Si^tmer imb jrf)reibt. ^er ^ontg, W ^onigin imb ber Wiener fi^cn in bem ^itnmer be§ ^'onig^ unb fdireibcn. 2Ba§ tun fie? (Sic fi^cn unb f^reibcn. ^er Wamx, bie gran unb ba§ ^inb fe^cn unb ^orcn. 2Ba§ tun fie? Sic fef)cn unb ()orcn. ^ie Xanbe fliegt, ber §abic§t fliegt auc^, ber (S|)ec^t ftiegt and). ®ie Xanbe, ber §abi(^t unb ber Spec^t fUegcn. ^ie §enne pidt ba§ ^orn, "ba^ ^iic^lein ptcft an^ \>a^^ ^orn. ®ie §enne unb \>a^ ^ii^lein picfcn "t^a^ ^orn. ©in Wann, eine ^xaw unb ein ^inb fommcn. ^' Sing. (3rd person) Plural (3rd person) er, fie, e§ ge^t fie get)cn ,/ /, ,r vuft „ nifcn ,/ ,/ ,. tut // titn // n „ tanft „ taufcn The third person plural is formed by adding en to the stem. 2 i 68 The verb to he is irregular. Singular Plural er, fie, e^ift fie finb I 69 1 Note that the infinitive phrase comes last in the sentence. 2 ttttt adds only n, since the stem ends in a vowel. 170-171] INDICATIVE PRETERITE 65 ^ie 35ogel tjaben'^ ^ lua^irltc^ gut: (Sie fltegen, I^iipfen, fiitgen; (Sie ftngen frifd^ iinb tt)ol)tgeinnt, ^ag SSalb mtb gelb er!ltngeiu Sie finb gefunb imb forgenfret Uiib finben, it)a§ gut fc^ntetfet;^ SSo^iu fie fliegeu, mo'^ aud) fei/^ 3ft fc^ou ber Xifc^ gebecfet;' Hub ift* t^r Xaqtwcvi t)oIIbrarf)t, SDauu ^ie^u^ fie iu bie ^dume ; ©te rul^en ftill uub fauft bie 9iac^t ^ Uub f)abeu fiifee Xrdume. Uub tozdt '^ fie frii!) ber ©onueufc^eiu, ®auu fc^tuiugeu fie'g'^ (S^efieber^ Uub fliegeu iu bie ^t\i \)\x\.tm ^^ Uub fiugeu i^re Sieber. 171 1 ^ttften'g (= ^albctt eS) pt = are well off. '^ f d^merfet, fiCberfet— an c before t on account of meter. ^ujo'g (=ttJO eg) and^ fet = wherever it be. * Xtttb ifi t^r Xagettier! etc. — a conditional clause with the con- ditional conjunction tiietttt omitted. This omission always causes the inversion of the position of the subject and the predicate. See App. 188. ^ jie^tt (short form of Jte|en) literally = draw, poetically = wander, betake themselves. ^ biC ^tad^t — accusative of duration of time. See App. 169. ^tiieift flc, etc.— see note 4 above. «flc'g = flc bag. ^ fd^ttilttflctt fle'g ©cflebcr = they soar. '"Itt bie SJcU ^itteitt=into the world. This tautological use of the adverbial phrase + adverb is often found. Cf. auS ber %ViX |lttatt§!= out of the door, gum Sfcttfter ^crcttt!= into the window, etp. 66 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [172-174 172 VOCABULARY Singular Plural flies er fliccjt fie fticgctt hops fie ppft fie t)ii))feu sings €§ fingt fie fingeii resoundM e§ erfUngt' fie er!(iit'gen is fie ift fie ftitb finds c» finbet fie ^n'i>m tastes c^ fc^mecft fie fc^meden rests fie ritl)t fie ru[)eit wakens e^ Wcdi fie tuerfen swings cr fcfjtuingt fie fd)tuiugen bird ber SSoget bic m^d tree ber 55aum bic ^dumc dream ber ^raum bic Xrdunic song ba§ £ieb bic Siebcr truly Jual)l-U^ day's labor ZaQtWtxt fresh frifc^ 1 completed Dollbrac^t' joyous iuot)(genmt sweet fii§ carefree forgeilfrei sunshine Suuiieufc^ein set, spread gebccft' plumage OJefie'ber^ 1 73 SSer l)at'§ gut '? 2Bo^ tun fie ? SSie fiugen fie ? SBa§ mad^t SSalb uub gtur crfliugeu ? ^a§ 8ingeu ber SSi)ge( ma^t 2Satb uub giur erftiugeu. 2Ba§ freffeu bie ^oge( ? SSo fiubeu fie ba§ ? 2S3o ift ifjr %[)d) gebecft ? SSBer becft uufereu %i\d) ? SBa§ ift ha^ Xagemer! ber SSi)ge( ? Siugeu ift bag Xagetoer! ber 3^oge(. SSa§ ift meiu , ^agetuer! ? SSa§ ift 'i>a^ Xagemer! beS 8rf)ul)macf)er§? be§ 6d)ueiber§? be§ Eoc^§ (cook)? SSaun ift ba§ ^agetuerf ber SSogcl lJolIbrad)t ? 28a§ tun fie bann ? 2So ruf)en fie? SBic 1 74 ' @f Hc'bcr, observe that nouns as well as verbs have unaccented prefixes. 175-176] INDICATIVE PRETERITE 67 (ange ? SBann f)ahai fie Xriinine ? 3Sann iuecft fie bcr (2onnen= fd^ein ? 2Ba§ tnn fie, mnn er fie mecft ? 2BoI)in fUegen fie '? 2Ba§ tuw fie bo ? 2Ba§ tun bie SSoget ? 28elc^c 35uget befuc^ten ben ^fou ? 2Bo fingen bie S^ogel ? 2Bot)on erflingen SBalb nnb ^^Inr ? §i)rft bn bie SSi)gel fingen V ^'arl unb iUiarie, l)ort Hir bie 33iJge( fingen ? 3<^ ging im 2Balb. 93?ein ^ater nnb id^, mir gingcn im 2Balb. S93a§ fonb ti^ V SSa§ fanbcn loir ? ^u fingft ein Sieb. ^n nnb bein 33rnber, i^r fingt Sieber. 3Sir fingen Sieber, n)ir fangen Sieber, wiv l)aben Siebtr ge= fnngen. 2Ba§ tnt il)r ? 3I)r fingt. 2i^a^ tatet iftr ? 3f)r fangt. 2Bo^ ()abt il)r getan ? 3f)r Ijabt gefnngen. Sie ge^en an^ bem ^a\x^, fie gingen au^ bem $au§, fie finb an§ bem 4)an^ gegangen. 175 GRAMMAR LESSON Present Singular Plural id) finge ttiir fingrn bu fingft il)r fingt er fingt Preterite fie fingen Sie^ fingen ic^ fang tt)ir fangen bu fangft il)r fangt er fang Perfect fie fangen ©ie fangen id) I)abe gefungen toir \) ^Hubleiit, ha§> grdittetn, ba§ ^iid)(ein, ber Sel)rer, ber @d)ufter (shoemaker) , ber Dn!e(, ber Sc^luager, ba§ WcLt)d)zn, ha§> g^nfter (window). 182 ^ Note that feniinines have no inflection in sing. See App. 17. 2 Nouns that end in n. do not have this inflection. 70 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [183-184 183 ^e§ mmriH ^tttitnfi ^arl ber ^rogc intcrcffterte fic^ fe()r fiir Silbung mib ©r^ie^ung. 3u jeiiter 3^^^^ fonutc man mir in bcii .tloftern 5111* Sdjule gc^cn. ^arum griinbete ber ^aifer cine Semitic an feinem §ofc. ^ie ©c^iitcr lernteu bort bon Scl)rern, btc ber ^aifer aii§ ©ngtonb bericf. ®ic Sl^dter, Ditfet iinb ©rogudter ber Sc^iiler lunrcn an bem §ofc bc§ ^nifer§, fie tuaren feine 3Jatgeber unb ,f rieger. ^od) mand^er Snabc mar faut unb ungef)orfam unb lernte nic^t§, iueit er glaubte, ha^ ber ©influg fcine^ !!8ater» ober feine§ Dn!el^ il)n bcfc^ii^en foUte.' 3(ber e§ iuaren'' nod) anbere 3(^u(er in ber <3c^ute. 9fad)!ommcn t)on ^riegern, ^rompetern, ^ienern, tut ^ampf fiir f Onig unb SSatertanb gcfaHen,* fanben I)ier 3(ufnal)me. (Bim^ Xagc^'fam ber .ftaifcr, urn bie 8d)utc ju befuc^en, bic Stiller 5u priifen unb uon ben Se^rern 33eric^t 5U Ijoxtn. <3etn ■•^irger tuar gro6, aU er fanb, bag @d)iiler, bie" 9cad)!ommen feiner 9?atgcber unb S'rieger luaren, nid)t fo fleigig luaren aU jcnt, bic feine Skater unb iOnfet Don SDZad^t unb 5(nfe()en l)atten. ^a befaljl ber ^aifer ben S^iilern, bie" faut Joaren, auf eine 8eite 5U ger)cn. 3)ie anbercn^ ftettte er ouf bie anbere <3eite. 9hin rief er jencn' ^u: „3l)r Schiller, uieint il)r ber ©iuflug eurer ^dter unb Ouf el folltc euc§ Ijelfeu? 8c^amt end)!" 3Bei( ij^dter unb ©rogodter topfer iuoren, mii$t il)r ftcigig fein urn ^u Derbicnen, bog il)r fo(d)e ^^dtcr 1 84 * jtt fcinr r ^f U = in his time. ^ i^n 6t|(i^it^en fottteI= should protect him. Observe order. ' f ^ tnarrn = there were. * ftffttttCtt— participle of strong verb fnllni, flfl, Hffjlffftt, used adjectively to modify Itriffiem, etc. ' fittf^ Xagfl — genitive of time. See App. 128. « lltf = who. ' bie ttltberttt = the others. * jfllfn (dat. pi.) == the former, btffe = the latter. ^ |d||dtnt eil^— imperative reflexive. 185-186] INDICATIVE PRETERITE 71 ^abt! 3^r anbcru aber, bic t^r feinc i8dter me^r ^ahi, obcr bo^^ nut fold^e, bic arm [inb, auf euc^^ bin ic^ ftolj! 3l)r tDcrbct einniaP meinc ^flatgebcr unb .trieger, mcinc Seljrer unb ^^sriefter I Unb merfl eii^ bicfen meiiteu 2Ba^l(pnid): Qd) fragc noc^ bc^ 9JJauue^ S^erbieitft, ua(f) fcincm Xiamen ni^t" 185 VOCABULARY Strong Nouns— Class I convent ba§ .tlofter bie .tlofter pupil ber Sd^iiler bie 6d)iiler teacher bcr Se^rer bie Se^rer emperor ber .toifcr bie taifcr father ber ^ater W ^dter uncle bcr Oitfel bie Oiifet councilor ber D^atgebcr bie 9latgeber warrior ber ,<^rieger bie ftrteger trumpeter ber Xrompeter bie Xrompeter vexation ber ^(rger power, respect ba^ 2(nfe()cn , priest ber ^^^riefter bic ^ricfter Strong Verbs to call berufcu bcrtcf bcrufen to command bcfc^tcii befo()l befol)lcn (bu bcfiet)lft, er befte^lt) Weak Verbs to take an interest fld^ intcrefficrcil to found grunbeit to learn IcrilCU to believe gtaubeil to protect befd)ii^cn to test priifen to place, put ftcttcn must miiffcit to earn UcrbtCItCn 1 86 * tiO^ nitr foll^C = at least only sucli. ttltf fttdi = of you. '^ f tnmar = at some time. 72 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [187-188 desert t)a§> ^erbienft' Influence ber @iuf(u§ Charles the Great ^avl ber ^rO^e others nnbere education bie 93itbuug descendants bie 9^ad)!onimen pedagogy bie ©r^ieii'img struggle ber ^ampf time bie 3eit native country 'tia^ SCaterlaitb one (any one) man (seeApp.35) here l^ier court ber §of asylum bie 5(ufnaf)me England (bo§) ©iigranb In order to urn (with inf.) ber S3erid)ty/ many a manc^er report boy ber ^nabe might bie m^ad^i lazy faut side hk Sette because iDeit such folrfie diligent fteigig watchword ber SSa^lfpru^ brave tapfer 187 SSer loaren bie 58dter unb ^ro^Dater ber ©chiller be§ ^^aifer§? SSofier t)at ber ^aifer bie Se{)rer berufen? SSeld^e ^naben iDareii faut unb uugeI)orfam? SSer JDaren hit ©driller, bie fleigig luaren? §at ber ^aifer bie 8d^ute befud^t? SSantm? 2Ba§ h^otlte er bou ben Se!)rern ^oreu? SBetd^e (Schiller iuaren fleigig? SSeld)e toaren faul? 2Bot)in ftettte ber ^aifer ))k\t? 2Bo{)in fteHte er jene? SSeld^e f^att er, biefe ober jene? 5(uf lueld^e ttjar er ftol^? 2Sa§ JDurbeii bie, bie flet^ig traren? SSa§ tun ©filter? 2Ba§ finb fie? SSa§ tun bie Se^rer? 6ie lel^ren bie ©(filter, ^'art, bifl hn ein Se^rer ober ein ©djiiler? ^art unb SSiK^elm, toa^ feib i^r? SBa§ tut i^r in ber ©c^ute? 1 88 Translate: The mothers of the pupils were proud. The emperor commanded the teachers and pupils. The cousins (masc.) love the uncles. Do you like* the birds and bird- lings? Do you hear the birds in the garden? The gardens are beautiful in summer, but cold in winter. The girls love the apples. * Give three forms. 1S9-192] INDICATIVE PRETERITE 73 189 liber alien ©ipfelu 3ft ^x^\ Sn alien SStpfeIn ©piireft bn I90 mountain top tree top Weak feel fpiiren wait tDorten rest rnt)en ^anm einen ^audj ; SDie SSogelein fc^metgen im SBalbe. SSarte nnr, balbe 9f{n()eft bu and) ! Aortic. VOCABULARY Nouns of Class ber ©ipfel bte (SJipfet ber mp\d bie SSipfet Verbs Strong to be silent fc^ttjcigen jc^ttjieg gefc^micgen breath bev soon Oalbe ^an^ peace bte 'tRll^t scarcely fanUl 91 LESSON 17 ^ STRONG DECLENSION — CLASS II Singular ^cr ©aum ift grun» ®ie garbe bc8 ©ttumcS ift griin, ^ie ^^ogel f%n anf bcm ©attm(e).^ 3d^ fe()e ben ©ttum. Plural ^ic ©dumc finb griin. ^ie garbe bet 95ttttme ift griin. ®ie ^oget fi^en anf ben ©oumen. 3c^ fe^e bie ©dume. 92 ^ With monosyllables the e in dat. sing, is optional. 74. ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [193-196 193 Model Noun— Class II Sinpriilar Plural ber a^ ^aar (pair), ha^ ^ult (desk). 4. Polysyllabic masculines and neuters: ber .funig, ber %rixf}' Itug (spring), ber SihigUng (youth), ba§ ^e^eimui» (secret). 196 2)ic 2Bo(ff 3n einem SBalb gab e§^ 2Bi)Ife. 3^fi ©i)l)ne eine§ (Sc^afer^ l^iiteten ©c^afe auf einer 2Biefe in ber 9Zd^e be§ 233albe§. ^ie Sente t)om ^orfe in ber 9^a^e fagten: „333enn SSolfe an§ bem 2Ba(b fon^ men, jo ruff'^ nn§. ^ann fommen mir nnb ^elfen." 2^age bergingen, ^ 0ft6 fl = there were. See App. 87. ^ rttft (i^r) irnl = call us. 197-198] INDICATIVE PRETERITE 75 mtb e§ iDurbe langlueitig. ^a riefeit ftc ciumal: „2Bbtfe! SBolfc!'' ititb hk Scute famcit gef|jnmgen/ ^a ladjkn bic @oI)itc be^ (Sd^dfer^ bor greubc imb mm riefcit fie alle Xage:"^ „2Bolfe/' obgteid^ feiitc Xiere ha luaren. 3»^c^t iuurbeit bie Seiite ber <^ad)i^ miibc. %U ctiie^ Xage» tmr!tid) 5tuei 5B0tfc l)crborbrad)eu uiib bie Sc^afe fragen, Urn niemaiib auf it}reu 9tuf mib fie tomiteii itid)t» tim at^ bie §dnbc riitgen imb jd)reieu. 197 VOCABULARY Nouns of Class II ber SSoIf bie SSolfc ber 8o()u bie 8ot)ne ba^ Sd)af bie ®d)ofc ber Xag wolf son sheep day- people animal ba§ taten fie? SSie murben bie Sente? ^amen fie bann nid)t nte^r? 2Ber !ant anient (at last)? 2Ba§ taten bie So^ne be§ (5c^afer§? 200 Fill onty giving 'proper plural forms: %\\^ — , ©tii^t — unb S3dn! — finb in biefem ^i^ii^^i*- '^^^ ©chafer );)(ii fec^§ (5o^n — . 3n ben 3intmer — finb 9}JobeI (furniture). 3" "^^^ ©drten finb S3dnm — . SInf ben S3dnm — finbet man ^))fel nnb D^itff — . ^ie (Sc£)iiter mac^en ben Sel)rer — * SOlii^e (trouble). 3d^ l^aht §mei gug— . SDie gliiff— 5rmeri!a§ finb grog. SSit^etm nnb ^art, if)r meine ©chiller. Decline in singular and plural all nouns of the first and second class that have occurred in this lesson. * Dative of interest. See App. 142. 201-204] INDICATIVE PRETERITE 77 LESSON 18 STRONG DECLENSION— CLASS III 20 I . Singular ^a0 Ctcb be§ 95ogel§ ift fd^on. ^er 9?amen bc8 8icbc§ ftel)t in bent 33urf)c. 3(^ lauf^e* bcm Sicb(c) be^ 3$ogel§. prft bu ba0 8icb? Plural ^ic Cicbcr be§ SSoge(§ finb fd^un. ^Die 9^ameu bcr Cicbcr ftelieit in bent S3nc^. gc^ lanfc^e ben Sicbcrn, §orft bn bic Siebcr? 202 Singular Plural ba§ S3ncf) bie 33uc^cr be§ 33nd)e8 ber ^^nd)cr bent S3nd)C ben ^^iic^crn ba§ 93ud) bie S3uc^er 203 {a) Plurals take cr umlaut if stem-vowel permits. (Z>) Membership of Class III: 1. Monosyllabic Neuters. 2. A few monosyllabic masculines. 3. Masculines and neuters ending in turn. 4. Polysyllabic neuters accented on last syllable. 204 Like 93tt^ are declined: 1. Neuters: 'Xio.^ §an§, ba§ ^inb, \i^^ 33ratt (leaf), ba§ 93ilb, ba§ getb. 2. Masculines: ber 9Rann, ber SSalb, ber %t\\i (spirit), ber SSitrm. 3. Nouns in turn : ber grrtnm (error), \^Qi^ 5(ltertunt (age). (See App. 22.) 4. Polysyllabic neuters : \iO.^ ©ofpitar. * lanfr^C = listen to. See App. 138. 78 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [205-208 205 ^crbflHcb 93init ftitb id)on bie 2Bd(ber, dJelb bie Sto^^jelfeiber Uiib ber §erOft beginnt. Hub bie flatter fatten, Unb bie ^f^ebet iunlleii, ^ii()l mf)t ber Wmh. 206 ^ftetiblifb 2)er 5lbenb fommt leife f)ernieber 5(iif Sorter imb SSdIber iinb ^^^v. @§^ ftf^tDeigen ber S?i)glein Cieber, ^od) e i n Sieb^ ^ort man nut, 207 VOCABULARY Strong Nouns— Class III forest ber SBalb bie SSdIber stubbiefieid bag Stoppelfelb^ bie @to^^e(felber leaf ba§ maii bie flatter village 'aa^' ^orf bie ^orfer song bo§ Sieb bie Sieber Strong Verbs to fall fallen (bii fdllft, er faHt) fie( gefatlen to begin beainnen begaim begonnen Weak Verbs to wander toaUen to blow mi)m 208 ^
  • k ©c^meftern ber 8ct))r)efter ber Sc^tt)eftern ber @(^n)efter ben ©c^n^eftern bie (5d^rt)efter bie (Scf)n)eftern 213 All weak masculines take the ending (c)n in all cases except the nominative singular. ber ^nobe bie ^naben be§ ^naben ber ^naben bem ^naben ben ^naben ben ^naben bie inoben 214-217] INDICATIVE PRETERITE »1 ber §err bic |)erren be^ §errn ber ^erren bent ^cxvn ben §erren ben ^erin bie ^erren 2 1 4 Singular Plural bie Se^rerin bie Se^rerinnen ber £ef)rerin ber Sefirerinnen ber Sefirerin ben Set)rerinnen bie Se^rerin bie Se^rerinnen 215 The suffix ttt is affixed to many masculine nonns (especially names of occupation or nationality) to form the feminines. Ex. — ber ©tubent', bie ©tubentin; ber @c^ii(er, bie ©d^iilerin; ber 5(meri!a'ner, bie 5Cmeri!anerin. Wherever possible, this suffix produces umlaut — cf. ber ^oc^, bie ^od^in (cook); ber S3aner, bie SBdnerin (peasant) . Note the doubling of the tl in the plural. 2 1 6 Membership of Weak declension : 1. Polysyllabic Feminines. 2. Some monosyllabic feminines (but see Strong Class II): bie U^r (clock), bie gran (woman), bie Qa^l (number). 3. Masculines ending in c: ber ^nabe, ber S^^nge, ber (SJatte (husband), ber 'tRdbz (raven), ber §afe (hare.) 4. A small number of masculines formerly ending in c: ber §err (master, Mr.), ber ®raf (count), ber Siirft (prince.) 5. Foreign masculines with accent on last syllable: ber ©tubent' (student), ber ©tefrntt' (elephant), ber ©olbat' (soldier.) 2 1 7 Mixed Declension Some nouns are strong in the singular, weak in the plural. Singular Plural ba§ 5luge \>it 5lugcn be§ 5lngc8 ber ^Tugcn bem 9Iuge ben 5(ugcn ba^ ^uge bie 5tugctt 82 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [218-220 2 1 8 Like ^ugc are declined : ba§ Df)r, ber a^ berfe^rt, tt)enn bu fannft, bu (Jiefc^eiter!''* 220 lerfi— literally y^rsf; translate only. ^ au§fa| = looked, appeared ' ttllf ^ri^ jog = attracted to himself. * Jlltr— ethical dative. See App. 143. ^ 0|tie fi^ Jtt Ikefinnen = without hesitating. Note the use of Ger- man infinitive as object of the preposition where English employs the present participle. See App. 217. ^mari^te flii^ nili^t miffctt = pretended not to notice it. 'ttor^ eine = another. ^iiu ®e|(§eitcr— translate here, smarty, you! 221] INDICATIVE PRETERITE 83 22 1 VOCABULARY Weak Nouns Singular Plural number bie Qa^i bie 3^^!^" school bie (Bd)\ik bie Sd^ulen boy ber ^nabe bie ^naben attention bie 5lufmer!fam!eit blackboard bie %a\tl bie ^afeln boy ber Sunge bie Sungen number bie S^iimmer bie 9^umnteru boy ber S3urfd)(e) bie 93urfrf)en Mixed Nouns Gen. Sing. Nom. Sing. ber (Staot ber 3nfpe!tor 'ba^ 5Uige ba§ p^r be§ @taate^ be§ Snfpeftor^ be^ ^hige^ be§ O^reg Strong Verbs to look, appear aii§'fef)en (bu fief)ft faf) aii§ an^, er fie()t mi^) gie^eu Nom. Plural bie ©toaten bie Qnfpefto'ren bie §(ugen bie Oi)ren au§'gefet)en to draw- to consider to look at to send befinnen an'fe^en frf)ic!en iiennen 509 bejaiiu Weak Verbs geaogen befonnen an'gefe^en nannte to open to know (be ac- / quainted with) f to try to burst tDiffen t)erfiic^eii platen yearly jdtirlic^ seven jtebeu old alt smart gefc^eit auf'jperren fperrte aiif tpugte tjerfuc^te genannt (see App. 88) auf gefperrt getDU^t (see App. 83) t)erfuc^t (see App. 80, 1) 24 (four and twenty) 76 (six and seventy) wrong side before you can t)ierimb5tt)an5ig fec^^unbfiebsig t)er!e^rt bu fannft 84 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [222-224 222 233of)m ging ber 3nf|)e!tor? SBa§ tut ein 3nfpe!tor? SBie \af) ber Sunge au^? ^eben ©ie ein (S^nont^m fiir „ba: Sunge." ^a§> ift bie aJie^rga^l tjon „3unge" imb bem @t)nont)m? SSa§ tuoate ber 3nf^e!tor t)on bem Sungen ^aben? S3e!am er fie? SSofjin fc^rteb ber gnf^eftor bie 3<^^^? ©c^rieb er fie ric^tig ober berfe^rt? SSotlte er ben ^naben bamit fangen? (SJetang e§ if)m? 2Ba§ fagte ber ^nabe sule^t? 223 WRITTEN EXERCISES 1. Give singular and plural genitive of all the nouns in the above story. 2. Change tne entire story so as to have all the nouns in the plural.' 3. Form feminines of: ber Siigner (liar.), ber Sefer (reader), ber ©dnger (singer) ; decline them in singular and plural. LESSON 20 224 GRAMMAR REVIEW 1. The preterite indicative of strong verbs is formed by an alteration in the stem vowel — no suflfix is added to the stem : toar, ging, fta^. 2. The preterite indicative of weak verbs is formed by add- ing tc to the stem of the present : liebtc, I)offlc, befiic^tc. 3. Personal endings in preterite singular are the same for strong and weak verbs, — , ft, — . 4. The principal parts of all verbs consist of: present infinitive, preterite indicative, perfect participle. On these parts all the tenses are formed. 5. Strong verbs with the stem vowel a, C, OM, take the umlaut in second and third person singular indicative (except in ge^en and fte{)en). 6. Plural personal endings for present and preterite, weak and strong, are en, (e)t, en. 224] INDICATIVE PRETERITE ' 85 7. Ill direct address, bu and i^r are superseded by StC (3rd pi.) in all conventional conversation. Only towards chil- dren and animals, between members of the family and very intimate friends, in prayer and very elevated diction, are btt and ijr used. 8. In the declension of nouns, two facts apply in every case without exception : (a) no feminines are inflected in the singular, (b) all dative plurals end in n. 9. There are three noun declensions, strong, weak, and mixed. 10. All strong nouns form their genitive sing, by adding (C)8 (butcf. 8, r^. Class I takes no additional syllable (sometimes umlaut). Class II takes e (often umlaut). Class III takes cr (always umlaut). 11. Membership — Main Classes. I is primarily a class of polysyllables (masc. and neut. ) II is primarily a class of monosyllabic masculines. III is primarily a class of monosyllabic neuters. The subclasses are: I two feminines: bte SQlutter and bie Xoc^ter (umlaut). II monosyllabic feminines and neuters, and polysyllabic masculines in ig, ing, ling, and neuters in ntS, .fol. III monosyllabic masculines, and polysyllabic neuters and masculines in tum, and neuters accented on the last syllable. For examples see App. 19-22. 12. The weak declension has (e)tt in singular and plural (except nom. sing.). See 8, a. 13. The weak declension is primarily a class of polysyllabic feminines, but it contains also monosyllabic feminines, foreign masculines, masculines in c and a number of monosyllabic masculines (no neuters, no umlaut). 14. Mixed nouns take a strong genitive singular and a weak plural. See App. 24, 25. 86 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [225 225 REVIEW EXERCISES /. Give the preterite paradigms^ singular and plural^ of: gef)en, ftei)en, tun, loufcn, rufen, fuc^en, iuecfen, fingen. //. Write principal parts of these verbs. Illi Ansiver the following questions: 2Ba§ inn bie ^^iigtetn tm SSalbe? SBelc^e Xtere fiitb §au§tiere? SBetc^e Xiere ftnb im SSalbe? 2Ber n)ar faul in be§ ^aifer§ (B^nk? SBer Ie!)rte bie ©chiller? SBo^er !amen bie Se^rer? SSie finb bie flatter ber 33dume im gruf)ling? SSie tDerbeu fie im §erbft? 2Ba§ fallt im SSinter ab? SBie l^eigt ein 9}Zann au^ 5(meri!a? 2Bie I)ei§t eine gravt au§ 5Imeri!a? @inb @ie 5(meri!aner? SSo^er !ommt ein ©ngtdnber? ^enuen (Sie tJtele 5(merifanerinnen? Sernen -227] INDICATIVE PLUPERFECT 87 CHAPTER IV INDICATIVE PLUPERFECT LESSON 21 226 6r ^ottc S^n^cn wnter bcm ^utc* (?tn 23ancriijuiujc uanicibi W\6.) gel)t bid) ber ^"Dtann cin?"/* lief] 10 hzw ^ni Quf bem llopfe unb ging n^eitcr. 9tad)bem ber 30?ann il)m ctn paar 5?tinut€n nadjgeblidft Ijcitte, fd)iittelte cr ben .^iopf unb fprad): „2)er Junge l)at nid)t Uiel SeBeneart!" Xann ift ber 90?ann iDcitergegangen. Setst !am ber 5rmlmann bec^ 2Begec>. 2)cr'^ Ijatte cinen 15 8^Q3i€rgQng gemodit unb mar auf bcm 3Scg nodi ^aufe. ijintcr tl)m I^cr fam ber @erid)tc>biencr. 9tun griifeen tmmer alle Scute ben Hmtmann. 5lBer unfer ?J?id)cI iai cc> nid)t, 227 ^ ttlO^itt bomtt (ge^Ctt) = what to do with them— literally=: where to go with them. Note the omission of the verb of motion, since the idea is already expressed in the adverb tHOl^ttt. ^ i^m— dative after !6egepeit. Cf . App. 133. * tiJttg (JC^t bt(^ iier SHtttttt an = what is the man to you? 88 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [228-229 erflen§ rt)eil er bon ^an§ an^^ imnter ein ©robian getDefen tear, gtoeitenS tuetl er ben SO^orgen lang bie ©^a^en unter bem 30 ^uk l^erumgetragen ^atte, unb tijn bolder ntrf)t oBne^imen fonnte. ®q ging ber ©eric^tSbtener gu t]f)m unb fprod^: „'I)u ^vohian, l^a\t hu nod^ nie gclcrnt, \va§> fid) fdjicft?" intb rife il)m ben $ut t)om ^opU- ^^^^ — li^arcn aHe ©pa^en IierouS^ geflogen nad) alien ©d'cn nnb ©nbcn,^ hk ber 3[)tid)el ben 35 9[)?orgen long anfBeh)aI)rt ^atk. Sllle Sente I)QBen gelQd)t. llnb toenn man I)ente ben $ut nid)t snr 3eit oBnimmt, bann f)ci6t e§:^ ,,®er I^ot gemifs 3|.ial3en nntcr beni . bailiff ber Slmtntann sparrow ber (SpQ^ walk ber (Spa^ier'gang cheerfully ijerguiigt beadle ber (^erid)t§'biener on, farther treiter first (adv.) erfteng to greet griigen (weak) lout ber ^robian pleasantly freunbli^ secondly 5rt)eiten§ friend ber ?5reunb morning ber 9JJorgen perhaps t)ie(Iei(^t' around I)erum' way ber SSeg thereforo ba^er to look after itac^blideit (weak) off ab shake fc^iittetn (weak) 229 ^ Hon ^ttttg ttttg = by nature. ^ @(fctt Uttti @utiett — an alliterative phrase meaning in all directions. ^ t^ ^ei§t = the saying is. 230-281] INDICAT IVE PLU PERFECT to snatch reigeu, rife, geriff cit to ke^p auf benja^ren, ben)ai)rte auf , auf'bert)af)rt to laugh tac^eu (weak) to be called ^elfeeu, t)ieg, ge^eigen certainly QCtDlfe 230 Synopsis Through Pluperfect Strong Weak fein war gemefeu \)aba\ f)atte ge^abt ic^ bin ic^ f)ahc irf) wax ic^ r)atte irf) Bin gemefen id) f^aht ge^abt id) tottr getoefen id; i^aiie ge()obt tragen trug getragen Iad)eu lac^te gekc^t bu tragft er lac^t 'Dn triigft er lac^te 't>ii ^aft getragen er Jot gelarf)t bu ^ttttcft getrogen er Jattc gelad)t 89 Note the pluperfeot tense is similar to the perfect (see 81), except that the preterite instead of the present form of the auxiliaries l^aben and fcin is used. 23 1 SSie ^atte ber SBauernjunge ge^eifeen? SSa§ f)atte er gcfangen? 28o()in i)atte er fie geftedt? 2Bo ^atte er \>tn §ut getragen (carried, worn)? 28ie tDar er meiter gegangen? 3Ser mar i^m baim begegnet? §atte ber SJlann ben Qungen gegriifet? §atte er mit if)m gefprod)en? 2Ba§ ^atte er gefagt? 2Bar 3}lic^e( freimblic^ 5u i^nt? 2Barnm nid^t? 2Ba§ moUte er nicfit tnn? 2Barum nic^t? 2Bem begegnete er bann? §atte 9J^ic^e( ben 5Imtmann dormer gefannt? SSer tvat f)inter bent 5(mtmann ^ergegangen? SSa§ tnig ber (iJerid^t§biener? 2Ba§ follte ber gunge tnn? golgte er nid)t? SSarum? SSa§ rig i^m* ber ^eri^tgbiener t)om ^opf? 2Ba§ gef^al) bann? 2Bie tvaxm bie SSogel nnter ben ^ut gefommen? * See App. 144. 90 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [232-233 232 EXERCISES /. Cliange verbs in the following {sentences to plupe^'fect: ®er S)iener fagt: „S[Ba^ ^aft 't>\\ imter bem §ut?" 9JJid)el ant= ttjortet: ,, gd^ l)abe nid^tS barunter." SSa§ f)at ber ^Imtmann gefragtV @r f)at gefragt: „2Barum mmmt ber '^nrn^t ben §ut nid^t ab? ^^(Ue Seute nef)men if)n ab." ^ie Seute benfen: „3Sir ^aben immer ben §ut abgenommen, nur ber W\6)t\ tut e§ nid^t. SSarum tut er e§ uid^t?" @r ^t @^a^en unter bem §ut. //. Give pri7icipal ^jarts of all verbs in the above story. III. Fill out with auxiliaries to form j^^'^^l^^tfeot tense: 3*^) — nci6) ber Stabt gegangeu. SE)er Sunge bte 3^^^^" ^^ ^^^ Xafet gefc^riebeu. — er gu §aufe getoefen? @ie beu ^ut aufgeftiilpt? tt)ir eineu ^ragen getrageu? SSir ^iuter bem 5(mtmaun tiergegaugeu. LESSON 22 233 PERSONAL AND REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS Personal Pronouns Singular Masc Fem. Neut. N. ic^ bu er fie e§ G. . meiner beiner feiuer i^rer feiuer D. mir btr i^m i^r i^m A. mi^ bid) Pt. URAL i^n fie e§ N. n)ir i^r fie (8ie) G. unfer euer i^rer (3^rer) D. un§ z\v^ i{)ncu (3^»^J1 i) A. und eud^ fie (@ie) 234-236] INDICATIVE PLUPERFECT , 91 234 Singular REFIiKXIVES Plural 4 X. _ (4. — D. mir bir fic^ itn§ tud) fid, A. ttttd^ bt^ fi(^ un§ euc^ m 235 • ' ^ct m'oxhcx (5in SSurm tDor einmal aiif bent 33oben I)erumgefrod^en. ®a \)atte il^n em Sperling gefcI)Gn, I)Qtte il)n fd}ncE mit feinem at er i^nen feinen 9^ic^t§f|)rn^ gegeben? SSaren bie ^aufteute Snfrieben bamit? §atte ber 9tid^ter i^ren ^lan burci^fdjant? 25 1 EXERCISES /. Fill out the blanks: ®ie SBoget fingen i^r — Sieber. ®ie Se^rer te^ren il)r — (Stubenten. ®ie ©driller ftnbieren an§ i^r — S3iic^ern. 9JJein — 9Jiutter liebt i^r — Xod^ter. ®ie ^inber get)ord^en i^r — (lltern. 2Bir tieben nnf — Onfel, nnf — Xante nnb nnf — ^ettern unb (£onfinen. ^ie S3iic^er eur — ^inber finb bicf nnb fd^ttJer. *Plup. liattr ttttf'fif^often; ent^altru. ^attr tirrf)iro(^ett; ^attr grfi^ttiomt; lattr 2o2-2o3] INDICATIVE PLUPERFECT 97 //. Fill out loith appropriate posscssives : ^avl, f)a\t bu ^ufgabe geternt? §attc Wlid)ti bic 6per tinge unter §ut gefterft? ^ic SSogel fc^tafen in 9fleftern. §aben 6te §ut in bcr §anb ober Quf bem fto|)fe? 3c^ tiebe 3?ater, Gutter unb ^I'ofteltern. ^ec 3unge ()attc 5(ngen unb — O^ren tDcit aufgemac^t. ®er Xiencr be§ ^ijnigg l^atte 9JhUtcr eineu S3ricf gefc^riebeu unb tvav babei eingefc^tofen. ///. Answer: SOleiu §unb ift grog, tt)ie ift 3()rer? ^ Scin ^ferb ift grou, mie ift 3§rc§? 3^c §au§ ift teuer, ift meine^ billig? Un[cr md) ift bicf, h)ie ift eure§? §aben @ie 3^r Suc^ ober meine^? §at cr fein ^ferb ober beine§? §abt i()r euer ^a\i^ ober feine§? 9}lein §ut ift fc^hjars, ift beiner tt)ei6? 3t)r §au§ ift !lein, ift feine§ grog? IV. Fill out with pronouns: §au^ ift neu, ift alt §crr SBraun ^t nic^t mein SBud^, fonbern . SSir i)aUn V. Translate: She has her book, not his. The boy had written his word on the board, not hers. My horse is expen- sive, is yours cheap? Our house has a garden, has yours one? I hftve two apples, my brother has only one. She has one book and he has one. Have you two horses or only one? I see your hat, do you see mine? LESSON 2Jf DEMONSTRATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 252 liefer ^aufmann ^atte einen 33eutet oertoren. 3cncr ^eriDifc^ ()atte il)n gefunben. ^icfc SJlau^ ^at bet to^e eine Sc^ette nic^t angepngt. gene §enne rief il)r ^iic^tein. 253 ^ Note that when the three un inflected cases of the possessives are used without a noun, they have the same ending as the definite article (er, e§. ) See App. 44. 98 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [254-265 ^icfc0 ^iic^lcm tft fcincr ^utttx nid^t gefolgt. 3cnc0 ^Hnb ift unge^orfam geloefen. 2)tcfc8 ^ferb f)atte jenen ^aufmaim nad) ber Stabt gebroc^t. ^er ^obt^t :^at jcnc |)enne erfc^recft. ^tcfcr §abtd^t ^at jcncS ^iid^lein gefreffen. §ter tt)ar ein Xifd^. ^arauf ^at ein ^sBitc^ gelegen. Sie^ft bit ba§ «iid^? ^arin ftel)t etne ©efc^t^tc. ®te Xafel ift fc^mar^. ^ at ttuf fte^eu ga^len. 254 Singular Plural Masc. Fern. Neut. M. F. N. this N. btefer biefe btefe^, bie§ biefe G. bieje^ biefer biefe^ biefer D. biefem biefer biefem biefen A. biefen biefe biefe^, bieg biefe that X. jener jene jene§ jene G. jene^ jener jene§ jener D. jenem jener jenem jenen A. jencn jene jeneS jene each, every N. jcbcr jebe jebeS aUt' G. iebeS jeber jebeS atter D. jcbcm jeber jebem alien A. jebcn jebe i^.'o^^ atte this one N. ber bie \>a^ bie G. beffen^ beren beffen beren (berer) D. bcm ber bem benen A. ben bie \)a§> W 255 ^ jeber, by its nature, can have no plural; ttUe may take its place. The singular of ttUe is inflected like the other pronouns of this class, or may be used without inflection— atteg SSttffer or aU M ^difw, ^ Note difterenoe from gen. of definite article. 256-268] INDICATIVE PLUPERFECT 99 256 Observe that — 1. The demonstratives are inflected like the definite article, Avith a slight deviation in the gen. sing, and gen. and dat. pi. of ber. 2. The demonstrative bcr may often be translated by tlie personal pronouns, he, she, it. 3. 2)icfer and jeitct are used for the latter and the former. See App. 167. 4. The demonstratives (when referring to things) may be compounded with the prepositions in the following forms: barin, barauf, baruber, barum^ baneben, bamit, babei, etc. See 127. 257 ^cr dinfaff Btx'et ??u]^rleute, ^an§ unb ^TiJid)eI, trafeu in etnem ^o^V- tnege sufammen. liefer tear \o enge, ho!)^ bte SBagen iener Wanmx nur mit 30?iir)e barin on dnanber dorbeifommen fonn- iQw. „5a!)r' mir^ aii§ bem SSege!" rief $oax\^ biefem 311.^ 5 „2Beid^e bu felbft^ aix^V entgegnete x^m biefer. „^6) tuifl ni^t!" fd^rie jener barauf guriicf. 3SeiI nnn ieber nad^ feincm ^o^f* l^anb^In mollte, fom e§^ 3u Qan! unb ©treit barliber. @nblt(^ fagte ^an^: „9^un frnge \6) bidf) wo6) einmol: inillft bit mir qu§ bem SSege^ fal^ren ober nid^t? SSenn 10 nid)t, bonn mQd)€ id) e§ bir^ jejt gerobe fo tnie idi e§ fteute morgen'^ jenem SQ^anne^ gemad^t I)Qbe." 2)a iiberfam 258 ' ntlr au8 bm SBege. See App. 144. ^ Observe position of ju; prufew = to call out to. * fclftft — intensive (uninflected) = yourself. * tttt^ felnent ^O^lf = according to his own inclination. ^ f am eg JU '^mi = a quarrel arose. * Dative of interest. See App. 142. ' ^eutC morgett = this morning. 100 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [26J> 261 ^Dtid}cl ein gJrauen. Jinn, I)ilf mil' iDcniaften^ blefen ^hiocu beifeite f^ieben'', brummte er barouf, „fonft fann irf) nid}t!'' ^arnuf ging ^an§> ein, itnb bolb tear bicfc 9lrbcit geton. 15 D^iun foBtc fid^ ber SDMkI cin .S5er3 inib frogtc: „^bv' Q\n- mat tDtc l^aft bit g§ benn mit jcnem SOIonn l^eute morgcn gemad)t?'' :3^Qraiif loditc ,§an§ iinb rtef au§: „^enf' bir iiitr, jcner 3[)ten)d) mid) nun cinmnP nid)t qiic>. :l)a bin id) ielbft auc^geix)id)cn!'' 259 VOCABULARY wagoners bie t^u^rleute^ once more nod) ein'moi to meet treffen, trof, troffen ge- overcome iiberfom'men, nber= !am', iiberfom'men canon ber ©o^lmeg awe t>a^ ©ranen together jnfammen at least n)enigfteii§ narrow enge aside beifeite wagon ber 2Bagen push fc^ieben, fd)ob, ge= difficulty bie mn^t fd^oben past tjorbei' to mutter brnmnien (weak) give way n)eid)en, mic^, ge= otherwise ■fonft mic^en to agree ein'ge^en, ging ein', back ^nriid ein'gegangen quarrel ber 3anf work bie STrbeit fight ber ©treit heart bag §er5 260 EXERCISES /. Answer, using demonstratives: SBeld^er Wamx ^aiU etnen SBagen? SSeffen SBagen ift jn breit fur ben Sa^rtneg gert)efen? aSelc^er gn^rmann ttjottte nac^ feinem ^opf ^anbeln? §an§ imb aJlid^el n)aren in bem 3a^rtt)eg getoefen. SBeld^er ift banod^ Qn§ge= 26 I ^ nVin rtntnal — a somewhat colorless parenthetical adverb difficult to translate. Say : The man would not get out of the way. 2 PI. for gu^rmttttti; see ftttttfiftttf, 249, 4. 262] INDICATIVE PLUPERFECT 101 Ujic^cn, biefer obcr jeiter? 2Be(c^cr ^atte etncn (SinfoII 'aahti gct)abt? §atte er btefe ©rfa^ntitc^ (c^on tinmai (once before) ge^abt? SD^it mem? 293a^ ^atte cr mit jencm SDlaimc getan? 3Ser ^attc bobet met)r 90^ut gejetgt, §an§ ober jcncr Wann? II. Translate: 1. These two wagoners had met [each other] in a cafion. 2. This was very narrow. 3. These wagoners, Hans and Michael, had wagons in this cafion. 4. The former said upon this : "Get out of my way!" 5. The latter did not yield. 6. Each acted according to his own inclination. 7. The two merchants had lost this purse. 8. The contents (ber 3nl)a(t) of it were gold pieces and that emerald. 9. This dervish found that purse with the gold pieces in it. 10. These merchants had promised that finder a reward. 11. The judge spoke this sentence: ''You say, your purse had contained this emerald. 12. The dervish found this purse without the emerald. 13. He did not find your purse. 14. The purse without the emerald in it is not yours." LESSON 2d ■ RELATIVE PRONOUNS ■, } \\^ .. 262 bet, tticld^cr Masculine Xcr ?^u^rmann, ber guerft auf bent §o^tit)eg tt)ar, imb bcffctt SBageu fetir gro§ tDar, ift guriicfgegaugen. §an§, bor bcm SJiid^et fic^ fiirc^tete, 1;)Ciiiz fet)r laut gefc^rieen. ^er SSagen, ben SOiic^el nic^t allein fc^ieben fonnle, ftaub im 28 eg. 263 Feminine ^ic Wm«'':;^: ^ A ;; • ■\ " '^"M.-' "''■-■^'- F. N. PI. ber bie bag bie beffen^ beren beffen beren bem ber bem benen ben hk bag Ut tt)eld^er n)elc^e iuelc^eg iuelc^e beffen'' beren beffen beren mel^em n)et(^er njeld^em toeld^en n^elc^en melc^e ftjetc^eg tDtl^C 267 ^ Note difference from def. article. 2 See A pp. 36 and 168. 268-271] INDICATIVE PLUPERFECT 103 268 Relative and interrogative compounds are formed by too + the preposition. See 127, also App. 171-174. 269 Note that in all relative clauses the verb comes last. 270 ^er ^rtn^ uon ^omburg griebrtd) 2BiI^€lm, ben man „hcn ©roBen" nennt, ireil er fo fel^r tap\ev tvat unb fetn Sanb t)on geinben Befreit I)atte, tuav ^xirfiirft t)on 33rQnbciiburg. ©r 1:)atie ctnen D^effen, bem^ er fefir gugetan tvav. 2)tefer wav iung unb feurtg 5 aber oudft ftiag^alficj. ©r l^atte \d)on atuet 'Bd}lad)tm tierloren burcf) ben ©ifcr, beffen"-^ er nid)t $err getueien tnar. 9tun Ijatte tf)m ber ^hirfiirft inieber einen ^^^oftcn Qut)ertraut in ctner n mirfl 'oa^ SSoit gcf^ricbcn ^aficn er ttirb ba§ SQSort gcf^ncficn ^ttbcn iuii itterbcn ba^ SSort gcfc^ttcficn IJafien il)i mcrbet ba§ SBort gcfi^ricBcn ^oBcn fie mcrben ha^ SBort gcfr^ricficn ^o6en @ie tocrben 'tia^ SBort gefi^riebcn |abcn Verb with fftji ic^ tuerbc md) §aufe gcfommen fcin bu mirfl nad) SQan)z gcfcmmcn fein er ttiirb narf) §au}e gcfommcn fcin tt)ir toerben nac^ §aufe gefommen fcin it)r mcrbet itad) |)aiife gcfommcn fcin fie mcrbcn nad) §aufe gcfommcn fcin (Sic toerben narfi §aiife gcfommcn fcin 282 9RnttcrIic6c 5n einem 2)orfe im Sd^tDargtDalb Icbtc cin vSd)nctbcr itnb feine grau. ©ie gotten einen ©oI)n namen§ 2)onteL Xer 93ater ift I)Qrt unb flreng getoefen. (^r l^ai ben ©o^n gelicBt, aber er I)Qt it)m felten eriaubt 3u fpielen. Smmer fafe er Bei 5 bent 3Sater unb l^alf il)m. „2)u iDirft ben S^ng^n nod^ ^ t5er= 283 ^ ttodi = before you're through with it. Compare with the use of nod^ to express progressive action (83). See also Ibod^ (36, 4). These particles lend color and force to the narrative. 284] FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT 109 treibcn", fagte il)m oft bie ^van, bic fid) T()re^:^ (Sol^ne^ tDcgen - Bangte. 5Iber ber 3Sater trurbe sornig iinb fd)rte: „5ur tuen arbeite id^ benn? bod) nur feinettDegen !^ ®r tvivh mmal ein SO^cifter fein unb Orel ®€lb tierbiencn!" ^od) bie SDhttter, bie 10 Die! fliiger tDor, feufate mir: ,,2Bcnn er mir bio bal)in'^ iiid)t Tangft'* fortgeloufcn fein iDirb!" Unb e§ fam tnirflic^ fo. SSdftrcnb ciner ^cid)t, in ber e§ ftorf fd)neit^, ift ber .^nabe baOongeloufcn. Qt I)interlie6 einen 93rief an feine 90^utter: „3Benn 2)u biefcn 33rief (ieft mcrbe id) i'> ((ingft fort fein. 3Senn id) reid) bin, tnerbe id) miebcrfommcn. Si;^ haf)in mirb mir ber 35ater inol)! Der5ief)en baben!" 2)a meinte bie SUZntter bitterlid^, nnb ber 3Sater, bem^ nie= manb fo oiel ©efiibt gugetrant botte, nnbm e§ fid) fo feftr gn .§er5en^ bofj er franf innrbe nnb ftarb. (Jfte or ftnrb, fagte er 20 5n feiner J^ran : „9}iarie, menn bn alle 8d)ulben be3al)lt r)aben rt)trft, tnirb tnenig iibrig bleiben. 5(ber hu tDtrft bid) burd)= fcftlagen, benn bu bift tnpfer nnb bu liirft dnft nnferen 2)QnieI mieberfeben. ^nnn fagc ibni, ba)] id) feiner" in meinex ^obe§= ftnnbe gebad)t i)ahQV' Xaniit ftarb er. (Srf)lii6 folgt=ro be concluded.) 284 ^ mcflen, f^alttX, urn • ttlitten = for the sake of, on account of— almost synonymous. These prepositions usually follow the noun, and govern the genitive. See App. 126. When united with a personal pronoun, ttirgm is preceded by et, giving frinettnegtlt, for his sake, tnfinetilieBfn, for my sake, etc. See App. 88. ^ h'xi iltt^in = by that time. ^ tdngft = long ago. ^liem— dat. obj. of juttttttftt. See App. 132, *^na^m eg flr^ p ^erjen^took it to heart. ' jeiner-gen. after flfbai^t. See App. 122. 110 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [286-286 From now on the special vocabulary will be discontinued and all new words (except the verbs) will be found only in the general vocabulary. 285 Strong Verbs to drive away t)ertretBen t)ertrieb tjertrieben to forgive t)er^cif)en t)er5ie(} tjersie^en to die fterben ftarb geftorbeu to make one's way fid^ burdlfrflla^^ Wm firfi Jic^ burc^gefc^lagen gen burd^ Weak Verbs to live lebeu to sigh feufjen to love Ueben to snow fc^neien to x)erinit erlauben to weep toeineu to play jpielen to believe to be gutrauen, traute to be afraid fic^ bangen capable of 511, jugetraiit to deserve tjerbienen to pay besaf)ien 286 2Bo f)at ber (Sd^neiber getoo^nt? §at er allein Qttoo^ni? 2Bie t)iele ^inber fatten bie 2tnU? 6inb fie fpdter (later) allein gen?efen? 2!3a§ mirb ber ^ater tiui, tpenn ber <3of)n fortlduft? SBamt ttyirb ber @of)u iDieberfommen? SBirb mi ^elb ba feiu nad) be§ S^aterg Xob? SSirb bie Tlntitv tjerstueifetn (despair)? SSarum tpirb fie nid^t tjergtoeifetn? 2Bie tt)irb fie fic§ burd^f^Iagen? 3ft ber Waim geftorben? SSoran ift er geftorben? §atte er ben (Sof)n fe^r geliebt? SSie ^atte er i^n be^anbelt (treated)? §at er fic^ \>a^ gortlaufen be§ (5o^ne§ fef)r gu ^er^en genommen? 2Bie fe^r ()at er e§ fi^ gn ^erjen genommen? SSirb ber 8o^n tuieberfommen? ^on tt)em mirb it)m bie 9Jlutter ergd^len? SBeffen ^at ber ^ater in jeiner ^obe^ftnnbe gebac^t? 2Ba§ ift ein 8d^neiber? eine ©d^neiberin? ein ©d^nfjmad^er? geben fie ein anbere^ (other) SBort fiir ©i^u^mad^er! SSa§ ift ein Sel)rer? eine Se^rerin? ein Sd^iiler? eine ©c^iiterin? 2Bog ift eine 287-289] FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT 111 B^nk? eiite SSerfftatt (workshop)? 2Ba^ ift eiu 5lrbeiter? eine ^^rrbeiterin? 287 Translate: 1. I shall have a story for you which you will like. 2. I shall have returned when your brother is in school. 3. When the youth returns he will not find his father. 4. Does the mother think of her son in the hour of her death? 5. The father h.ad taken the departure (ba§ gortge^en) of the son so much to heart that he died. G. The mother will not make her way through life and will not see her son again. 7. Will the latter have become rich? 8. The former will have become old. 9. I shall have run away. 288 Change all the above sentences so as to use the present tense; the perfect; the preterite. LESSON 28 289 ADJECTIVE DECLENSIONS Nominative ®a§ ift bcr grogc S3aum. ^er S3aum ift gro§. %\t Slume ift fj^iin. 5)ag ^inb ift flcin. SDa^ ift cin grower S3aum. ^a§ ift btc fd^bnc 93lume. ®ag ift einc fd^onc SBlume. 5)a§ ift ba§ Heine ^tub. ®a§ ift cin fletncS ^inb. M. bcr gro^c 93aum ettt grower 93anm F. liic f(^onc 93lume eine fc^one 93lnme N. bag Heine ^inb tin fleineS ^inb Observe that when the article has an ending which shows the number, gender, and case of the following noun the adjective has merely a perfunctory inflection. In the nominative case this is e. When the article has no inflection 112 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [290-291 (as tin in masc. uom., iieut. iiom. and ace.) the adjective takes the strong characteristic ending, masc. cr, neut. e8. 290 Genitive ^ie flatter bcS griincn 93oume§ fiub grog. ^ie SBIcitter eiucS griincn S3aume§. ^te garbe bcr fc^onen S3lume ift rot ^ie i^axU etncr fi^onen S3lume. ®ie mutizx bcl fretnen ^inbe§. SDie SJiutter eineS fleiucn ^inbe§. beS griincn S3anme§ einci griincn 93anme^ bcr f(^i)ncn Slnme eincr fd^iincn S3lnme bcS fleincn ^inbe§ eincS fleincn ^inbe^ Observe that the perfunctory inflection in the genitive is en, and that this appears after tlio definite and the indefinite articles, since both indicate the number, gender, and case of the noun by their full inflections. 29 1 Dative 5)ie S3(atter finb ouf bcm grogcn S3aumc. ^ie 93tdtter finb auf eincm grogcn ^anme. 2)a§ ^inb mirb tjon bcr fc^oncn S3(ume jprec^en. ^a§ ^inb n)irb oon eincr fi^ijncn 33lume fprec^en. Xte 9Jiutter ge^t gn bcm fleincn ^Hnbe. ®ie 3JZntter gef)t 5u eincm fleincn ^inbe. bcm grogcn S3aume eincm grofecn Sanme bcr jc^onen ^hime eincr jc^oncn Slnme bcm fleincn ^inbe eincm fleincn linbe Observe that the dative as well as the genitive of the adjective after the definite and indefinite articles has the per- functory ending en. 292-295 FUTiniE AND FUTURE PERFECT 113 202 Accusative 3(^ ttjerbc bctt grogcn S3aum fe^eii. 3(^ toerbc eincn grogcn Saum fef)en. S33ir tteben btc fc^onc S31ume. SBir Uebeit einc fd^onc SUtme. SHait ttJtrb bag fleinc ^inb ^oreiu SOlan tDirb cin fleincS ^inb 1i)6mu ben gro^ctt S3aum btc jd^onc S3(ume ba9 flctnc ^inb eincn gre^en 33aum einc fd^onc 93lume cin fleincS ^titb Observe that in the accusative neuter the adjective varies according as it is preceded by the definite or by the indefinite article. Note the same difference in the nom. masc. and neut., caused in all three cases by the uninflected condition of cin. The masculine accusative is alike after the definite and indefinite articles and ends in en. 293 Plurals bic grogen 53dume ber fc^ouen S3(umeu ben fleiucn ^inberu bic gro^cn S3dume feinc^ grogen S3dumc meiner fc^ouen S3(umeit feinen fleinen ^iiibent !eiue grogen S3diimc 294 AVhere no article or pronoun precedes, the adjective is declined like ber. grower S3aum gro^cf'' 93aume§ gro§em S3aume gro^cn S3aum fc^one 93(ume fc^oner 53lume fc^oncr ^(ume frf)one 33tume fleincg linb fleincr ^tnbe^ fleiitcm ^inbe !(einc8 ^inb Plural fc^one S3Iumeu fc^oner Slumen ft^onen ©lumen \d)bnt S3I|tmcn 295 ^ The indefinite article has no plural, but feitt and the possessires which are decUned like it and have a plural form are therefore used instead of it. See App. 12. 2 C9 is usually changed to en to avoid recurrence of sibilant. 114 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [296-297 The plurals of those phrases that have citt in the singular *aro also declined like bcr: tin ftetncS ^inb Heine ^inber eineS fteiucn ^tnbe§ !teincr ^inber eiucm fleincn ^iube fleincn ^inberu cin fletncS ^inb fleinc ^inber 296 GRAMMAR 1. Adjectives used predicatively are uninflected. 2. Adjectives iised attributively are inflected according to the following principle: One of the adjuncts of the noun must show the number, gender, and case. If this is done by the article or pronoun, the adjective has a merely perfunctory ending (c, Clt). When the article or pronoun does not do this, the adjective must have the strong ending. 3. There are three possible conditions: (a) The adjective is not preceded by article or pronoun ; (b) the adjective is pre- ceded by the definite article, or the pronouns declined like it; (c) the adjective is preceded by the indefinite article, or the words declined like it. We get, therefore, THREE ADJECTIVE DECLENSIONS I. Strong — when used alone — inflected like definite article. II. Weak — preceded by def. art. (or demonst. pronoun) — weak endings (c, cn ). III. Mixed — preceded hy indef. art. (or possess, pron.), — three strong endings, the others weak. 297 TABLE OF ADJECTIVE INFLECTIONS* M. Singular F. Strong N. Plural M. F. N. -er -C -e§ -c -e§ (en) -er -e§ (en) -er -em -cr -em -en -en ' -e -e§ -e * For full adjective declension, see App. 38-44, 298-299] FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT 115 Weak ber — c W — e ha^ — e bie —en be§ — en ber — en be§ —en ber —en bent —en ber —en bem —en ben —en ben —en W —t ba§— c Mixed bie —en mein — er meine — e mein — e8 meine — en meine^ — en meiner — en meine» — en meiner — en meinem —en ntetner — en meinem —en meinen — en meinen —en meine — e mein — e§ meine — en LESSON 29 298 aWntterliek (©cfilufe) ^ic einfome Sraii Icbtc nun Iraurig lucitcr. (5§ !am fo, mie e» i6r ftcrbcnbcr^ SO^ann gefaot ()attc. Sie ntiifstc aUcv berfaufen xmb miifete fogar bet fremben Seuten bienen, urn tf)r 2eben 3u crl)alten. Sod)- bie lanacn, trauriiicn ^^nfere ticr= 5 gtngen i^r^ fdjncll in ber ^offnung: ,/Dtein SanicI, mein lieber ©ol^n, irirb fd^on tricber fommcn. 5 bn^ mit ber 25 beutfrf)eii ^reiie ouf fid^ !)Qt!"^ ^fJun er3al)Ite cr bie @efd)id)tc Don ber alten 31*01! im 8d^toor3tooIb, bie if^r l^orteg 2o§> fo gebulbig trug, toeil il^r^® tief im .^perjen bie Sicbe gum ©ol^n, tvk dn frifd^er 39riinnen, Seben imb ^offnung gob. ,,So finb nun tiieraig goitre ber- 80 floffcn, bie olte grou ift toeife getuorben unb gel^t gebeugt il&ren fd)rt)eren SScg, bei fremben Ceuten nm il^r 93rct orbeitenb. 5tber ieben SO^orgen mxh jeben ?Ibenb hokt fie fiir biefcn ©ol^n, ieben gremben frogt fie nod) iljm, unb jeben 9^eifcnben" bittct fie 300 ^ tOtttien ttlOl|l geftor^en f tin = probably have died — an idiomatic use of the future perfect. See App. 1 79. ® tltele SfrfWlbe— fremb is an adj. Here it is used as a noun. But in such cases the adjective retains its full inflection according to rule. It is strong ; coordinate with tlicle. Mft e§ au^ niii^t fo ttiett I|et = isn't so great as always supposed— corresponds to the slang phrase, "isn't all it's cracked up to be," but is less inelegant. 8 mit = too. ^ ttiaS lltt§ ouf fl(^ ^Ot = what is in this talk of German fidelity. ^« i||r im ^erjcn— dat. pron. -\- def . art. instead of possessive. See App. 144. " jflint 9lHfentfn = each traveler — a present participle used adjec- tively. See note 6. 301-302] FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT 117 narf) if)m Qu^aufc^ouen. Wnh aii i§r fQiter berbtente^ @elb 35 gtbt fie Qii§, urn nad) ii)m 511 frageu. ®ie tuith uidit fterben, bio fie t)on if)m f)6rt! " 5I((c tDaren ftill geluorben. 2)cr ^Taniel aber fragtc leifc: ,Mic I)ciJ3t bie alte grau?" „Si*i"iu '^runner, btc "Biiwc bct> 8d)neiber5 '^runner, unb bcr 8or)n ftieB Saiiicll" Xa quxq ber 40 aj^ann fttll l^inou^, f^niirte fcin 33unbel unb mad)te fic^ ouf ben §etmtuct3,^"2 ^jj^^ j^i^ (^^itc aiiiitlcr nod) cinniQl 3« umarmon. 301 Strong Verbs i to maintain er^Qlten erfitelt cr^^Qlten to forget tjergcffen bergag bergeffen to pass away Derflte^eu tjerflofe tierfloffeit to bite betgen bi6 gebiffcii to happen tjorfommen Weak Verbs t)orge!onimen must niuffcit, mugte, ge== tolrelate Cr^oljlCU niugt to bend bCUgeil to sell Derfaufcn to pray betClt to serve bienen to travel reifcit to'escape entfd^lii^fen tosee/look fd)aUCU to experience burci^mad^eii burcb, bur 1, mac^te cbacmocbt to strap f c^niircu to embrace UlUarmcn EXERCISES 302 SSag fiir eine^" g^-^y j^qj. j^^,^ 5ie 3Bitrt)e be§ (Sd)neibcr§? 2Ber f)Qtte tl)r ha^:^ q^qV^ 33ci rt^em muBte fie bienen? SSie iDoreii bie 3a!)re, bie nun t)ergingen? SSas erftielt ifiren SO^ut au btefer trourigen 3eit? 2Sa§ ^offte fie? 3Sa§ tDar il)re ftetige ^offnung? '^moj^te fllft auf ben ^timttlf ft = started on his way home. " ttia^ fiir eine = what kind of. 118 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [303-304 ''Mat hn ool)n ein retd^cr ''Mann geiuorben, ioie er e^ geI)offt l^atte? SSa§ fiir ein Stnabe tvav er getDefen? SSoS fiir etn 2)?ann Ji:)ar cr gctDorben? 3Ba^ bod^te er in Sesug auf (in regard to) feine (51tern? Sei iuqjS fiir einem gefte tuar er gugegen? SSa§ ift ein italienifcl}c^> Reft? SBorauf fom bie 9lebe? Sft bie beutfdje ^reue .l)criiI)mtV ^ennen ©ie (do you know) ba^ Sieb „2;eutfd)Ianb, S)eiitfd)lQnb iiber aUe§"? gielten^ bie 2eule ki bem italienifci)cn 5eft Did t3on ber beutfdien ^reue? 2Bq§ fiir 33emer!uJtgen mady ten fie? SSer bodite anber§ (differently)? 3Ba^ fiir ein ©efi(i)t niQcljte er? 3Son toem ersctl^Ite er nun? 2Sie fie^t bie altc Jran jetst anS^? 3Sann Bctct fie fiir if^ren berlorenen ©o^n? SSo^et !)at fie @elb? 2Sa§ tut fie bamil? SSeld^en ©inbrucE mad)te biefe (3efd)id)tc auf Daniel? 303 Fill in: tierlaffen grou n?irb auf ben tierloren- (Bofyx luarten. S)er arm — , alt — SO^ann tDirb je^t fein — alt — , gcbcugt — a)httter umarmt I)aBen. S)er jung — , ftiE — Tlakv, mii bem ernft — @efid)te, er3a!)It bie traurig — @efd)id3te ber trcu — , alt — grau. ^a§> italienifd) — 5eft, tnobei ber iung— Stealer bie§ erscit^Ite, ift langft boriiber. ®a§ §er3 be§ alt— ®d)nciber§ mar nid)t fo I)art, alS ber gomig — (Sol^n geglaubt Ijattc. 2)a§ Ijart — 2o§> ber arm — SSittoe rit^rte alte ^ergen. 304 Translate: 1. The poor old woman will work hard all her life. 2. Her son will not return for many years. 3. She will hope for (ttuf) his return and will look out for him. 4. He will have become a rich man. 5. She hopes to see her young son, who will have become an old man. ^ lieltett . . . UOtt = thought much of. 305-306] \ FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT 119 LESSON 30 305 ^ie goulc itnb W Slctfetgc ©ine 3Sitit)c f^attc glDel ^odjter; bie cine toar fc^on unb ffetfetg, aBer bie anbere tear l^dfeltd^ unb faul. Xte 90?utter liebte hit Ijaglidje, faule ^od)tcr Diel mel)r al§ bic fd)one, flei= feigc. ®ie erft gcnanntc^ !^od^ter tear i^r etgcne§ Uxnh, aBer 5 hit anbere tear ha^ einaige S!inb ber erften grau il)rc§ 9P^anne§. 2)arum Ijagte W bofe SSitoe ba§ arme, fd^one 30^db(^en. 8ie ^gaB tl)rer eigenen, {)af3lic()en S^odjter alle§ ©ute^ ju efjen, 311 trtnfen unb 311 tragen, aBer bem jd^dnen, fleifetgen (Stieffinb gaB fie nid)t§ aB !)arte 5IrB€it, fd)Ied)te§ ©ffen unb alte, aBge= 10 riffene^ ^leibcr. (^inft toar bem armen ©tieffinb^ Beim ©pin- nen^ eine ©|)ule in einen tiefen, bunflen^ ^runnen gefaHen. ®a fagte bic Bdfc, alte ©tiefmutter: „9cun ift bie fd)6nc ©pule I)cruntergefancn. Xa luirft hn fie ai\6) \mthn I)oIen, bu faulcsi, bummcS, Bdsartige^ Sing!" Sa§ arme 9Jidbd)en Bangte fid) fo, 15 ho!^ e§ bor lauter'^ ©direden in ben fc^tDargen 33runnen fprang. Sod) e§^ fici nid^t in !alte§, fdirerflid)e§ 2Saffer, niie e§ tDoIjl^ ern)artet \)aiit, fonbern auf cine fd)t3ne fonnige SSiefc, boH rci= 3enbcr 33Iumcn.i^ (Sana erftaunt ging e§ tecitcr. „2Sa§ leerbc 306 ^ bic erft genamtte = the first named. ^ tttte§ ©tttC = all good things; note the weak adj. after atteS. ^ ttbfteriffcn = shabby. * ^ticffiniJ, dat. of interest. See App. 142. ^6cim(=bCt ticm) (©))tttttCtt = at her spinning ^bunflCtt, for tittttfelett. See App. 31, note. ^ lautcr, indeclinable adj. = sheer. ^ t% refers to bag 9Rdb^en, hence neuter. But often flc is used, referring to sex. 9 ttJO^l = probably. '° reii^Ctttlcr ©lumen— gen. after tiott. See App. 125, 120 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [307-308 id} jtun Qlle$ finben?" fragte fie fid). S^a fam e§ an etnen 20 grofeen ^odfofcn, t)oE l^elfseS 33rot.^^ Setnaub Ijatte i)a§> fdjijuc 33rot I)inciiiGeftc(ft, unb l^otte e§ bomt l^cracffen. ®q§ frifd)= cjebacfcnc 33rot ricf: „5[d), 3tel)e mid) IjerouS, bii fd)one§, gutcS 2)^Qbd)en, fonft lucrbe id) cjan^ uiib gar^- tiGrbrenneu". -^q^ gate Sliiib tat €§ unb ging frofilid) iDciter. Sa !ant e§ an ctnen 25 indd)tigen St^jfelbaum. Der^^ I)ing bolt fd)oncr S^fel. ^ic^^ ricfen: „5ld), gutc§, licbcS S^inb, fd)uttlc uii§ rcifc S^jfcl oB!" Sq§ gefallige a)tdbd)eit tat ec^ gcrii imb gtug glitdlid) ldd)elnb tueiter. ©nbltd) tarn c$ an etn fleine§, niebrtge^ ^au§>, init minstgen genftern, einer fd)iefen ^iire unb etnem nieber^dn^ 30 genben Sod). 5Cu§ etnem ber iDinjigen genfter^^ gudte eine fleinc, runjlige olte grau ^erauS. Sie^^ I)attc gar fcinc Sdljue, fd)n€eiDet6e§ §oar unb eine ^riide, rt)orauf fie fid& ftii^te. (^ortfe^ung folgt.) 307 SxRONa Verbs to tear down abretgen rig db obgeriffen to spin fpinnen fpann gefponncn to bake badcu buf gebaden Weak Verbs to expect erluarteu to shake fc^iittelu to burn up t)erbrenuen, l)er= to smue Icid^etn bramtte, tierbrannt to peep guden 308 " ^fifeeH SJrot— accusative with tiott- Cf. note 10. Observe that Hott governs both gen. and ace. The latter is more usual in colloquial German. ^^gattj Wttil gar = altogether. Note alliteration. *^ ter, bit. Is this relative or demonstrative? See App. 166. ** iffttjJer— partitive genitive after etnem. See App. 120a. 30»-310J FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT 12J 309 EXERCISES* 1. SSie fa^en bie beiben 3:od)t€r bcr SBitire auS? 2. 3Sie befjanbeltc bk 9[^utter bie Beiben 99^Qbrf)€n? 3. SSa§ ge|rf)Ql) ber fd)oncu Zo6)t^x eine§ ^age^ beitn ©pinncn? 4. 33efd)reiBen ©ie ba§ Conb boS fk in bem 33runnen borfonb! 5. 3Sq§ iDor bie crftc (first) ^riifung, bie fie gu beftel^en l^atte? G. SSq§ tear bie nodifte? 7. 3Bie btitte fie fid) in ben beiben ^riifungen geaeigt? 8. 33efrf)reiben Sie hc[^- §Qn§ unb beffcn QScmol^nerin ! 1. The wicked widow had an only daughter, but her hus- band had liad a daughter before. 2. She will not treat her beautiful stepdaughter well: she will give her nothing but hard work and poor food. 3. Once the poor child let her spool fall into the dark cold water of the well. 4. The bad stepmother called (nonnte) her a lazy, stupid, malicious creature. 5. The poor girl will be so frightened, that she will leap into the black water of the deep well. 6. But she will not have taken the leap in vain. 7. She will find a beautiful, sunny land, and a kind old woman who will love her. LESSON SI 310 ^ic j^mXt unb bie ^Icigige (3ortfe|ung) 2ie alte 5rau rief: „Swrc5^ie bid) ni^t, licbes ^inb ! 99Idbe bei mir ! 3Betin bu aHe 5trbeit in meinem f leinen $aufe orbent-- iid) tiift, mirft h\\ Q% g^wi Ijabcn^ bei mir. Hbcr mein n^^ofeeS *The questions on the text can now be formed by student and instructor in analogy with tliose of the preceding lessons. The questions in the exercises from now on will be more in the nature of composition work (frcie 9^eprobu!tion) and will give the student more scope for originality and independence of expression. ' ttllrfi bu eg pt ^aftrn = you shall have a good time. 122 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [811 geberbett mufet bu gut fd^iitteln; bann tDtrb e§ brunten ouf ber 5 gonaen SSelt ber Wcn\d]en fdjneien. ^cnn id) bin bie bir tDolf)I= befannte grou ©oHe/'^ SSon ber^ Srau ©olle W^^ ha§> Wab^ d)en fd)on fel^r oft gelfiort. S)ie Seute fagten bid i3on il^r, @ute^< unb ^ofe§. SSeil bie 5IIte il&m fo gut gufprad^,'^ fafete fic^ ha§> 90^dbd)eu 10 ein §er3 unb tuiEigte ein, unb begab fid) in iljren 2)ienft. ©§ bcforgte oud) Qlle§ gu il&rer giinalidjen 3wfi^iebcnl)eit unb fd)iit» telte ii)x ha^ grofee Sett tmmer fo getoaltig auf, ha^ bie bielen gebern trie lauter (Sd)neefIoden umljerflogen. ^afiir^ l^atte e§ and) ein gut€§ Seben bei i!)r, befam fein bbfcS SSort unb aHe 15 ^age ©efotteneS unb ©ebrateneS.^. 9^un tvav e^ eine gonse B^itlang bei ber olten gran ^olle; ha tvath ^§> trourig in fcinem ^eraen, unb ob e§> !)ier gleid)"^ t)iel taufenbmal beffer tvai al§> au ^aufe,^ fo l^atte e^ boc^ ein grofeeS 35erlangen bal)in. ©nblid) merfte eg, ba^ e§ ^cimtoei^ wax, unb 20 fogte 3u il)r: „S(^ 6obe b€n '^amrnex nod) §au§ gefriegt, unb n^enn es mir aud^ I)ier nod^ fo gut gel^t,^ fo fonn id) bod) nidjt Idnger bleiben." S)ie alte grou ^oEe fogte: „($§> gefdEt mir,^^ bafe bn tDicber nad) $Qufe berlangft, unb meil bu mir fo treu 311 ^ble bit ttI0|l6e!ttttttte Srau ^otte = Dame Holle well known to you — an example of the use of the participle as adjective, with its object (titr) before it. See App. 214. ^ijer. The article is used with proper nouns to express familiarity. See App. 100, 3. * %ni JU^Jraj^ = spoke encouragingly ^ bdfut = in return. ^ ©ejottctteg ttttti ©eBrttteneg = (meat) boiled and roasted. Note sub- stantive use of participial adjective. See App. 217. ■^ oB filci^ = although — the separation is colloquial. ®Jtt ^ttttfe = at home. See App. 101. ® loettn fiC^t = however well off I am here. See App. 142. ^^ eg 0rf iittt mir = it pleases me, I like it. 812-313] FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT 123 gebtent fiaft, fo tiierbe t(f) btc^ felBer JDteber l^ittaufbringen/' 25 ©ie nQl)m e§ barauf bet ber rei^ten $Qnb unb fiii^rte eS bor ein grofee^ ^or. S)q§ grofee ^or offnete fie, unb aU ha§> fleine Tlahd)en barunter ftanb, fiel ein getraltiger (S5oIbregen, unb QEe§ @oIb blieb an tl)m l^dngen,^^ fo ha% e§ iiber unb iiber babon bebedt tear. „S)q^ foEfl bn Ijoben, iDeil bu fo fleifeig 30 gctDefcn bift", \pmd) hie Qlte grau ^oHe unb gob tl^m an^ bie Derlorene ^pule toicber, bie t^m in ben ticfen 33runn€n gefaHen mar. S^arauf fd^Iofe fie ba§> Zov, unb ba§> fleinc 3P^dbd^en befonb fid) oben auf ber olten SSelt, nidjt todt t)on feiner Wuttev §Qufe; unb qB e§ in ben befannten §of fam, fag ber 35 rote ^al^n ouf bem olten ^runnen unb rief: ,,^iferi!i, unfre golbcnc Sitngfrou ift iDieber r)ic!"i2 Xa ging fie ()inein 3u il)rer bdfen Tluttet, unb tueil fie fo mit ©olb hebedi anfam, irar bie bofe 99httter fel)r freunblid) gegcn fie. ( gute 9}Zab^en? 5. SSie ging e^ bem fremben a^dbd^en na^ einiger S^it? 6. 2Sar bie alte S^au sorntg ober gufrleben? 7. SSaS fiir ^in ^erg f)atte ba§ Mabd^en? SBte getgt fid) bo§ filer? 8. 35Joburd) tnor bo§ $Retd) ber alten grau $oKe l^on ber SSelt abgefdiloffen? SBirb ba^ Wdbdjen X2tiiau^gel)en, Wte e§ fieretn= gefommen tnar? 9. SBtrb fie je^t nod^ immer „\)a^ oriuc 9}labd&cn" ^etgenV SSarum nid^t? 315 Fill out: ?J?ein grofe geberbett iDtrft hn fd)iitteln. S)ie§ ift ha^ flein §au§ ber btr tDofilbefannt — J^xau §oKe. Sie 5llt — fprad) bem fletn — S!??dbd)cn fefir freunblid) 3U. 2!ie Sebern bes^ grofe ^die§> trerben auf bie SSelt ber gut — 2)^enfd)en fliegen. ©in mddfttig — ^or t)erf(^Io6 ba^'> fUeid) ber gut — grau §olIe, bte ba§ ^or fiir ba§> gefdilig — 9J^dbd)en dffnete. ©in rot — §al)n fan auf einem tief — ^runnen unb begriifete unfere golben — ^ungfrou. Change all the verbs in the preceding story to the future tense. • . , 3 1 6 Translate: 1 The obliging girl met an old woman who was supporting herself on a crutch. 2. '*Will you come with 817-318] FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT 125 me and make my large beds well and shake my feathers thor- oughly?" said the old woman. 3. The feathers in the old woman's feather-beds are snow down in the world of men. 4. This is probably Frau HoUe, who is well known to us. LESSON 32 317 ^ic ^ttulc unb bic Srlci^igc (@d)tu6) ^a§ gate 90^abrf)cn cr3d()Ite olleg, tuaS il^m Begegnet mar, unb al§ bie bo)c SDhitter ()orte, trie e§ 3U bem iDunberbarcu 9^cid)him gcfoinmcn tiinr,^ iDoIItc fie ber I)nBlicC)en imb faulen %o6)itx- baC'jelBe grofec %\M Dcrfd)affen. ^iefe ftafelidjc unb 5 faule ^od)ter iniiBte'^ fid) mid) an ben tiefen, fd)mar3en ^runneti feljen niib fpiinien; fie ivarf bie fleine Spnle in ben bnnflen 33rnnnen nub fprnng fclber ()inein. 3ic fam, uiie bie anbre, Quf bie fd)one SBiefe unb ging auf bemfdlien griinen ^^^fabe tDeiter. 51B fie gu bem fd^tDaraen 93adofen gelangle, fd)rte ha^ 10 gebacfene 33rot n^ieber: ,,5rd), giel) mid) I)erau§, siel^ mid) I)eraug, fonft toerbe id) berbrennen; \6) Vm fd)on Icingft oit^^gc* hadm\" Die gaule aber antrtiortete: „5^) i^^i^^ «iirf) "irf)t fd)mnt3ig mad)en!" unb ging fort. 33alb fam fie ju bem mad)= tigen ^fpfelbanme; ber rief: „M), fd)iittle mid), fd)iittle mid); i."^ meine rotcn ^Ipfcl finb aKe mitcinanber'* reif!" 8ie antlnortete aber: „2)a§ \aiii mir nid)t cin!"'^ unb ging meiter. ?(B fie Uor ber Jvfcm .<5olIe . lD€nn fie i^r ettva§> fagte; benn fie hadjte an ha§> biele Oolb. 5tm gmetten ^age fing fie id)on an 3U faulensen, am britteti nod^ me^ir ; ba iDoUte fie mor- gen§^ gar tiid)t auffte^en. ©ie tnad)te aud) ber guten grau ^olle ba§> mdd)tig grofee 33ett fd)Ie(^t unb fd)iittclte €§ ntd&t. 25 grofee, fd^tDarge ^or. SIB bie So^Ie barunter 30 ftanb, fiel ein Sf^egen t)on fd^trargem ^ed^ ftatt be§> ertoarteten @oIbe§^ auf if)r bummed §au^t unb il)ren faulen ^or^er. 2)a fam nun bie gaule gans mit foIjIfditDarjem $ed^ iiberfd^iittct nad) §auf€. 2)er rote §a]&n fc^rie: „^iferi!i, unfre fc^mu^ige Sungfrau ift tx)ieber §ie!" S)a§ fdjmarse $ed^ iDirb an il^r 35 l)angen bleiben, il^r gan^eg Seben lang.^^ 3 1 9 Strong Verbs to occur einfatten fiel ein eingefaHeri to begin aitf aitgen fing an aitgef angeu to get up aufftel)eu ftanb auf aufgeftanben Weak Verbs to procure Detf d^affcu to be lazy f aulengeu to get gelaugen to wish tuiinfc^en to hire out tjerbiugen 320 ^tdi tttt = exerted great control over herself. ^ lttOtgen§ = in the morning — adverbial genitive. ® fagte belt ^tenfi auf = dismissed from her service. « ®0Hie«-gen. with ftatt (= attftatt). See App. 126. ^^X^t lang = all her life long. 321-323] FUTURE AND FUXaRE PERFECT 127 32 1 EXERCISES 1. Sefd)retben ©te hie Beiben Zbd}tet bet SStoe! 2. ©radl^Ien ©ie JDa§ ben 3Jldbc^en I)eim ©pinnen Begegnete! 3. Wie unterfd^teb fid^ bog SSerJ^oIten ber Betben in bem 9let(f) ber grau §oll€? 4. SSie ging e§ ben Beiben bort? 33eid^retBen 3ie jebe ^ritfung, bie fie ha 3u Beftelfien Ijatten! 5. 3Sie famen bie Beiben I^eim? 6. Wlxi tveld)en SSorten Begriifete fie ber ^oiin? 7. ^efd^reiBen ©ie ben SlpfelBaum, bejt 33Q(fofen, baB $au§ ber grau ^olle! §ier ift ein !Ieinc§ ©ebid^t iiBer biefe grou ^oHe, ba§> in 2^cutfrf)Ianb feljr Befannt ift. Sefen (©ie e§ unb fe^en (5ie e§ in ^^rofa um, mit fo t)ielen 5Ibieftit)en luie moglidf). 322 groit ^uHc ©d^neeflocfen n)irBeIn nm nnb um; Sm (Garten Blu^t bie SSei^nQd^t^BIum' ; gran ^oHe fal^rt im Sorf l&erunt — ©d^nurre, D^dbd^en,^ fd^nurrel 2)er a^onb Blidft au§> hem 3BoIfengran§, SBeift i^r hen SSeg gn jebem ^au^, ®q6 fie bie flinfften finb^t an^ — (sd^nurre, Sldbd^en, fd^nurrel 323 ^ fldbli^en— addressed to the spinning wheel with which tradition associates Frau HoUe. 128 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [324-325 33emerft2 fie tDO'*^ nod) einen (Serein, grau §oIIe l^dlt^ unb fd)aut l)tnein; S)te^ tnunter brel^'n, belol^nt fie fern — ©cf)nurre, 9^abd^en, fd)nurre! aRartitt ®reif. Write a prose version of the poem with verbs in the future tense. LESSON 33 324 GRAMMAR REVIEW 1. The future tense is formed of tticrben + present infinitive. 2. The future perfect is formed of tticrben + perfect infin- itive. Cf. App. 67, II., and 76. 3. The future and future perfect tenses are used idiomatically to express probability. App. 179. 4. The infinitive always comes last in the sentence. App. 92. 5. Adjectives are not inflected when they are used predi- catively or when they follow the noun. 6. Attributive adjectives when they precede a noun are inflected in three ways, according as they are preceded by the definite article (or demonstrative or interrogative pronouns) ; the indefinite article (or the possessives) ; or by no limiting word whatever. See App. 38-41. 7. The general principle that underlies adjective declension is : Some one word before the noun must show by its form, the gender, number, and case. After such a word, the adjec- tive has the weak ending (c or en). When not preceded by such a word, the adjective has the strong ending. 325 ^23emerft fie — inverted order, because ttietttt is omitted. See App. 188. 3 )))p = anywhere. *pU = stops. ^i\t (=tte. Me) = those who. 326] FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT 129 326 REVIEW EXERCISES /. Give future and future perfect paradigms of: \6)Xt\^tn, gei)en, !ommen, fein, l^alten, bleiben. //. Change to future and future perfect: %\z arme ^^rau \)Oii tange auf i^ren @of)n getDartet, ^er junge @o^n ift alt gett)orben» ©r ift biete Qa^re in ber grembe gebUeben. ^er alte ^ater ift au§ (5Jram geftorben. %\z SCRutter ^at bie §offmmg uic^t tjerloren. ^ie SQlater unb ^iinftler I)abeu ein prdd)tige§ geft gefeiert. @ie finb lange gufammen geblieben. SDann finb fie olle nad^ §aufe gegangen. ///. Translate: 1. The old story of Dame HoUe will always please the little children. 2. The wicked stepmother will have died before (et)e) the good little girl returns. 3. The two little children were spinning by the deep well. 4. They will drop the shuttle into the black water of the dark well. 5. An old woman will be very kind to them, and they will not be afraid. 6. The red cock will crow: "Golden maiden! good child!" 7. When she returns she will be covered with gold. 8. Her wicked stepmother will treat her well, because she will be rich. 9. The ripe apples called from the tree: "We are ripe, will you not shake us?" 10. The little girl had a good heart. IV. Decline in the singular and plural all the adjectives and their nouns in II. and III. 130 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [327-329 CHAPTER VI REFLEXIVE VERBS LESSON SI^ 327 Some verbs in German require as direct object a per- sonal pronoun which refers back to the subject. The verb and the pronoun together express the thought. For example : fid) freuen = to rejoice fic^ fd^dmeu = to be ashamed ftc^ eriunern = to remember fid^ Befinnen = to recollect 328 The reflexive pronouns in 1st and 2d pers. sing, and pi. arc the same as the simple personal pronouns in the dative and accusative; in 3rd pers. sing, and pi. the reflexive pronoun is fi(i^, for both dative and accusative. .'^ In independent clauses this pronoun always comes immedi- ately after the inflected part of the verb. 329 AccusATivB Dative to rejoice to imagine Singular ti^ freuc mi(| i^ bitbc mlr etn bu freuft bi(^ bu bilbeft bit eiu cr frcut fl(^ cr bitbet fi^ ein Plural ftiir freuen unS ttiir bilben tttt0 ein ii^r freut cui^ i^r bilbet vx^ ein fie freuen fi^ fie bilben fir^ ein @ie freuen fi(^ (Sic bilben fi^ ein 830-332] REFLEXIVE VERBS 131 330 ^u SJcrtrrtcn 10 15 Siuet ^inber gotten M int SSalbe Dertrrt. 2)a fogte ber fleine £naBe 3U bem Jletncn $D^dbd)en: „©rinnerft bu bid) benn gar ntd^t, tcol^er tt)tr gefommen ftnb?" ©r fd)dmte [id), ba|5 er eg nic^t iDufete unb barum fdftalt er feine arme fleine ©efo^ir^ tin. ®iefe rief qu^: „5I(^, fd)ilt mid^ nid^t, id& fiir d)te mid^ fo fd^on^ entfe^Iid^. Safe un§ tDcnigfteng einanber troften, bann toerben toir un§ Jjielleidit Befinnen, n)o!)er trir gefommen finb." ^Bolb famen fie an eine moofige ^iitte. ^nn freuten fie fid^, benn fie glauBten SO^enfdften gu finben. ^od} fie l^atten fid& geirrt. §ier n)oI)nten brei fonberBare SSefen, hie fid) SSalbrtjeiBIein nannten. (Sie iroren flein unb flinf unb flei« beten fid^ in griine§ Tloo^, ©rft fiird)tete fid) ha§> fleine a^iib- d^en, bod) ber ^naBe, ber fid^ gem feine§ Tlute§>'^ riil^mte, trat Be^ergt bor fie r)in unb Bat bie 2BaIbtt)eiBIein urn 5lu§funft. ®iefe traren gerabe Bet red)t guter Saune. ®ie Begniigten fid& bamit, ben ^nbern gtoet 9ldtfel aufgugeBen. „2Senn iBr biefe loft, bann iDerben mir eu6f ben red^ten SSeg meifen!" fag= ten fie. (iJortfe^ung fol 3t) > 331 Strong Verbs to scold fd^elten fc^att gefc^olten to let taffcn Uefe gelaffen to give aufgeben gab auf aufgegeben to guess raten riet geraten to direct, show njeifeu tDie§ getuiefen 332 ^ fo f^Ott = without that. 2 feittCg attttte^ — gen. with ^ij^ rit^mett. See App. 124. ' CUd^ — dat. of indirect ob j. 132 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [333-334 Weak Verbs to know (intellec- toiffen, tDugte, ge== to comfort \xd) troften tually) tpitgt* to lose one's way fic^ tjerirren, t)erirrte to be mistaken \x^ irrett fid^, ftc^ t)erirrt to be called fic^ nenneu to remember \xd) erinnern to dress fid) fleiben to be ashamed \xd) fc^amen to boast of fid^ riiiimen to fear fic^ fiird^ten to be content- ed with ftc^ begnugen to solve lofen EXERCISES 333 1. SSqs r^aben hie flettten Slinber getart? 2. SSie bel^onbelte ber fleine ^nobe ha§> 90^db(i)en? 3. Hm tDa§> bittet boS fletne 3ll?Qbd)en ben ^mhen? 2Sa§ toufelen bie Qtmen ^inber md)t? 4. 2Sa§ tun bonn bie Mnber? 5. ©efd^rciben (Bie hie SSalbtceiblein unb il)r §au§! 6. 2Bq§ n^ar ber Unlerfd^ieb iti bem SSerl^oIten beg Sluoben unb bem be§ 2)^abd&en§? 7. aSerben bie SBoIbtceiblein ben ^inbern l^elfen? 334 Translate: 1. I have lost my way in the deep dark forest, and I shall ask the woodsprites to show it to me. 2. He scolded the little girl. 3. They will comfort each other [fid^] 4. Guess these two riddles for me, and I shall show you the way. 5. Do you not remember [fid^ befinnen] whence we came? 6. I have forgotten it. 7. He was afraid, but he liked to boast of his courage, so he stepped forward boldly. 8. I am afraid. You are afraid. He is afraid. They will rejoice. 9. The little boy will say to the little girl, '*Do you not remember the way we came?" 10. They had lost their way and they were frightened. * Compare fentten=to know, in the sense of "to be acquainted with." 335-330] REFLEXIVE VERB^ LESSON 85 ; 133 CARDINALS AND ORDINALS 335 Cardinal Numbers 1, ein^ 11, elf 21, ein unb atDon^ig 2, 3tDet 12, ^xom 22, smei unb atDan^ig 3, bret 13, breiae^n 30, breifeig 4, bier 14, bierge!)!! 40, bteraig 5, fiinf 15, funf3€l)n 50, fiinfaig 6, fed)§ 16, fed^sel&n 60, fed^aig * 7, fieben 17, ficBgeSn 70, fiebaig 8, Qd^t 18, od^tselfin 80, atfitaig 9, Tteun 19, neunaefin 90, ncunaig 10, ael^n 20, ait^ansig 100, fiunbert 1,000 taufenb 1,000,000 cine SDiillion 1899, ein toufenb adjt Ifiunbert neun imb ncunaig obcr Q(^t3cr)n ]&unbert nciin imb neunjig. S(^ adl^Ie: ein§, atuei, brei u. f. to. 336 Sq§ ift ein 2^ann eine grau tm ^inb 2)a§ [inb atoei SD^dnner atcei grouen atuei ^inber Observe that cittS when used with a noun drops the g and is inflected like the indefinite article. The other cardinals have no inflection. 134 337 EL EMENTS OF GERMAN r337-339 Ordinals tin^ ber, bie, ba§ crjlc brci fi II Sh'eitc „ tirittc t)ier n fi „ tiiertc fiinf neun§e^n gtDanjtg fuufunb^tuan^tg i)unbert ft n n n '1 n 1 1 1 . fiinftc „ sttjauatgflc „ fuufuubatDaitjigjlc „ ^imbertftc 338 Observe: 1. That bet Ctfic and bcr brtttc are irregular. 2. That all other ordinals are formed regularly by the addi- tion of a suffix. 3. That from 1-10, inclusive, this suffix is t, from 20 on the suffix is ft. The ordinals are regularly declined (cf. App. 48.) An old form of jtucit was attbcr (other) which is still found in set phrases as anberti)alb = one and one-half, i. e., the second less one-half, ber anbere, the other, the second. 339 giiWcn Sie t)on fed)3e^n bi§ jtnanstg! 3Sa§ ift mel)r, [ieben ober fieB3eI)n? 2St€ t)iel mel^ir ift e^? SSq^ ift iDeniger, a^i ober Qd)t3tg? SSie biel meniger? 3toct, bier, fcd}^ flub gcrabc S^Wcn; einS, brct, [icbcn finb ungcrabe 3cil)Icn. 3BqS fiir S'^Bto finb bie folgenbcn: 1, 9, 11, 156, 58, 75, 89, 124? 3Sier unb slnel ift fed^S, stnel tjon ferf)§ ift t)ter. 2Bq§ ift 7 t)on 27? 8 bon 100? 10 t)on 100? 1 t)on 100? 2 t)on 80? 3X4=12, brei mal dier ift 3Ji3oIf, fed^§ mal fieben ift stnei unb t)icr3ig. 2Bte btel ift 8X9? 10X12? ©ogeni Sie W^ ^xxmal- cins^ t)on 5 t)er! bon 7! i^on 9! 2)rei in fed)^ ift stoei. '^vod in t)ier3el)n ift ficben. ©ieben in t)ier3e]^n ift ^Xozx. D^eun in brei unb fed)3ig ift ficben. 3Sie t)iel ift 8 in 48? 9 in 36? 4 in 84? ^ ^ ^ftfttflen = recite. ^btt§ ^inmalctn8 = multiph'catiou table. 340-341] REFLEXIVE VERBS 135 340 2)ie a^erirrlctt (fjortfelung) ®Q§ erfte ^lotfel loutete: 2Bie biele ©ternlem ftel^en am §immel§3elt? 2)te Somber sogen ftc^ ein toenig guriiii urn fid^ 3U Befinnen. ^otte nid^t ber fiefirer in ber ©d^ule babon gefprod^en? ©ic erinnerten fid^ bunM,i bafe er etmoS gefagt 5 I)Qtte, oBer ber fleine ^itobc I^attc fic^ 5u ber 3^it gerabe mlt ciiicr fummcnbcn SItcgc amiifiert, uub ba^^ flciitc Sll^abdOcn Wat ciit menig ciugefdjlafcn. 2)a befam ber SInabe plo^Iid) emeu guten ©tnfaH, ben crftcn an biefem ungIMIid)cn ^agc: ,Miv luoHcn luartcn, hh5 bie 10 Sterne l^erouBfommen, bann toerben toir fie 3dI)Icn!" „^a, ha^ iDerben n)ir inn, ctber id] fann nur bi§ I)iinbert 3dl)len!" ,/3d)a= bet- nid^t^! ^d) fann bi§ toufenb 3dl3len unb noc^ taujcnb fommt gleid^ im 33ud)e eine SO^iHion; iia§> ift fel^r, fefir t)icl. 3Ber^ eine SO^iHion l&at, l^eifet a^iHiondr, ber ift bid nnb fd^rt I'V bierfpdnnig. 33effere^ gibt e^'' gar nid^t in ber SSelt." Sa§ a)Jdbd)en iDnnbcrte fid) iiber biefe 2Sei^^I)eit iljresi gnten SlamC' raben unb fagte nid)t^ meljr. Syiun fe^tcn fie fid) unter bie alte ©id)e unb n^artetcn anf bie ©terne. ^od) bk famen nod) langc nid&t. 2)a finb fie ein= 20 gefd^Iafen, erft ba§> 9Wdbd)en, bann ber ^nabe. Sie I)atten aUe beibe einen n)unberlid^en ^raum. (f^ortfe^ung folgt) 341 iilttttm= faintly. ^ fii^attet = bttS f^abet — colloquial omission of neuter subject. 3 mer = he who. See App. 169a. *8tftt c8 = there is. @8 glftt (sing, and plur.) takes the accusative and denotes the existence of an object, or objects in general, as: ®# 9IM titele ^dume. @^ ifi and its plural eS flnb denote the existence of an object or objects within certain local or temporal limits, as: ^^ flnti tJrei Siittme in biejcm ©ttrtrn. 136 342 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN Strong Verbs [34'i-345 towithdraw ftc^ gurucf^te^en ^og fid^ ^uxM \\d) gururfgejogeu to receive befommeit befam be!ommeu to solve lofen to sound, be laittCU Weak Verbs to buzz fummeu to amuse oneself fic^ amiiftereu 343 EXERCISES 1. SBag tvax fein erfter (^infatt? 2. SSie hjeit fonnte ta^ SOldbc^en nur gdl^Ien? 3. fS^a§> ift bie nci^fte 3aI)I tm S3u^e na(^ 100? 4. 2Ble befc^reibt ber ^nabe ben TtiUiomic? 344 Translate: 1. The first riddle was very difficult. 2. The second thing that the children did was to go to sleep. 3. A millionaire has a great carriage (ber SBagen) and drives a four- horse team. 4. The children will withdraw and the first child will receive an inspiration. 5. The girl will go to sleep. LESSON 36 FRACTIONALS 345 J = \i(i% ^rittet i = "^a^ ^iertel ^ = ein giinftet \ = ein 8erf)ftel Note that the suffix fcl forms fractionals. SDrittel, ^iertet, giinftel, (Sec^ftel, etc. , are neuter nouns. An exception to this is: bie §alfte (the half). Tlie adjective form of this noun is ^olb, which has the regular adjective declension. 346-349] REFLEXIVE VERBS 137 345 half an apple the half of an apple ein ^alber 5l|)fel bie §atfte eine^ 5IpfeI§ eineg ^alhtn ^\)^tU ber „ einent ^alben 3(pfel ber „ einen ^alben 5l|)fel bie „ ^alU tpfet bie |)d(ften eine§ 5(pfet ^Iber S^fel *^er „ „ „ ^arben Spfein ben ^albe ^pfel '^i^ 347 5d) ^dbe feinen gonaen 5IpfeI, id) I)Qbe nur ein ^rittel. SSie t3iele SSiertel modjen ein ©angeg? SSenn man ein SSiertel nimmt, tuie biele bleiben? 2)rei 35iertel bleiben. §Qft bu einen gonaen 5l^fel? D^ein, id) l^abe nur einen ]f)alben. SSo ift bie onbere $dlfte? SP^eine ©d^iDefter I)Qt bie anbere $dlfte, id^ l^obe fie i!)r gegeben. 348 ^ic 95crtrrtctt (Sortfefeung) Sm ^roum erfd)ien if)nen^ il)r alter Sel^rcr. 5tber er ^atte fid) tierdnbert. (Jr \vav ^treimal fo bid aU gen)dl)nlid) unb an\iati eine§ §ute§2 trug er eine grofee ^^ed^enmafd^ine auf bem ^op\e. ^-arauf ftanben aU hie QaW^t aE bie 33riid)e, unb 5 ha^^ ganae (^inmalein§. ^er Sefirer ful^r t)ierf|:)dnnig, tvie ein 3WiUiondr, aber anftatt ^ferbe r)atte er ^tvei ^ometen mit fcurigen ©ditDdnjen, unb fein SSagen Wax ber grofee Sdr. %n^ feine Meibung tvax fcl)r fonberbar. ^g^nv §dlfte''^ flei= 349 ^ X^nttl. In the inverted order the subject immediately follows tlie verb, but an unemphatic pronoun or adverb may intervene, ^C^t frctttc flri^ bag flctnc 2RttlJ(^ctt. ^ eittC§ ^Uteg, gen. with ttttftatt. See App. 126. ^gur ^alftC = one half. 138 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [860 bete er fid) in &olb ,unb 3iir anbcrcn ^dlfte in 8ilbcr. SobeH 10 tvai fein I^alber Uop\ mtt ©ternen befat. Xie ^inber tnunbcr- ten fid) fel)r iiber ir)n. 2)od^ frcuten fie fid), aB er freunblid) Uid^elte unb gong lieb^ mit il)nen fl^rad). „92un, fbnnt il)r ntd)t rcd)nen?" fragtc er, ^ilir l)aU bod) fo tiid)tigen XInterridjt ger)Qbt, befinnt end) bod)!" 15 9?un gob er i[)nen ©j:empel auf, nnb fie red)neten fie olle au§. „SSie titel ift brei fiebjeftntel oon neun I)iinbert unb neun- unbncunsig? SSenn ein ^onig brei 9J?itIionen ©olboten l)at unb er berliert erft hk ^alfte, bann ein Drittel unb anient nod^ ad)t l^unbert ac^tunbad)t3ig, mic tiiele bleiben iibrig?" Sie 20 . ein mcid)tig grofeeS ©titdf ^$a):)ter. ^arouf ftonben un3dl)lige ^$un!tc. 35 ^iefe bilbet^n lange S'^ei^en. Sie erfte 'tRei^e tvav noc^ gan3 beutlid), bie jtneite fonnte man faum lefen, aber bet ben anberen t)erging einem §bren unb ©el^en.^ „©o", fogte ber Se^rer, „ba il^x eud) nun fo fc^bn auf ha§> ^o^fred)nen berftel^t, fo n)iK xd& eud) ]&elfen. ^eht bte§ ben 2SQlbn)eibIein, fogt il^nen, ,,fo 30 t)tel€ $un!te auf bent Ropier ftel&en, fo t)iele ©terne gibt e§ tm ^itnniel." (@d)tufe tolgt) 350 * bttbei = in addition. 5 (if J = lovingly, kindly. ^^^ bie . . . S3rtne= his glasses, dat. of possession. See App. 144. ^ golbcn — note suffix ett to form adjectives from nouns of material. Cf. jllftcm. In analogy with fllbcrtt are formed l^oljent (wooden) and fltttfettt (glass.) ^Uetglng . . . Sc^eit = one grew dizzy (literally, all sense of hear- ing and of sight passed away.) \ 351-363] REFLEXIVE VERBS 139 35 I Strong Verbs to appear erfc^eineit erfc^ien erfc^ienen to draw off an^k\)tn 5og an^ au^gejogeit to understand fic^ Uerfte!f)eit ijcrftaub fid) fic^ tjerftanben Weak Verbs to change fic^ t)erdnbern to smiie lad^etn to sow bef den* - to be abie !omten, !ouute, ge!oitnt to be astonished ftd^ ttJUUberU to count red^ueu to rejoice ftc^ f reueu to form bilbeu EXERCISES 352 1. Sefd^reiben ©ie ben 2cl)rer! 2. SKarum erfd^ien er ben ^inbern aU SO^tGiondr? 3. 33efd)reiben Sie feine ^^3ferbe unb fctncn.2Saaen! 4. 2Sq^ Ijat er bie ^inber gefragt? 5. 2Bq§ fiir ©rcmpcl I)Qt er ir)neu aufgegeben? G. 3Bic red)neten bie ^liuber? 7. SSoriiber !)oBen fie fid) getounbertV 8. 2Sie §Qt er fie belofint? 9. Sefd)retben Sie bog ^^3Q^:)ter, bag er f)erau§5og! 10. SSa§ tDor bie erfte 3lnttDort? 11. 28ie mar feine 33riEe? 2Sa§ fiir ©c^u^e l)aite er? Sft etn SO^effer golben ober filbern? 2Sa§ ift ^olsern? SBog ift tDoKen? 33ilben Sic Slbjeftitie aii§>: bauert U§> tc^ einmol um bte SSelt reife?" „5o!" fdjrieen Beibe ^inber laut. „®a§ l^at un§ bcr 2e!)rer er3Ql)It. 5IHe i^ierunb- glranatg ©tunben fal^ren ®ie einmal mit xr)ren fd^onen ^ferben um hie 2SeIt, ad^, nel^men 8ie un§> hod) etnmal mit!" ^a 20 Iod)te bte ©onne unb fang il)nen ha§> folgenbe Sieb t)or: 356 ^te ffctncn Stcrnlctti Unb bte ©onnc, fie mac^te ben tceiten 9titt nmbieSSelt; \ Unb bie (Sternlcin fprod^en: „SSir rci(cn mit Um bie SSelt!'' 25 Unb bie ©onne, [te fd)Qlt fie: ,,56^ IJl^cibct 3U $au§, S}enn id) Brenn' eud^" bie golbenen ^nglcin au§, 33ei bem feurigen Witt um bie SBelt." Unb hk ©ternlein gingen 3um lieBen SO^onb Sn ber D^Jadit; 30 Unb fie fprad^en: „^u, ber auf SSoIfen t^ront Sn ber Tiad)t; Safe un§ tDonbeln mit bir, benn bein milber ©d^ein, ©r Brennt un§ nimmer^ bie ^ugelein!" Unb er nal^m fie, (SefeEcn ber 9iad)t. 357 ^ eg iUi mtr lelb = I am sorry. See App. 249. ' CU(^ — possessive dative, See App, 144, ^ nimmer — poetic form of nle or ntemolg. 142 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [858-860 35 dlun miKfommen ©ternlcin unb cjuter 90^onb, Sn ber 9^ad)t! Sl&r berfte!)t, tDa§^ ftiE in ben ^eraen tDol^nt Sn ber ^adjt ^ommt unb giinbet bte I)tmnilifd}en 2td)ter on, « S)q6 id& lufttg mitfd^iDdrmeni^ unb fpielen !ann Sn ben freunblid^en (Si^ielcn ber 3}a6:)t. ©oriiBer finb^^ bie ^inber erttjad^t. ©ie liefen gu \>zn 2Bolb= hjeibtein unb riefen au§: ^SSer^^ ^^|t ber (Sonne fdf)rt, totrb in 24 ©tunben unt bie SBelt reiten!" (Sic ^atttn e§ rid^tig geralen 45 unb bie SSalbmeiblein jeigten i^nen nun ben 2Beg na6) §aufe. 358 Strong VERBi to seem fc^eiueu fd)ien gefc^ienen to withdraw \\d) juriicfjiefien ^og fid^ ^uvM fid) guriidge^ogen to close gufaUen fiet gu gugefatten Weak Verbs • to make an effort fid^ auftrengcu ftreugte fid^ an fid^ angeftrengt to recognize erfeuueu erfannte erfannt to meditate nad^bcufeu to kindle anjiiuben 359 EXERCISES 1. Semen ^le ha§> ©ebid^t Qu^^rDcnbig! 2. 33efd)reiben ®ie bie (Sonne, tvk fie ben ^inbern erfd)icnen ift! 360 'ttitt§ = liag, ttag. ^° tnttfli||tt)atttten = to wander along. This word offers great difficult y in translation ; it means, to dream day dreams or to indulge in fan- tastic musings. " flttil erttiaii^t — note the transition of condition implied, ^dii^cn (to be awake) would take l^aBett, since no transition is implied. Cf. fdllafett and elttf(^lttfett. See App. 70. ^2 ttjcr = tier, ber. See App. 169. 361-302] REFLEXIVE VERBS 143 3. 3Sie fatten hie ^inber tierjudjt, fid) 3u Befinnen? 4. 3Sie wax hex atueite Zxaum derfi^ieben t)on bem erften? 5. 3Sic t)iele Stitnbcn baucrt c§, bi§ bie Sonne urn bte SSelt reift? 7. SStc t)iel€ SOttmiten finb in etner ©tunbe? tvk btele ©efunben? 8. llm tDtet)ieI ll^r ge^t bie Sonne je^t auf? Ungef^ifir urn jed&§ Itl^r. Hm n)ie oiel Uf)r gel)! fie im Sommer auf? Ungefdl)r um bier U^v. Itm tDie t)iel U^x gel^t bie Sd()ule an? Itm ^alb neun^ Ul^r gel^t fie an, unb nm ein W^x ge()t fie au§>. 5(Ber mir finb immer fd)on ein 3SierteI auf ncun IHir I)ier, unb fom= men erft um brei ^Biertel auf smei lU)r fort. Hm wk tiicl lU^r gel^t bie ^ird^e an? ba§ ^r)eater? llm n)ie tiiel ltl)r gefien fie au§? 3Sann finb Sie gen^ol^nli^ ha? 3Bann fommen Sie nad^ $aufe? 361 Translate: 1. The beautiful lady with the golden crown will appear to the little children in their sleep. 2. At five o'clock they will have come home. 3. Their mother said: *'When did the sun rise?" 4. They answered: "It rose about [at] 6.30 and will probably set at 5.15. 5. Usually they come home about [at] six o'clock. 6. I am sorry for you. 7. The children had fallen asleep and were dreaming of a beautiful lady. 8. The little stars had gone around the world with the gentle moon. 9. At eight o'clock little children go to bed, but the old people go to sleep at half past ten. 10. The little children said: "Please take us along!" 11. The sun laughed and sang them a song. 362 ^ Be careful to note the difference between the English and Ger- man methods of reckoning time. Thus: 10.30 = ^atb elf; 10.15 = etH mcxtti auf elf; 10.45 = lurcl SBiertel auf elf. 144 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [363-365 LESSON 38 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES 363 SE)er Wiawn \\i giemlirf) flein, W %xm tft fleiner, 'tia^ ^inb ift am fkinflen. 5ft ^o§ ^iid^Iein fleiner ober grower aB bte ^enne? 28a§ tft am fleinften, ber ®al}n, bte §ettne ober ba§ ^iid^lein? S}q^> ^iid^kitt ift am fleinften, ber ^al^rt tft am grofetett. SSa§ tft am btdfften, ha% Brautte, ha^ rote, ober ha^ iDeiBc ^ud)? 3SeI» (f)e^ tft btdfer, bo§ beutfd^e ober 't^a^^ etigltfdie 33iid}? ®a§ groge S3uc^ tft beittf(^. ^a§ gro^erc 93ud^ ift englifd). ^a§ grb^te S3uc§ ift tateimfc^. Predicate gro§ grower am grogten Attributive i ^.^ 9ro|e bie grogm ba? grogtc ( etn groger etne grogere (metn) gro§te» 364 The comparative and superlative frequently have umlaut. Note that the comparative and superlative are inflected like the positive. But naturally the superlative can not be inflected with the indefinite article. 365 Regular Comparison With Umlaut lang furs Icing er fiirser alter Idngjl, am langjiett fiirgeft, am fiiraefien ortefl, am orteften Without Umlaut flar laut bic! flein flarer tauter bider fleiner !(arfit, am !larflen lauteft, am tautcflen bidfl, am btdften fleinft, am fleinfien 366-369] REFLEXIVE VERBS 145 366 Slightly Ikregular gro§ grower grofet, am grogtcn ^oc^ ^o^cr ^oc^ft, ant fioc^ftcn ita^ itd^cr ndd^ft, am ndc^ftcn 367 Irregular and Defective Comparison gut beffev beft, am beftcn t)iel me^r meift, am meiften — — erft, am erften * — — le^t, am le^tcn * 368 :^cutfd)e)g 3cf)nhucfcn ^Q§ UnterridjtC'tDefcn in 2)eutfc^lQnb oe()ort 311^ ben in= tercffonteften ©rfdicinungen bee Sanbcc^. Tic nicifton ©lurid)- tuncicn mei(en aitf alte I^iftortfdic 23rand)e iinb ^rabitioncn- 3uriirf, befonbcr^ an ben llnioerfitaten, and) §od)]d)nfcn'^ gc= 5 nannt, beren ciltefte, bie .*peibelbergcr^ Uniberfitat, ]d)on feit bem ^softre 1386 ej:iftiert. * From these superlatives, comparatives, tier erftetf, the former, and ber le^tete, the latter, have been formed on the analogy of the regular comparative. 369 ^ fiCprt gtt = belongs to, i.e., is a part of. @e^drett + dat. (with- out preposition) = belongs to, in the sense of is property of , e.g., 2)ttg Sur^ geprt mir. - 2^railiti0tt'— a feminine noun of Latin origin. Note that the class of nouns ending in ttOtt (pronounce ^iott) are all feminine and all accented on last syllable, bie gcftiOtt', bic ®tttttOtt', bic 9lttttOtt'. ^ ^Od^jli^Ule — note difference in application from our ' 'high school. " ^OJ^f^utc is used to designate any institution above our high or pre- paratory schools. * ^CtbcIJerfiet — note suffix cr to form adjectives (always unin- fiected) from names of cities, e.g. Jlety ^^xUx, G^liCttgoer, SoftOtter, etc. 146 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [370 ®ie niebrigfte ©tufe he§> nnternc^t§tt)€jen^ ift bie ^Iem= fhtberfd^ule, tno fid) bie giingften, im HIter t»on brei U§> fed)§ Salfl^en, burd)^ ©piel gur Orbnung getDo^nen. 10 :rte rtdd^fte ^Stufe Bilbet bie 33oIfc^fc^uIe, rt^o bie ettt)a§ altercn ^inber ben (JIementariinterrid)t auf ftantlid)e Soften genieBen. ^ier lernen .^naben imb 90^abd)en geteilt bie ®Ie= mentQr=5dd)er, Senlfd), Sf^eligion, 9fied)Tien, (55efd)i(^tc, Oco= graphic, D^aturlef^re, 3SoIf§tDirtf(^aft, ©ingen, g^i^nen, 3:iir= 15 nen imb ^aiiborbeit. (2e^tere§ lernen nur bie 9P^dbd)cn.) Ser llnterrid}t bauert mcift bon 8 ]6i§ 12 nnb t)on 2 Bt§ 4, mit 5trei ^olbfeiertagcn, 9KitttDod)f> nnb 3amftag§. ^n bie 3SoIf§fd)nIcn gel)en meiften§ bie ^inber, bercn ©c^ulbefud) mit bem bierse^nten '^aljice fc^Iiefet. 3Ser eine meitere 33ilbung fitr 20 jeine ^inber tDiK, fd^idt fie tiom nenntcn Softie an auf ha§> (St)mnafinm. ^ier finbet l^auptfad^Iid) bie 35orI)ereitnng sum Gintritt in hie llniberfitdt ober hie ted^nifdjen ^od^fd^ulen \iatt. griil^er^ lag an alien ©Qmnafien^ ber §anptfd)tr)er^un!t auf ben flaffifdjen ®prad)en, je^t legt man in ben fogenannten 25 9^ealgt)mnafien unb 91eformgt}mnafien tueniger @€n)id)t auf bie atten 3prad)en unb mef)r auf bie neucren^ unb auf bie 9?atur= triffenfc^aften. ((Scfihife folgt) 370 ^iltttd^ — preposition of means; cf. tlOll — preposition denoting agency. ^ ^rul^cr — adverb, literally, earlier, translate formerly. Note that adverbs in German are often simply uninflected adjectives. ' ©^mttttflen— pi. of ©^mnafittm— belongs to mixed decl. Observe the Latin ending ittni changed to ten in plural. Cf. 218. ^ iJte ncueren ^^irar^cn = modem languages. 371-874] REFLEXIVE VERBS 371 Strong Verbs to direct, point toeifen lt)ie§ getoiefeu to enjoy- geuiefeen geno^ genoffeit to sing fingeii fang gefungen to close fc^Uegeii fd)lofe geid)tof)eu Weak Verbs to belong ge^i mn to draw '^dd)\m\ to exist eiiftiereii to take gymnastics tUl'lteit to accustom geft)d()nen to send fc^icfen to share teilen 147 EXERCISES 372 328 ogu ge{)ort ta^ Unterrid)t§tDejen 5J)eutf^lanb§? (SJe^oxeu hk 33oIf5i(^uIen 3u ben §0(^id)ulen ober ju ben ©Icmentarfc^ulcn? SSarum? SSem ge[)oren bk Sd)ulbud}€r? SSa^ gel^ort ben 3d}u= lern? 3Bac> ift ber Unterid)ieb aroifc^cn einer I)iefigen^ §od)fd)uIc nnb einer beutfc^en? SSorouf tDeifen I)euttgc @el)rdud)e on hen Uniberfitaten oft jnriid? 9^ennen Sie bie oltefte UniDerfitdt Seutfd^Ianb^ ! ©ett toann Beftel^t biefelbc? 2Sa5 mad)t ba^> beuti'die UnterriditStcefen pdjft intereffont? 5iennen Sie bie t)erfd]iebenen 8tufen ber ©c^ulcn unb erflaren 3ie beren 9iu^en! 3So()in gcr)en bie jiingften, tooliin bie diteren ^inbcr? SBoburdj unterjd)eibet \\ii) ber je^ige llnter= rid)t in ben ©Qmnofien Don bem frii^eren? 373 Translate: 1. The students in a German school study- very diligently. 2. A very interesting phenomenon in German life is the good system of instruction. 3. Of all the schools the gymnasium makes the greatest demand on the students. 374 '^teflfi=in this country; derived from adverb ^ier; so also borttfi (from iJort), iC^ifl (from jc^t), ^CUttfi (from |cute). 148 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [375-37(i 4. From the lowest to the highest grade of German schools, the children study the most difficult subjects (gdc^er). 5. Usu- ally the instruction lasts from early morning to (M§) late in the afternoon. 6. The hardest work is in the gymnasium. 7. The technical schools and the universities are the most advanced schools. 8. More emphasis is placed on the modern languages than on the ancient. 9. But formerly the greater emphasis was placed on the ancient languages and less on the natural sciences. LESSON 39 375 2)cutf$c8 S^ttltncfcn S)ie (Sc^iiler befiidjcn bie ©Qmnaiien im ^urd^fdjnitt Dom neunten big gum neun^cljnten ^a^tz. ^n ben I^o^cren ^laffen I)Qt ber 3d)iiler meiften§ bretfeig Itnterrid^tSftunb^n btc SSoc^e, Qlfo fiinf Stuiibcu tdglid). 9JZQn ftcljt, bofe cr fidj aufg I)6d)yte^ B onftrengen muB. 2^er 3taat mad)t tiuBerft^ ftrcngc 5lnforbcrungen an xi)\\, ^ unb ha^ ©jamen, momtt ber ^wrfug fc^IieBt, tft pd^ft^ fd)tt)ic= rig. 3SieIe 8tiibenteu, bte todfirenb ber ®d)ul5eit Quf§ an= geftrengtefte^ ftubiert I)a]6en, fonnen bie ^ritfung fiir boS 10 fogenannte S^eifeseugnt^ nid^t Befteften unb fallen olfo burd). S)Q§ tft ()od)ft Befdjdmcnb fiir fie unb tl^re 5(ngeprigen. SSenn ober bos ©i-amen gliidltd) boriiber ift, bonn gel^t'^"^ luftig auf bie llntDerfitat. gier ftubieren fie 5uerft aufeerft^ 376 ^ ttttf§ pri^fte = to the highest degree. \I This is called the absolute superlative, since it does not suggesr comparison as does the relative superlative am p^ftett. The phrase is adverbial. The adjective (attributive) equivalent is seen in iiufeerft jirettfie ^ttforbentttgetl (most severe demands), w^here the absolute degree is shown by the superlative adverb au^etfi (sometimes P^fif). See App. 56, ^batttt geP'g luftifl = then they start merrily. 377] REFLEXIVE VERBS 149 incnig, bcnn e§ Ijeibtp fid) tnocjiid)]! jd}neE unb Grihtblid) in ba§ 15 neue Seben einfiuben. SDer juuge ©intrctenbc I^etfet „3ud)s", tuenn er fid^ einem dltercn v^tubenten anfdjltefet, I^elfet er ,,2eib» fuc^s^". 9??ogIi(^ft^ fdjneH tritt er etner „SSerbinbung" Ul ^un lentt er „paiifen", ba§ l)et6t, fid) mit bem 3al3el fdjlagen, tragi etne Bunte ^appe unb Befudit bie ,Mi^eipen". 5IEe ntd)t= 20 ftubierenben 33iirg€r ^leifeen ^'ip^iltfter", unb fiir biefe ^at ber „^u6)^" dufeerft trenig 5ld)tung. Sm britten ©emeftcr ge()t mctft ba^ ©tubteren (in ber 3tubentenf^rad)e ,,od)fen" ober „biiffeln'0 Io§. 9^un bereitet cr fid) 3ur Softor^riifung t5or, unb ha gilt^ e§ oufS tiid)tigfte 25 ftubieren. "Bod) hei)alt cr immer nod) 3eit, fid) ju amii= ficren im SBerein mit feinen ©enoffen, fo bofs fiir jeben Xeutfd^en^ bie llniberfitats^eit 3ur gludlid)ften 3eit feine§ Se= bcuij gel)6rt. SSenn er fifteiben mufe, fo fingt cr traurig: £) alte !Surfd)enr)errIid)feit! ' 30 SBo^in bift hu cntfd)h)unben? 9Zie fef)rft bu n)ieber, golbne Qeit, 3o frol^ unb ungebunben! 3Sergcben§ fpcil^e id) um!)er, 3d) finbe beine ©pur nid)t mel)r. ierum, ierum, ierum, o quae mutatio rerum!^ 377 ^ eg ^et|;t (= C8 fiilt) = now it is important. * ficiftfu^g— somewhat equivalent to the "fag" of English schools. ^ mofiiili^ft fl^ttcff = as quickly as possible. ^fiir jcien ^CUtf^en— note that bcutfd^ has always the adjective inflection. ^ »ttrfr^Ctt^crrU(^!elt = jolly student life. *Such a Latin refrain occurs with many similar student songs. 150 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [378-379 78 Strong Verbs to pass (exam- ination) befte^en beftanb beftanben to fail burc^faHen fiel burc^ burc^gefallen to enter j \xd) eiufinben 1 eintreten fanb fic^ tin firf) eingefunben trat ein eingetreteu to join beitreten trat M beigetreten to fight a duel fi^ fd^lagen Wn m fic^ 9efd)tagen to start, begin lo§ge{)en ging Io§ lo^gegangen to retain be^altcn be^ielt be^alten to part fc^eiben frflieb gefc^ieben to disappear entfc^njinben entfc^ftjanb entfd)tt)unben Weak Verbs to fight paufen to prepare t)orbereiten J od^fen ( biiffeln to enjoy oneself fic!^ omiifiereu to "dig" to return n)ieber!el)ren to look about umfierfpd^en 379 EXERCISES 1. 3So ftubieren bie (Hd)uler auf§ angcftrcngteftc, itnb iDarum? 2. 33€fd)reiben Sie bie erftcu Semefter best llnil^erfitdtslcbens ! bie f|)dteren! 3. 3Ba§ fiir 5tnforberungen mac^t man an bie ©tubenten im ^oftorejamen? 4. SSie benft ber ©tubent an feine Hnit)erfitdt auriicf? 1. A most difficult examination closes the course at the gymnasium. 2. [The] studying begins in the third semester and is carried on most severely. 3. The student now makes the greatest effort of his school life. 4. He prepares himself for the difficult doctor's examination. 5. But he amuses himself also, so that his university life belongs to the happiest time in his life. 380] REFLEXIVE VERBS 151 LESSON J^O 380 GRAMMAR REVIEW 1. Reflexive Verbs require as object a reflexive persoual pronoun either in the accusative or the dative. This pronoun is often untranslatable. Many reflexives take a secondary object in the genitive case. (See App. 124. ) 2. The numerals are uninflected except citl, which is inflected like the indefinite article. 3. Ordinals are formed from cardinals by the addition of the suffix t from the numbers 1-19. From 20 on, the suffix is fl. The ordinals are inflected like any other adjectives. @rft-, Wxii- are irregular in the formation of their stems. 4. Fractionals are formed from cardinals by adding the suffix tel. The fractional is a neuter noun of the first class, strong declension. §alb, bic ^iilfte, and bal ^rtttel are irregular. 5. Adjectives of material are formed from nouns by the addition of the suffix cm (sometimes ctt). 6. The comparative degree of adjectives is formed by adding cr, and the superlative by adding (c)fl, to the positive stem. These suffixes often produce umlaut in the stem of the adjec- tive. Some adjectives are compared irregularly. (See App. 60-52.) 7. When used attributively, the comparative and super- lative are declined according to the regular adjective declen- sion. Predicatively the superlative phrase ttttt — Ctt is used. 8. The absolute superlative, which represents a very high degree of the quality and no comparison with other objects, is formed attributively by means of the adverb pri^jl or du^crfl 4- the positive ; predicatively by the phrase ttufS c. (See App. 56.) 152 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [381-382 REVIEW EXERCISES 381 Fill in: Xic 3lDGi rUnbcr I)Q]6en — im 2BaIbe Derirrt. 2!ie Wcmmx Qtniifieren — in ben erft — Semcftern bc;^^ lIniDcrf{tQt§= Ieben§. ®te Unberfitaten gepren — ben §od)|d)uIen be§ Son^ beg. ®te ©onne fdjcint 5^ute auf§ — . ^ie Sonne fd^eint — tm ©ommer. ®er flein — ^naBe \)Cii 'ba^^ fd^roer — ®i*empel im ^opfe Quggcrec^net. Ser fleinfte ^noBc tt)irb am — red)nen. ^ie licben fleincn 3ternlein o€]^cn cjern mit bem — 90^onb, fein Sl\6)i \\i t)iel milber qI§ — ber ©onne. 382 Translate: 1. The small boy and the smaller girl had lost their way iu the exceedingly dark forest. 2. "Shame on you!" said the queer wood-nymph to the lost children. 3. The children rejoiced at the riddles, and their old teacher helped them with their mental arithmetic. 4. "In how many hours does the sun go around the world?" asked the first wood- nymph. 5. "In 24 hours," replied the little boy, who boasted of his mental arithmetic. 6. The first half of the riddle was hard to guess, but the second half was easy. 7. This half- page (bte ^txiz) is full of little dots, the other half -page is golden. 8. The silk gown of the beautiful lady was most gorgeous. 9. The Universities of Germany are most inter- esting. 10. The most interesting universities are the oldest. 11. The boys study hardest in the gymnasium. 12. The de- mands are the most severe in the last two years. 13. The children are the youngest in the kindergarten. 14. The chil- dren enjoy themselves exceedingly. 383-385] PASSIVE VOICE 153 CHAPTER VII PASSIVE VOICE LESSON J^l 383 Active 3^ fa^ iiin 3(^ ^abc if)n gcfc^cn 3d^ ^attc il)n gefc^cn 3d^ mcrbc il)n fc^cn 3(^ tocrbc if)n gefet)en ^aben Passive @r toirb t)on mir gcfe^en @r tourbe tjon mir gefel^en @r ijl Don mir gefcjen taotbcn @r tuor Don mir gcfe^cn morbcn ©r tuirb Don mir gcfc^cn tucrbcn @r tuirb Don mir gcf cl^en tQorben f cin The passive voice of any transitive verb is composed of some form of the verb toetben and the perfect active participle of the required verb (see App. 78). In the- perfect tenses of the passive, the augment of the participle gctoorbett is omitted. The German preposition of agent is Hon (by) and it takes the dative case. ^ur^ is the preposition of means. For complete passive inflection see App. 78; for syntax, App. 218-222. 384 2)eutfc^Ionb 2!eutfd^Ianb mirb jd^rlid] Don Dielen ^TuSldnbern bcfit(f)t, tDeil e§ ))M)\i^ intereffonte (3iftorif(^e unb fultureUe ^pnomene gu bieten ^at %u6) feine nQtiirltdjen ^Inlogen ftnb oft betDun= bert hiorbcn. 9Wan finbet^ in bem fleirten Sanbe (e§ tDtrb 5 bcredjnet, 'ba'^ ganj 2;eiit]d)lQTtb ntd^t fo grofe ift tuie ber (Stoat 385 ^ ^dt^ft Itttercffattte— see App. 56. ^man flnbct— translate there is found. See App. 220. 154 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [386 Xeica^) erftaunlid) grofee llnterfdjiebc tm SUma unh tiielfadjen SBec^fel ber Sanbfdiaft. Sm 9^orben Breitet fid^ ha§> 2anh in meilenlangen, fanbi= gen gldc^en qii§, bie fogenannte SOZarf^ beren'^ ^^oefie unb 10 ^^vb^t diei^^ )oon olelen norbifd)en ^id^tern befungen iiDorben ift. ®tefe grofeen 5Iad)en finb don einonber burd) magige (Erf)ebungen getrennt. 3^^' treiter fublidi man fommt, befto p^er liegt ba^ Sanb iiber bem SOZeeresfpiegel. .§ier beftnben fic^^ hk grofeen SSiilber (ber ©c^tDaratDalb, ber 3:;6uringer=^ 15 toalb, unb, iueiter oftlic^, ber 33olf)mertt)aIb^), jdo bo^ O^r burc^ bog iHaufi^en ber ^annen, Sinben unb (Si(^en entgiidt JDirb, unb rt)o ber ©inn tion bem SSalbgauber gefangen genom- men mirb.'^CSn biefen bemolbeten ^ugelldnbern befinben ftd^ tounberf^bne ttefbloue 8een. v 20 ^n ber ^itte bes Sonbc^^, an ben Ufcrn ber ©Ibe, ido bie l^errlii^e ^tahi Sresben liegt, ift hk ^anb(d}aft fo fd^on unb grofeartig gefunben tuorben, ba^ man ber ©egenb hen DZomen „hk fdd^fifd)e (Sd)n)ei3" gcgeben ]f)at. 2)ur(^ bie ©ebirge, bie ha^ Sanb burd^freugen, tvevben 35 2Bafferfc^eiben gebilbet, t)on benen fic^ bie grofeen 8trdme nadf) t)er{d^iebenen Seiten ergiefeen. Siefe ©trome (ber 9^f)ein, mit feinem romantifd^en Hfer, hie breite ©Ibe, bie blaue 2)onau, 386 ^ 3Rttrf— originally meaning boundary, territory, now specialized in connection with Brandenburg. * ticrctt = whose— refers to SRatf- ^ Berber ^Ctj = rugged charm. ^ jc tueiter befto ]^O^er=the farther the higher— both German bcftO, and English the are remnants of an old instrumental case. ' 0eft1t)ien fld^ = are found. See App. 220. * These forests are renowned in song and story. Locate them on the map. 887-388] PASSIVE VOICE 135 bie geidjdftige SSefer unb bie 2Seid^feI) l^abert ^Inlofe gegeben 311 bem ©riinben t)on mdd)ttgen ©tdbten unb retaenben ®or= 30 fern. 3Si€le biefer ©tdbte finb fcE)on bor '^at)v^unhevten gegriin^ bet toorben unb finb beriil^Tnt megen ber ©rdfee i^rer Snbitftrie, ber ^radit ii^rer ©ebdube unb ber (Sigenart unb be§ 2Serte§ if)rer S^unft. 2)Qbon h)irb in einer fpdteren Seftion nod) gef)an= belt merben. 87 Strong Verbs to offer bteten bot geboten to sing befingen befang befungen to rise mporfteigcn ftieg empor emporgeftiegen to be found firf) befiiibeu befanb ficb \\6) befunbeu 'eil^tT' e^'9i^6^» ergog ergoffen Weak Verbs to admire benJUUberU to rustle raufc^en to calculate htV^(i)ntn to delight ent^iicfen to spread fic^ aii^breiteu, breitete to form bilben \id} au§, ficb au§gebreitet to cross biirc^freujen to separate treuiieil to found griinben EXERCISES 388 1. 33on tnem mirb 3)eutfd)Ianb oft befud)t? SSarum? 2. 9iennen ®ie einige^, toa§> barin gefunben tviibl 3. ^ejdjreiben ®ie bie £)berfldd)e be§ fionbe^! 4. SSa^ mirb tion ben ^ic^tem geton? 5. ^s[t ha^:^ fdjon lange getan tnorben? 6. 33cid)reiben Sie bie 3SdIber 8iibbeutfd)Ianb§! 7. 2S03U l^aben bie grofeen Strdme Slnlafe gegeben? 8. 2Ba§ tDirb on ben Stdbten geru()mt? 156 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [389-391 389 Translate: 1. Germany has been praised for its most interesting historical and natural phenomena. 2. Great di- vergence of climate is found in this little land, which is smaller than Texas. 3. The rugged charm of the northern lowlands has been sung by many poets. 4. We were charmed by the beauty of the forests with their rustling oaks and firs. 5. By the beautiful rivers will be found pretty villages and mighty cities. LESSON Ji2 WORD ORDER m 390 I. ®ie ^inber |oBcn ivXt%i bie 9?atfel geliift. II. 3utefet Jttbcn bie ^inber bie "^ii^tX geloft, III. ^og bie ^inber i\x\z%i bie 9fidtfel geloft §abcn. Note that in I. The clause is independent and begins with the subject. Normal Order. II. The clause is independent, but begins with an adjunct. Inverted Order. III. The clause is dependent. Transposed Order. 391 The verb (i. e., the inflected part of the verb) changes its position according as the sentence is dependent or inde- pendent, and in the latter case according as it begins with subject or not. I. If a sentence is an ordinary statement and stands by itself, there is no especial reason for emphasizing one word much more than another. Hence we say the order is normal and we mention first the subject, then the verb, then all the adjuncts. II. If, for the sake of emphasis, some part of a sentence outside of the subject is placed first (it may be an adverb or the object, or, indeed, an entire dependent clause), then the natural or normal order is disturbed, and attention is called 392-303] PASSIVE VOICE 157 to this phenomenon by an inversion of subject and predicate. This is an extremely frequent usage in German. The inverted order is also found in questions and commands. (SJe^en @ie? ^e^en @te! (^tWt>u? (SJe^e(bu)! III. The dependent clause is parenthetical in its nature, and in German is always set off by commas. A peculiarity of the German dependent clause is the position of the adjuncts, which are placed in between the subject and the verb, as if the adjuncts were to be thus protected and kept by themselves. The transposed order gives rise to a suspense of the idea, expressed in reading by a suspension of the voice. These main rules of order should be carefully studied since they are at the foundation of German construction. It must, however, be borne in mind that sentence structure can be best learned by constant observation of good German. 392 (S 1 1 f n i g SSer reitet fo fpdt burd) ^ad)t \mh SStnb? @g ift ber 3SQter mil feinem ^inh ; ©r 1)ai ben ^aben idoIjI in bem 5lrm, @r fofet il&n fid)er, ev ]f)dlt xf)n tnorm. 6 ,M^in SoEin, tt)Q^^ btrgft bu fo bong bein Oiefidjt?" — „©iel)ft 3Sater;^ bu ben (Jrlfonig nid^t? 25en ©rlenfonig mit ^ron' unb !Sd)tx)eif?" — „a^ein'©of)n, e§ ift €in S^ebelftreif." „®u liebeS ^'tnb, fomm, gel^ mit nur! JO @ar fd^one ©piele fpiel' i(^ mit bir; 393 ' tiJOg? = tiiarum? Cf. Latin quid. 2 flelft, S5ttter, bu— poetical arrangement for ^attx, fle^ft btt. 158 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [394 Tland) bimte 93Iumen finb on bem ©tranb; Wleine Wluttei 1:)at mand) giilben^ ©etoanb!" — „90^etn ^atet, mein SSaterl unb preft bit ntd)t, SBq^"* ©rienfonig mir leife t)erf:prid)t?" — 15 „(Set rul^tg, Bleibe ru!)tg, mein ^inb; Sn biirren 33Idttern foufelt ber SBinb!" — „3StIIft, feiner ^nobe, hu mit mir gel)n? 90?eine Xbdjtev foGen bid^ iDarten^ fd^on; ^e\m Zbd)tex fiil^reTt ben nadjtlidjen ^cilj'n 20 Unb tciegen nnb tonsen unb fingen bid) ein!"*^ — „90?ein SSater, mein Scoter! unb fte()ft bu nid)t bort ©rlfonigS ^od)ter om biiftern Ort?" — ,,a)^etn ®of)n, mein ©ot^n, xdj W e§ genou: (^^"^ fd^einen bie olten SSeiben fo grau." — 25 "Sd) lieBe bx^, mid) reigt beine fd)one ©eftolt; IXnb bifts bu nid)t tDillig, fo Brand)' id) (35etDaIt!" — „2^ein Scoter, mein Scoter, ie^t fafet er mid) on! ©rifonig 1:)at mir ein 2eib§^ getan!-' 394 ^ Qiiltien = golden — note poetical omission of inflectional syllable. * toaS — see App. 1 70. ^ biri^ ttiarten = wait upon you — a somewhat poetic use. Cf . tottttCtt + gen. App. 122. ^ ein— compounded with Uilegctt, tttttjCtt, ftttfiett in analogy with etnfli^Iafen (to fall asleep) i.e. they will rook you, dance to you and sing to you until you fall asleep. ^ e§ — introductory. Translate: It is the old willows that, etc. ^ ftift btt — inverted because in this conditional sentence, the con- junction menu is omitted. See App. 188 ^etn ficitig getan = has done me an injury. Cf. etttltti Jtt leitJ gCtan* ficibS is an old genitive form. 395-397] MSSIVE VOICE 159 ®em SSater groufet'S,!^ er rettet gefcf)tt)tnb ; 30 (gr fj'dlt in ben Slrmen ba§ dc^genbe ^inb, ©rrei(f)t ben §of mtt 2)?uf)' unb 9^ot; — Sn feinen STrmen ba§> ^inh — tear tot. 395 Weak Verbs to rustle faufetn to use brauci^en to rock h)iegen to groan dd^^eit to dance tansen to reach erreictjeu (cf . reidjen to charm, orovoke rei^en to reach for) 396 EXERCISES 1. 1. ^eben Sic bic SBortftcHung (sentence order) eincr icben Qeih an unb 3^re ^riinbe bafiir ! 2. SSerdnbern (change) Sie bk atoci le^ten S^i^f^n im erften 9Ser§ fo, ha^ bie SBortfteflung jnr ^ntierfion mirb. Tlad)en ®ie bie SBortfteEung in ber gnjeiten Qeih be§ britten SSerfeS gnr nor- malen; ond^ in ber tiicrten Qeih be§ t)ierten 3Serfeg, nnb in ber Stneiten S^ile be§ fiebenten ^ex\e^. 3. S5on toem tonrbe ber ^nobe fic^er gefafet unb getrogen? 28q§ ift Oon bem Slnoben gefe^en niorben? 3Son mem ift ber britte ^ex§> gefungen morben? 28q§ mirb bem ^naben t)on bem ®rlen= !dnig t)erf|:)rod^en?i^ 3Son toem inirb ber ndd)tlid^e Zan^ gefiil^rt iDerben? 3Sa§ h)irb fonft nod^ Oon ben ^oc^tern be§ ©rl!dnig§ getan tDerben? SSie tourbe ber SSoIb t)on bem SSoter ongefel^en unb toie t)on bem ©df)nd)en? SSoburd) njor ber (Srifonig gereiat morben? 2Bie ift ber §of bon il^nen erreid^t tcorben? 397 *°iiem Skater graufet eS— impersonal with dative. See App. 139. Related to eS gtaut Wir. Translate : The father shudders with dread. "The active form would be-^er ^rlenfiittig uer^irir^t bem ftnabcn ettoaS; tierfJireii^Ctt takes an indirect as well as a direct object. 160 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [398-399 II. Translate: 1. In the father's arms the little child was carried safely and firmly. 2. Why do you ride so rapidly through the gloomy forest? 3. Upon the old willows the fog appears gray. 4. Do you see my daughters in their golden robes by the shore? 5. In the father's arms the dead child was found. LESSON JfS TRANSPOSED ORDER 398 SSenn bcr grueling auf bic ^etgc ftetgt , SSettn ber grii^^Iitig auf bte ^erge ftetgt Unb im ©onnenftrolf)! ber ©d^nee gerfliegt,^ 3Benn bo^ erfte ©riin am 93aum \\6) getgt Unb im ©ro^ ha^ erfte Sliimlein f^rtefet,^ 5 SSenn t)orBei im %al 9^un mit einemmal^ 5lEe S^egenaeit unb SStnterqual, ©djallt es^ tjon ben ^ol)'n 33t§ 3um ^ale meit: 10 „£), tDte inunberfc^on Sft bte SruI)Itng§3€tt!" SBenn am ©letfd^er Iieife bte ©onne ledft, SSenn bte QueEe bon ben 33ergen f^ringt. 399 1 The ttjetttt belongs to both clauses. If it did not, what would be the order of the second? 2 tttttt wit ettteminal=all at once. 3 Observe that the inversion here is caused by the precedence of the dependent clauses. Note the same in ^rlfottig. 400 402] PASSIVE VOICE 161 15 400 5lIIe§ rtngg mit jungem @run fi(% becft"^ Unb bQ§ Suftgeton ber 2SdIber flingt, Siifte Itnb unb lau aSiirgt bte griine 5Iu Unb ber ^immel lad^t fo rein unb Blau, (SdjaUt e§> t)on ben ^ol^'n S3t§ 3um Sole tDeit: „0, tvie n)unberfc£)on Sft bie SruWing^aett!" »oiicttftci)t. to melt away jerfltegeu to sprout f prie^en to resound, *r' ^„„ ring tlmgen to resound, ring to lick fc^affen teden Strong Verbs aerflo^ !(ang Weak Verbs to cover to scent, perfume aerfToffen gefproffen geflungen berfen tDur^en 40 1 EXERCISE 1. 3Bq§ ift bte SSortfteEung in alien ©d^en, bte mit „n)enn" anfangen? SSarum? SSeil fie S^ebenfd^e finb. 2Ba§ ift bie £)rbnung be^ ^auptfa^e^, (principal clause) bem ein D^ebenfa^ t)orange]^t? ^ann man biefen §auptfo^ normal madden? SSie? ^un ©ie e§> fo oft aB mdglid^! Sefd)reiben ©ie einen @Ietf(f)er! 2So toerben ©letfc^er gefunben? 2Somit tuirb im 3^^iil&= ling aVie§> gebecft? ©d^reiben ©ie biefeS @ebid)t unb aurf) ben „@rI!onig" in ^rofa um! 402 *fl(!^ beift— one could say betiedt tiJtrb, but when agent is not mentioned, a reflexive verb or utlltt + active is more usual. 162 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [403-404 LESSON U CONJUNCTIONS 403 Coordinate (Followed by Normal Order) ( aber — copulative. ^^^ ■{ allein — adversative. ' jonbern — adversative after a negative statement, or ober and unb for beiut Subordinate (Followed by Transposed Order) until bi§ while tod^renb as, since ba because xotxi that txi"^ ( ttjenn* in order that bamtt when ( al§ whether ob If tpemi although obgteic^ after nac^bem as long as folange Adverbial Conjunctions (Followed by Transposed Order.) when? iDann? whence? tDo^er? why? marum? whither Ujo^in? wherefore? tDe§f)atb? with what? iDomit? how? ft)ie? for what? tDofiir? how much? njieDiet? in what? tporin? where? h)o? from what? tDorau§? ® i e gf rtcb 404 5tu§ Idngft bergangener 3eit toirb bie folgenbe @efd)i(f)te er3d]f)It. ©irtft tool^nte tm granfenlanbe etn tndd^tiger ^ontg, * tuenn is used to express present time or repeated action ; al& to express past time. 406] PASSIVE VOICE 163 namenS ©iegmunb, bem^ biele Sanbe^ untertan toaxen. 92un trurbe hem ^ontg ein ©ol^n geBoren, ber fid) \d)on al§ ^nabe 5 bitrd^ QufeergelDo^nli^en ^ut unb burd^ ^elbenftdrfe au^* seidfinete. 5ri§ (stegfrtcb, benn fo l^te^ er, noc^ ein bungling tvav, 3og er f(f)on in hie SSelt nad) 5IBenteuern au§. SSdl^renb er einft burd^ eitten finftern SSoIb 3og, in hem er bon Qllen 10 ©eiten t)on iDilben ^ieren, ©rod^en unb Hngetitnten he- hvofjt iDurbe, tvaxh er l^Io^Iid^ eine§ ntdc^tigen ©rod^en^ getoa^r, ber einen ^ii^a1§ ^utete. ©ofort ftUrste fic^ ©iegfrieb auf ha§> Ziex unb Balb tvax hex ©rod^e mit bem ©d^toert er- JdilogenS ha^ t)on bem ^elben felbft berfertigt morben tear, 15 unb ha^ t)on niemanb fonft getragen n)erben^ fonnte. 5IBer beim ^am^fe n^ar ha§> 2^radienblut iiber iJin gefloffen, unb n)o e§ il^n beriil^rt l)atte, tvax ex unt)ern)unbbar getuorben. ^TEein eine ©telle tear berfdiont geblieben;^ benn gJDifd^en bie- ©d^ultern tvax ilfim ein Sinbenblott gefaH^n, ha tvax bie ©telle 20 trodfen geblieben, tva§> it)m footer ha§^ Ceben foftete. 5(ber je^t mer!te er nid)t§ babon, fonbern aog frol^Iid^ tceiter, nadftbem er fid^ he§> ^d^ai^e^i^ bemod^tigt l)atte. villein er bemerfte gu feinem grofeen ©rftaunen, bofe il^m bie ^pxadje hex SSogel nun ^Id^Iid) tjerftdnblidf) getDorben tvax, benn ha§> ^rad^enblut 'f^aite 25 iljm biefe Tlad)t gcgcben. 405 ^ tiem— dat. with adj. Utttertatt. See App. 146. ^ 8ttttilC— the more poetical form for gdttlier. See bttS SBort, with its double plural, App. 26. ^ elttCg ^taii^m— genitive with adj. gcttltt^t. See App. 125. *ttiar Ctjii^lafiCtt = was killed. Is this a passive? See App. 219. ^ Note form of passive infinitive. See App. 79. ^ttJttt Hcrf(i^Ottt gclbUcBen = had been spared. bleiBett is often used where in English we use to he , to represent a stationary condition. Cf. ili^ Blctfie fie^en, I stand still, id^ Btcifie fl^cn, I keep my seat. ^ tie§ Sd^a^cS — gen. with reflexive verb. See App. 224. 164 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [406 Solgenbeg Sieb erga^It hie @ef(f)id)te bon feinem 5db(f)en; Hub lafe mic£) fel)en, £) fu(3C 9[y^utter, £)b trf) fann fliegen^ ^cf) mufe !)tnau§.2 SSie .^dgelein. £) lafe mid) fe!)en, 1 O lafe mic^ loufd^en, rtngc>um t)on einer lobcrnben 5euer= maucr umgeBen tvax. Tlan fonnte nid^t ijtnburd^.^ Obgletd) ha§> ?>euer fc^recfltd) gen §tmmel flammte, gab ©iegfrteb, bem 5urd)t iinbefannt tvat, fcinem 9^o6 bie ©porcn unb iDoUte fid] in bie Jlomme ftiir^en. ^llfcin foBalb er bie lobernbe S^onrme 10 berii^rte, fonf bicfelbe nieber, \o ba% ©iegfrieb ungel)inbert l^inburd^ reiten fonnte. 2Sor il)m lag nun bno gel)eimm§t>one ©c^tog, wovin feiue lebenbe ©eele an fein fdjien. 5IIIcin im Saal foUtc er fein fd^onfteg 5lbenteucr finbcn. 2)q lag, in ticfem ©c^Iaf, eine 15 rtnnberfd^one 2Raib, gang in ^^^an^er gepUt. ©iegfrieb toolltc fie genauer fcf)en unb biidte fid^ gu ir)r nieber, naljm it)t ben (Bdjilh unb loderte b€n '^^^anjer. ®r fonnte il^re 5tugen nidjt fel^en, ba fie feft gef(^Ioffen tDaren. ©o rief er: „2Sa(^e auf, bu l^errltd^e ^aib, unb blide mid) an!" 20 ®od& er fonnte fie fo nidjt meden, fie fd^Iicf 3u feft. 2)a fiifete er fie auf ben roten 90?unb unb fie mufete bie I^errlid^en 5rugen auffd)Iagen, unb burfte if)m i^ren ^amen fagcn. 42 I Strong Verbs to surround uiTtgeben umgab umgeben to sink finfen fan! gefiinfen to open (eyes) auffd)(agen fc^Uig ouf aufgefd)tagen Weak Verbs to flare lobem to loosen toderu to envelop i^uUeU to awaken \wdtn to bend fid^ budeu to kiss fuffeu 422 ^ tiarauf lo8=rode up to it. The adverb Io§ (literally loose) is used in many compounds to denote determined, sometimes violent action. 3 Supply fommctt- 172 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [423-426 423 EXERCISES I. 8e^en @ie bie obtge ^efd^td^te in ha^ $rdfen§ urn! II. @e^en (Ste ben erften Zdl btefer (^efc^i^te in ha§> ^mper* fe!t itm! III. ilberfe|en @ie: 1. He was to encounter a wonderful adventure in the proud old castle that stood in the dark forest. 2. He had to ride through a flaming wall of fire before he could reach the beautiful maiden. 3. The brave youth wanted to see her face, but she was completely covered by her armor. 4. He may loosen the armor and kiss her red mouth. 5. He is destined to awaken her, if he will. 6. She cannot tell him her name, but must love the man who can ride through the fire. LESSON 4-8 PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT OF MODAL AUXILIARIES 424 The perfect tenses of the modal auxiliaries are formed by means of the tense auxiliary ^abtn and the perf . part, of the modal. If no infinitive complement follows, this participle is the ordinary weak form. With an infinitive complement, however, the old strong perfect participle is used. This has no augment and is identical in form with the infinitive. Hence we have : t^ ^abe ha^ gcfonnt t^ ^abe ha§> inn fotttten tc^ ^aU ha§> gcmoi^t ic§ ^aht ha^ inn miigctt v bn f)aft ba§ gcmup bu 1^a\i \)a^ inn muffcn < er ^at ba§ gcbutft er ^at ha^ inn tiurfcn tvit ^aben ha^ gettiollt n)tr ^aben ha^ inn toaUtn it}v 1)aU ha^ gcfottt i^r 1)aU 'i)a^ inn fottcn 425 S i c 9 f r i c b 9^un ^at fie i;^m erga^Ien muffen, tner fie tvai unb tnie fie in biefe Sage {)atte fontmen fonnen.^ 426 ^ Note that in transposed order, the tense auxiliary is placed just before the two complements, instead of, as usual, at the very end. 427-428] MODAL AUXILIARIES 173 ,,'^dj l^eifee 33runl)ilb, unb bin fruiter eine SSalfiire geiDefen. 9P^it meinen ©dimeftern f^aht ic^ burd) bie Siifte^ fol^ren 5 biirfen, unb ^ahe ben ta^feren §elben anf ben ®d}lac^tfelbern r)elfen biirfen. SScnn fie aber fielen, I)abe id) il)re ©eelen bon hen ©djiadjtfelbern I)oIen-unb fie nac§ SBal^oUa,^ tDO bie ©otter iDo^nen, bringen miiffen. 2)a follte id) einmol eincn ta^fercn ^elben I)oIen, aber id} 10 l^abe nid)t getoollt, benn er tvav mir gu lieb. S<^ ftt^be i!)n nic^t tDoHen fterben laffen, fo l^abe id) il^m gel^olfen, gegen ben SSillen SBobon?^. 5lber ben ©ottern^ barf man nid^t tro^en, fie fonnen fid^ furd^tbar rad^en. SSoban I)at nid)t getDoEt, bofe jener §elb 15 Icben follte, fo l)at er i^n felbft gctbtet unb mid) I)at er furd^tbar geftraft. 3a!)r]^unbert€S I)abe id) fd)lafen miiffen, n)d!)renb meine ©d^tceftern mit ben SSoIfen reiten burften, unb einem 2Renfd^en mufe idf) nun angel^bren, id), Ue ftolse SSalfiire! 2)odb €ine ©unft l^at mir ber 5lEt)ater gen)al)rt. ^d) l^abe 20 feinem (Sd^n)ad)Iing angepren mbgen, fonbern nur bem ftdrf» ften ber 90^dnner, unb biefer ftdrf fte bift hu ; brum ^aft bu mm hie S3runt)ilb meden burfen, ©iegfrieb, §errlid)fter ber 90^en- fd)en!" 427 Weak Verbs ' to belong to aitgel^oren to punish ftrafen to defy tro^en to grant gett)dt)ren 428 ^ Note plural form of bie Sttft, not easily translated. One might say, through the clouds. ^ 28 ttl^ttff a— according to Germanic mythology, the abode of the gods, where they meet for drinking bouts after days of happy hunting, and whither heroes that die on the field of battle are brought by the Valkyries. *bCtt ©ottcttt— dative with tro^eit. Cf. App. 138 ^ 3tt|r|tmJJCrte— ace. of duration of time. 174 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [429-431 429 EXERCISES I. (Se^en etnmal, ha^ bte ^^Jrinaeffin ctnen ^raum t)aite, ber i^r md)t au§> hem ^opf tDoIIte.^ ®en mufetc fie t!)rer SO^utter ergafjlen. „5m ^raume l^atte ic^ einen tDunberfd^iJnen galfen, ber mtr fel^r, fel^r lieb tt)ar. ^d) troEte i!)n immer bel^alten, bod} 5rt)et 10 ^Tore fomen unb loteten il)n bor meinen Sfugen. 2)q§ tat mir furd^tbar tDe!)!""* Sa fagte i^re 9??utter: „S)er ^raum Bebentet, bofe bu einen 9titter lieben mirft unb tl^n bein gan^e^ 2eBen^ tuirft Bei bir Bel)alten n)oIIen. Stud) tDirft bu iDieber t)on i^m geliebt. 5lber belfialten iDirft bu il)n nid^t fonncn, 15 benn er tuirb auf SIbcnteuer ouSgel^en tooVien. ©djlimme geinbe nierben il^n ergreifen, unb bu trirft il^n t)€rlieren miiffen." Sie Swngfrau aBer fpradj: „@]^€ mir foldf) ein Seib gefd^e^en foE, toerbe id^ niemals lieben!" ,,'^a", fagte bie toeife grau Ute, bie SO^utter ber Jungfrau, „o5 bu triEft ober 20 uid)t, tuenn bie 3eit fommt, luirft bu fd^on lieben miiffen, ba§> tcirft bu nid^t t)crf)inbern fonnen!" llnb fo fam €§ oud). 2;enn ©iegfrieb, ber bie fd)one S3run!)itb t^erlaffen l)atte, um meftr 5Ibenteuer 3u fuc^en, !am nad^ 2Borm§. 433 ^ SttrftUttiJerltttlbe = land of the Burgundians. '^ Jtt 33orm§ — observe the use of the preposition. ^ tiiotttc— supply ge^Ctt. See App. 230. * iia§ tttt mir tiie^ = that hurt me. ^ What accusative construction is this? See App. 169. 176 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [434-436 Srau Ute Itefe tftn einen Saubevtvani trinfen,^ ben fie t)on 25 einer Wlaqh l^atte Brauen laffen^. S)kfer mad)te, bafe feine erfte SieBe t)on tlim tjergejfen tDerben mufete. 2!ann fal^ er ^rieml)ilb. ©te l^at bon il^m gelteBt trerben biirfen. STBer bef)alten tvhb fie il^n nid)t fonnen; benn er tDirb t)on il^ren eioenen Sriibern getotet tuerben. 434 to happen gefd)e!f)en to keep bel^alteu to leave terlaffcu to mean BebeuteU Strong Verbs gefdia!) bef)iett uerlie^ Weak Verbs to hinder gefc^e^en bef)atten tertaffeu t)eri)inberu 435 EXERCISES I.'*' 1. S!Ba§ tr)irb ^riemftilb mcf)t tun iDoEen? SSarum nid)t? 2. SStrb fie e§ t)er!)inbern fonnen? SSer fagt boS? 3. 2Sa^ n^irb ^rieml&ilb berlteren miiffen? SSie? SSa§ tDirb iI)nT gef(f)e!)en? 4. SKtrb fie il)ren treuen Skitter bel^alten biirfen? 5. SSie tt)irb e§ if)m ergel)en? 6. ^on tDem foH ©iegfrieb getotet merben? 7. SBoburd^ l^at 33run]&ilb bergeffen trerben fonnen? II. Trmislate: 1. Siegfried will have to forget his first love. 2. He will be allowed to marry the beautiful Kriemhild. 3. But he will be killed by her three brothers, who are the eagles of whom (ttJObon) Kriemhild dreamed. 4. Brunhild will be forgotten by her lover. 5. Kriemhild will not be able to keep her lover. 436 ^ Itefe i^tt trittfen = had him drink. ^ Itttte irauetl laffen = had brewed. Observe difference in the two constructions just noted. In the second, the braum has a passive meaning. See App. 248. 437-438] MODAL AUXILIARIES 177 LESSON 50 437 GRAMMAR REVIEW 1. The six modal auxiliaries are preterite-presents, i. e., the present forms are lost and are replaced by the old preterites which retain the strong preterite endings. New preterites and participles are formed on the infinitive stems in analogy with the weak conjugation. For full inflection, see App. 81. 2. The perfect tenses have two forms according as the auxiliary is used with or without an infinitive complement. See App. 82. 3. SlBiffcn is a preterite-present, but cannot omit the sign of the infinitive. See App. 83. 4. Saffcn is not a preterite-present, but takes the same construction as the modal auxiliaries and has an idiomatic pas- sive meaning. See App. 84. 5. The modal auxiliaries may have a passive infinitive complement, which is composed of the perfect participle of the verb and tUCtben. 438 REVIEW EXERCISES I. Translate: 1. The mother of the princess had a potion brewed. 2. She will let the young knight drink it. 3. Brun- hild will have to be forgotten by her lover because of this potion. 4. The brave valkyrie cannot ride through the clouds with her sisters. 5. She must lie asleep for centuries until the bravest of the knights can release her. 6. She had wanted to disobey the father of gods and men. 7. One may not defy the gods; they can punish dreadfully. 8. Siegfried was destined •to awaken the most beautiful maiden with a kiss. 9. He was destined to be killed by her brothers. 10. They were per- mitted to kill him. II. Relate the last story in the preterite and perfect tenses. 178 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [439-440 CHAPTER IX THE SUBJUNCTIVE LESSON 51 PRESENT THIRD PERSON SINGULAR Indirect Discourse 439 The subjunctive is used in German to express not a fact but a supposition. This supposition may be based on fact or not, but if the speaker implies the slightest shade of doubt or indirection as existing either in his own or another's mind, the subjunctive is used. The most frequent use of the subjunctive is in indirect discourse. Fact— Indie Supposition— Subj. er 9cjt fie glaubt, \>a!^ er ge^c er ijl \)a fie fagte, 'lia^ er \>a fci er fatt gel)en fie bac£)te, er foUc ge^en* er ttiirb gef)en fie ^atte ge^offt, er luerbc ge^en er ^ttt eg fie f)atte geglaubt, \ia^ er e§ {)abc 440 ^ic Sonne nnb bcr SStnb ©inft ftritten fid^ bie ©onne unb ber SBinb, tner )dox\ ilinen am ftdcfften fei. ©ie famen iiberein, berjenige^ foUe bafiir gelten,2 ber einen SSonberer am erften nottge, ben 90^antcl abgulegen. 5 S)er SStnb bad^te, er moUe red^t ftiirmen, bann tocrbe ber *The indirect clause may be introduced by tio|| (transposed order) or may be without any conjunction (normal order). ' iierienlfie— see App. 35, 107. '^ Translate : That he should be accounted (the stronger). 441-442] THE SUBJUNCTIVE 179 dJlann fd)on \\a6f fetnem SSiEen tun. 2)0(^ al§> er fo ftiirmte unb bites, xneinte ber Wann nur, ba^ q§> bod] red^t fait fei unb bofe er feinen 'Mantel nur immer fefter umtun tDoEe. ©r flagte, e§ friere i^n fo fel)r,unb ber Xaq fd^eine immer* falter gu mer= 10 ben. ^abei gog er hen SO^antel immer fefter an. 9Zun bad-jte hie ©onne, e§> fei bie dleilje an ilir,^ aber fie moUe e» gan3 anberg mac^en. 9D^it milber unb fanfter (Slut liefe fie il^re ©tralilcn ^erabfaHen. .^immel unb ©rbe murben l^eiter unb aUe§> meinte, ha§> SSetter mad]e fid) ja gang I)errlid)^ 15 unb ber ^ag fei gar nid}i fo itbel. ®er SBanberer glaubte, fein 9J?anteI fei il^m moI)I 3U marm, er nel)me il^n leii^ter auf ben ?Irm. ©r nal)m il)n ah unb erquidte fid] in bem (2d)atten eineg 33aume§, inbeffen fid^ hie ©onne freute, bei bem (Seban= fen, ha^ fie mit i(}rer Tlilhe mef)v ^raft jeige aU hex 3Sinb mit 23 feinem ©etofe. 441 Strong Verbs to quarrel fid) ftreiten ftritt fi^ fic^ geftritten to agree iibereinfommen !am iiberein iibereingefomnten to be worth gelten gait gegotten to blow blafeii btie§ geblafen to wrap around umtun tat urn umgetan to freeze frieren fror gefroren Weak Verbs to compel notigen to think nteinen to take off ablegcn to refresh oneself fid) er(^uideu to storm ftiirnteu 2 ^^idiS^feinem SSitlcnV according to his desire. Mmmcrtttltcr JU ttJCriJcn = to be getting colder all the time. 442 ^ ^ . Note that the adverb immer gives the idea of the progressive tense. ^ C§ t^t = it was his turn. ^iia§ SBetter l^crtU^ = the weather was turning out beautifully 180 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [443-444 443 EXERCISES I. ©e^en ©ie Me oBtge @efd)id)te in bte bireftc dtehe urn! S3eif]3iele: (?irtft ftrttten ficft hie ©onne imb ber SSinb: „3Ser bon «n0 ift am ftarffi^n?" ©ie fometi iiberein: ^^erjentge foU bafiir gelten, ber u. f. ro." II. ©e^en ©te folgenbe 9^eben in bte inbircfte D^lebe nm: ,Manm ^at ber ^lann nnr feinen S^lantcl fo feft um?'' „©§ ift entf€^Ii(^ fait, idj tniH meinen 90?antel fefter umtun, e§ friert mid& fo fel^r, ba% id) mtr gar nic^t mel)r I)elfcn fann!" „S<^ "^'^^^ e^ gan3 anber^ madden, ber 90^ann mufc jetnen 9JtanteI abtun, ob er tnill ober nid)t/' „^d) tuiH ein (Sdjtuert I^aben, fo gut unb ftarf, trie anbere D^itter, bann gel)e ic^ auf ^Ibcnteuer au§." „^annft* bu mir eine Qai^l nennen? ^dj tvifl fie auf bie ^afel fdjreiben." III. Write the following verbs in third person sing, indie, and subj. Remember that the subjunctive is always formed on the infinitive stem. geben ne^tnen faUen tragen laufen ^ahtn fein tperben fiif)Ien ge^en ftef)en tun benfen tuiffen raffeu moUen foHen fonnen mogen leruen LESSON 52 PRESENT AND PRETERITE Indirect Discourse The personal ending of the third singular we saw differed in the subjunctive (c) and the indicative (i). In the first and usually the second singular and in all the plurals the endings * The indirect question will be introduced by the conjunction ol^ (whether). This takes the transposed order. 445] THE SUBJUNCTIVE 181 of the subjunctive are identical with those of the indicative (c, jl, en, ti,^n). Hence we have: Indicative Subjunctive ic§ ge^e ic^ ge^e \)n ge^ft bu ge^eft er gc^t er gc^c tt)ir gefien toil ge^en t^r ge^t if)v gef)et fie getien fie ge^ien Notice that only one form shows the difference between the modes. The so-called thematic vowel c, in the second person singular and plural is too unemphatic to be heard distinctly though it appears to the eye. Spoken language distinguishes the subjunctive from the indicative by using the preterite subjunctive for the present wherever the subjunctive forms are not distinct from the indicative. In actual usage the paradigm of the present sub- junctive reads : i(^ gtngc instead of ic^ ge^e bu gingcfl " '' 't>n geljeft er ge^e tviv gingen *' " wix ge^en i^r gtnget *' " i^r ge^et fie gingen *' "fie gef)en 445 This shifting has resulted in a weakening of the feeling of time difference between present and preterite tenses in the subjunctive, so that they are used interchangeably without difference of meaning. Observe that there is no such thing as sequence of tenses in German. The tense of the quoted sen- tence has nothing to do with that of the leading verb. It is 182 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [446 simply a question of the tense of the action at the time it was described. Thus the speakers in the last story all used the present indicative at the time of utterance. In quoting them the pres- ent subjunctive was employed. It would be equally correct to substitute the preterite subjunctive in every case, as has been done below; 446 ^ic Sonne unb bcr 2Binb (Jtnft ftrilten fid) ^ie ©onne unb ber SSinb, toer tion i^mw am fldrfften tndre (fet). ex \o ftikmte unb blte§, metnte ber Wlann nur, bofe e§ hod) red^t !alt tDdre (fet) unb ha^ er feinen 30^antel nur tmmer fefter umtun inoUte (tcolle). ®r flagte, e§ frdre (friere) il^n jo fel^r, unb ber Xaq fc^iene (fd)etne) tmmer 10 fdlter 3u merben. ®abei gog er ben 30^antel tmmer fefter an. 9^un bod^te bie ©onne, e§ Jndre (fet) hk diei^e an ii)v, aber fie moUte (moGe) e§> gona onberS moc^en. SO^tt mtlber unb fanfter ^lut liefe fie ii)xe ©traf)Ien l^erabfallen. ^immel unb (Srbe murben l^etter unb aGe§ metnte, ha§> SSetter mad^te t5 (mad^e) fid£) ja gans l^errlid) unb ber ^og mdre (fet) gar ntd)t fo fd^Itmm. 2)er 2Banberer glaubte," fetn Tlanid mdre (fei) tl^m lno!)I 3u marm, er natjxm (ne!)me) t^n letd^ter auf ben STrm. ©r nalfim il)n ah unb erqutdfte fid^ in bem ^d)aiicn etne§ 33aume§, tnbem fid) bte ©onne freute, bet bem ©ebanfen, baf^ 20 fie mit tftrer S0?ilbe mel^r ^raft aetgte (setge) ai§> ber SStnb mtt feinem ©etofe. 447-448] THE SUBJUNCTIVE 183 447 PRETERITE (3rd Sing.) Strong Verbs Subjunctive ] [ndicative todre irar tate tat frore fror jc^iene fc^ien na^me nat)m Weak Verbs fottte joate uottgte notigte tDodte troUte ma(^tc mad)te aeigte aeigte The preterite subjunctive of strong verbs is formed on the preterite indicative by the addition of c and the umlaut when the stem-vowel permits it. The preterite subjunctive of weak verbs does not differ from the preterite indicative. For a slight exception, see App. 81. 448 EXERCISES I. Sc^reiBen @ie bie @aje auf 8eite 180 nun ntit bent ^on* junttit) 3m))erfe!t anftatt be§ ^rdfen§ au§! II. Write the paradigms of the present and preterite sub- junctive of the following verbs: fein ^aben rtierben tDoHen fotlen fonnen ntogen fallen lieben taffen ge^en bleiben III. Translate: 1. The sun said that it took (bauern) 24 hours to ride around the world. 2. The children told the wood- nymphs that they could guess the riddles. 3. The teacher asked the children whether they did not know (fonnen) the multiplication table. 4. The little girl asked her mother 184 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [449-460 whether she might go out into the green fields. 5. She said she could not stay in the house. 6. We want to know whether 'we may not listen to the birds. 7. The little stars wanted to know whether they might not go with the sun. 8. But the sun told them that they should go with the mild moon. 9. The wanderer thought his cloak was too warm. LESSON 53 PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE Indirect Discourse 449 The perfect tense is formed by the present tense of l^aben or f ein + perfect participle, the pluperfect by the preterite of l^aBcn or f cin + perfect participle. The rule for the substi- tution of preterite forms for present forms learned in the last lesson applies to the pluperfect forms and perfect forms also. But in use, they are not differentiated and both tenses are used indiscriminately for indirect quotation in past tense. See App. 184. Hence we have : ic§ ^citte getan instead of \6:} ^aBe getan bu f)abeft getau^ er ^n^aht getan lt)ir fatten getan instead of Xoxx ^aben " ii)r t)dttet getan " i^r \)CiUi " fie tjdtten " fie l^aben " Perfect \6) fei gelt)efen^ tt)ir feien getoefen bu feieft getoefen ' t^r feiet gemefen er fei getuefen fie feien gemefen 450 ^ Because btt ^ttft is irregular. 2 Since the subjunctive and indicative forms in this tense are not identical, no substitution is necessary. See App. 62. 461-452 J THE SUBJUNCTIVE 186 Pluperfect tc^ tDcire getDefen bu tDdret getoefen er tudre geti:)efen i geBen^ Sm gangen 3«9 unb ^rofe.^ ^ Unb al§ e§ tuollte^ fterBen, Sa blidt' e§ mid^ nod^ an, STB fprad^'S mit feincn Tliemn: „^Qnn^ bir nid^t tuciter bienen; 5(be,^ mein Sf^eitergmann!" 452 ^ fann e§ gcBcn = can there be. ^ 3ttg Wttil Xrofe = in the whole camp. ^ttJOttte ftcrbCtt = was about to die. See App. 245. * fdtttl — note poetic omission of personal pronoun. 5 nlje = adieu, farewell (popularized French adieu). 186 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [46B-466 ®a Qvnb W§> el^rltd) ein SSol^I unter griinen Tlaiten Sn eineg fitnbbQum§ ©c^otten; 15 ®Q§ joE fein 2)enfmal fein. 20 453 ^a ft^en bie fletrten 356gel Hnb l^alten bog ^oknamt 3^^ Braudf)t nid^t erft gu lefen, 2Sie treu nteirt 9^o6 getoefen^ ; ©ie fingen'^ inSgefamt. Hoffmann tion ^alUx^Uhm, Verbs to bury eiitgrabeu ^ to serve bieneii (?^)« grub ein eingegraben 454 In indirect discourse the poem would be told as follows : 1. 'l!cr 9?eiter erjciljlt, er I)Qbe (I^dtte) fein apfelgroueg dio^ t)cr= loren; e§ fei (tcdre) fo treu im Qeben getnefen; fein treuere^^ fonne (fonnte) e§> geben im ganaen 3^tg unb ^rofc. 2. Hnb al§ e» l^abe (^atte) fterbcn tnollen, ha I)abe (f)Qtte) e§ i^n no(^ einmol angeblidtt, unb Ijabe (I)Qtt€) mit feinen SD^ienen gef^rod^en, bofe e§ il^m nid^t tneiter bienen fonne (fonnte). 3. Hnb qB eg geftorben tDore, l^abe (f)atte) er e§ el)rlid) unter griinen 90^atten in eine§ CinbbaumeS ©(fatten eingcgraben; ba§> foEe (foEte) fein S)cnfmal fein. 455 ^ Note incorrect order for the sake of the meter. ^ gClDCJeit (timt) — often in dependent construction the auxiliary is understood. 466-458] THE SUBJUNCTIVE 187 4. 2)a fdfeen^ bte fleinen 3SogeI unb f)telten ba§ ^otenamt. 2Str Brau(f)ten ni(f)t erft 311 lefen, tnte treu feln ^ofe gett)efen fei (irdre); fie fdttgen e§ tnSgefamt. 456 EXERCISES I. Change Brunhild's narrative (page 173) to indirect dis- course. II. Write the present, preterite, perfect, and pluperfect paradigms of the following verbs : ^olen rufen ge^en fo(gen fingen laiifen fein hperben fageit lieben lefen laffen toiffen mijgeu biirfen joHen njolleu LESSON 6J^ SUBJUNCTIVE FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT Indirect Discourse 457 Fact Supposition ©r toirb fommen. 2)er 9Jlann fogt, 'tio,^ er fommcn tocrbc. @r ttiirb bi^ baf)in gcfommen @te meinte, bi§ batiiu tucrbc er fein. gefommcn fcin. ®u toirfl fc^cn. ®r fiir^tet, bit tncrbeft e§ fc^cn. 9ldc^fte§ Sa^r ttjirft bu e§ gcs @r t)erfpri^t bir, bag bu e§ ndd)= fc^cn ^aBcn. fte§ Sa^r gcfc^cn ^aficn ttJcrs bcft. We have seen that the present subjunctive is inter- changeable with the preterite, and the perfect with the plu- perfect. Likewise in the future subjunctive for tuctbe + inf. 458 ^ fiiffett— could not be ji^en because of identity with indicative ; so also ^icitm, ftrttttd^ten, fangcn. 188 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [459-461 we may substitute tourbc + inf. , which makes the form iden- tical that of the conditional mode. Fut. Subj. er lt)erbe ge()en Fut. Perf. Subj. er tuerbe gegaugeu fein I. Conditional er tourbc gel^en II. Conditional er ttiurbc gegangen fein 459 Indicative t(^ tvexhe geften hu tnirft gel)en er tntrb gel^en intr tnerbcn ge^cn i^r tmxhet gefjen fie tcerben gelfien td& tnerbe gegongen hu tDtrft er tnirb tntr tnerben „ i^r tnerbet „ fie tnerben „ PARADIGM Future Subjunctive tc^ tniirbe geften (tnerbe) ^ bit merbeft gelien er raerbe ge(}cn inir miirben gcI^en (tnerben) iftr miirbct gel)en (roerbet) fie tniirben gc^en (tucrbcn) Future Perfect fein id) tviivbc gegongen fein (tnerbe) bit tncrbeft gegangen fein er tnerbe gegangen fein tnir tniirben gegongen fein (tnerben) il^r tnilrbet gegongen fein (tnerbct) fie tniirben gegangen fein (tnerben) 460 ^cr Srfjafcr itnb bcr GJoIbfj^tnteb ©in ©d^dfer frogt einen ©olbfd^mieb, tnie t^iel tnoljl ein fo unb fo grower ^lum^en @oIbe§i tnert fei. 2)er Oolbfc^mieb ^offte, ber ©deafer l^otte einen fold^en ^lum^en gefnnben nnb 46 I ^ettt ^Ium))en @olbc§ — it is more usual to employ a noun in apposition, i.e. eltt tlumjiett ®olil. 462-464] THE SUBJUNCTIVE 189 tvexhe (jDiirbe) il^n sum 35er!auf Bringen. ^e^l^alB Betoirtete 5 er il)n ^rddjttg, urn i^n gefc^meiMg 3u mac^cn, benn er bad)te: „2)er bumme ^erl bcnft getDiB, tc^ toiirbe il^m etne grofee ©umme bofiir Bieten, tcenn trf) if)n obex gefd^metbtg madje, fo ift er auc^ mtt tDenig sufriebenr' ©r bot ilf)m olfo bon fetnem Beften 3Bein, in ber ^offnung, ha% fie gu etnem guten (£int)er= 10 ftattbni^ fommen tDurben.^ ©nblicf), qB er badjte, bofe ber Sauer nun ntcf)t mei)v fo flor int ^opf tcare, fragte er il^n, tDo er benn ben ^Ium|)en gefunben l^aBe. 2Sie grofe tear aBer feine ©nttaufc^ung, aB ber ^auer erfldrk, er l^aBe Bi§ je^ no(f) feinen gefunben; foBalb er oBer einen gefunben l^aBen 15 toerbe, tDiirbe^ er il^n bem lieBen^tourbigen @oIbfd)mieb Bringcn. 462 Verbs to offer bieten Bot geBoten to hope l^offen (w) to treat, entertain Bett)irten (w) to explain, declare txUaVtn (w) 463 EXERCISES I. Translate: 1. I thought you would offer me a large sum of money. 2. We promised that we should have the work done when you came. 3. They wanted to know (tDtffen) whether you would come or not. 4. The charming goldsmith thought that the foolish fellow would become pliable after a while (hk SBeite). 5. The fellow was not so foolish as the goldsmith thought that he would be. 464 ^ Could ttiettien be used here? ^ Note that here, where the same form of the verb occurs in two places so closely adjacent repetition is avoided by using the future perfect in one instance and the conditional in the next. They might have been interchanged without affecting the sense. 190 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [465 II. Put into indirect discourse (with and without ba§) : ©r fogte: liefer Wann I)at einen grofeen Sllum^en ®olh gefunben. ©r tDufete nid)t, 1dq5 er bomit mad)en foUte. ©r l^at i^n mir gebrad)t, um 3U fel)en mie t)iel er bafiir be!om= men fonnte. ^d} l^atte aber fd^on t)on ber gansen ©efc^tdjte ge!)ort. ©r tDirb nad) einer SSeile fc!)on gefdimeibig tuerben, "bann trerbc ic^ il^m etne fletne (aumme bieten. SSenn id} tl^m bie ©umme ttierbe gebotcn b^ben, tt)trb er fcbr frob fein. III. Change t!ie poem „®a§ treue ^o^" to future in direct discourse; then to future in indirect discourse. LESSOR 55 SUBJUNCTIVE PASSIVE Indirect Discourse 465 The use of the passive construction in indirect discourse does not differ in principle from the active. Past Future Fat. Perf. iNDic. Pass. Present er tDtrb gefd^tagcn SuBj. Pass. toerbe er er tDurbe gefc^lagen er ift gejdilagen h)orben er er XQdx gefd)tagen tporben er rt)trb gefd^lagen tuer- er ben er hJtrb gefd£)lagen ttJor- er -< or ben fein ( ^iirbe ) jein gef^tagen gefd^tagen n)orben gefd^lagen merben gefd^lagen tnorben 466-467] THE SUBJUNCTIVE 191 466 ^a^ mtoljknc ^^fcrb ©in ^auer ergdl^Ite einem greunbe, bafe i^nx^ t)or etner SBodje^ ein ^^'ferb am^ bcm ©taEc gefto!)tnt iDorben fci. ©r befc^rieb ba§ ^^Sferb genau. Sa fogte ber greunb, er f)abe em foId^eS 9^o6,^ gona geiiQu n)ie e§ ber ^auer befdjrieben l^dtte, 5 benfelben SDZorgcn ouf bem Qol^rmarft in ber ndc^ften ©tabt gefe]f)en; e§ fei i3on einem Sremben gum 3Ser!Quf angeboten tDorben. S)er 33auer fc^tuong fid^ auf ein onbereS ^ferb unb eilte nocf) ber (Staht 9?i(^tig, auf bem 9Kar!tpIa^ fal^ er, tDte fein 10 ^ferb 3um SSerfauf angeboten tourbe. ©r eilte l^t^rbei unb erfldrte, ba^ ha§> fein ^ferb fei unb ba^ e§> xf)m bor einer 3Sod)e gefto^Ien niorben nidre. ®er SP^ann, ber ba§ $ferb ber- faufen tnoEte, erfldrte, bafs ein S^^^twnt borliegen miiffe, benn er I)abe ba§> ^ferb fd)on jtDei S^ifire. SDamaB fei e§ il^m bon 15 feinem 33ruber berfauft tDorben. SDa fagte ber 33auer: „9^un, n)enn ©ucf)^ ba§ ^^ferb bor ginei So^^^^n berfauft tvovben ift, unb Sft^^ c§ fd)on fo lange 6abt, fo miiBt '^^x and) iDiffen, auf toeld&em Sluge e§ blinb ift." "^abei I^ielt er bem ^^iferbe beibe 5lugen gu. Ser SO^ann fagte 20 fc^nelt: „5tuf bem redjtcn 5ruge!" Soc^ aB b€r Sauer Iad)te, moUte er fid) berbeffern unb rief fd)nell: „9^ein, id) I)abe micft geirrt, auf bem linfcn 5tuge ift e§ blinb I" S)a 3og ber 93aucr bie §anb l^erunter unb aHe Seute fonnten fel)cn, ba^ ba§> $ferb auf feinem 5luge blinb mar. 9tun mar e§> erfidjtiid), ba^ bev 33auer 25 t)on bem 93?anne beftoftlcn morben mar. S)er 33auer erjdljlte bann feinem greunbe, ba% ber SO^ann bor alien Seuten iiberful^rt unb berliaftet morben fei. 467 1 t^m— dat. of interest. ^ UOt eittcr SBor^C = a week ago. 3 Cttt fot(^c8 ^oii = such a liorse. * ©ad^ — note use of ^f^x and (^u^ instead of Ste. This is usual in country districts. 192 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [468-470 468 Strong Verbs to offer anbieten bot an angeboten * to vault fic^ f c^tt)tngen fd^tuang ftc^ fic^ gefc^tDungen to hold shut gu^lten i)iett gu guge^atteu Weak Verbs to declare erflareit to expose iiberfu^reit to err fid^ trrcu to arrest tjetl^aften 469 EXERCISES I. Change all direct discourse in the above story to indirect and all the indirect discourse to the direct. II. Translate: 1. The former said that the horse had been seen at the fair. 2. The friend told how the horse was stolen from the farmer. 3. The people did not believe that the large horse had been sold to the man by his brother. 4. The man declares that the horse will be sold to the farmer. 5. The farmer believes that the man is exposed and arrested. III. 1. ^(^reiBen ®te an^ toa^ bem gremben bort bem S3auer ersd^ilt ttiurbe! 2. 2So tourbe ha^ ^f^rb gefunben? SSeldje ©rflctrurtg \\i bon bem gremben gegeben inorben? 3. SSq§ ]^at ber 33Quer feinem greunb eraol^Ien fonnen, qB er l&eim fatn? LESSON 56 IDEAL CONDITION 470 In the previous lessons on the subjunctive we treated of Indirect Discourse, in which the subjunctive was used to repre- present a thought or feeling without any reference to the actuality of the fact. There was nothing in the form of the verb to tell whether the quoted statement was based on fact or not. We observed further that, as the result of shifting the preterite to take the place of present forms, the time sense of 471-472] THE SUBJUNCTIVE 193 the tenses had become weak and we no longer recognized any distinction in time or meaning between the present sub- junctive and the preterite; the perfect and the pluperfect; the future and the conditional. In the use of the subjunctive now to be studied only the preterite and the pluperfect tenses are used. They express a condition contrary to fact ; the preterite expresses such a con- dition in present or future time ; the pluperfect in past time. Present SSeitu e§ Mt txidvt, giugc 16) tn§ $au§ Past SSenn e§ fall gettiefen ttiiirc, toiirc i(S) in§ §au§ gcgangcn ; 47 I ^er glug bcr £ieBc SBenn ic^ etn SSi3gIein tvat\^ Unb Quc^ glnei gliiglein l&dtl', Slog' id) 3U bir; 28€tl €§ abet ntd)t fann fetn,^ meiV icE) QE^ier. fBin t(f) glei(^3 ^^i^ j^jjj^ 5^^. 4 S3in id) boc^ tm ^raum Bei bir, Unb reb* mit bit; 9Senn td^ ertnac^en tu', S3in id) oHetn @g t)erge]E)t fetne ©tunb' in ber 'iflaiijt, I 2)a mein ^erge ntc^t ertt)ad)t, Itnb on bid^ gebenft, ®q6 bu tnir biel taufenbmal SDein ^erg gefdienft.^ 472 ^ tiJiir', fliJg'— poetic omission of e. 2 f anti feitt— poetic for fcitt fann. 3 glcir^ (oftglei^) = although I am. * Note the indicative in real condition throughout this stanza. See App. 189. Note also the inverted order caused by the omission of mentt. App. 188. 194 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [473-476 473 Verbs to fly piegen flog geflogen to awake ertDa(i)en (iv) 474 EXERCISES I. ©e^en ©te obigeg Oebid)t in ^rofo um! II. SSag ift hex Unterfd^teb atDtfdjcn ber 33ebingung im erften unb ber tm smeitcn 2Ser§? III. ©rad^Icn ©te bte^ ©ebic^t in inbirefter 9^ebe, foIgenber= mofeen: ©in Tlann fingt feiner ©eliebten Dor: 2Benn er ein 3Sog= lein mare, unb atuet Sliigel I)dtte, miirbe er gu il^r fitegen, u. f. rt). IV. (^e^en ®ie bie unmogltd^e Sebtngung im erften 3Ser§ in bie SSergangcnI)eit um! 475 Conditional I. irf) miirbe fliegen ic^ toiirbe fc^reibeu II. t(^ njiirbe geftogen fein ic^ tDiirbe gefd^rieben l)ahzn 28enn ic^ ein ^oglein njdre, pgc ic^ gu bir. Past SSenn i6) ein SSoglein n)are, tourbc ic§ gn bir flicgcn. SBenn ic^ ein SSogtein getoefen mare, njare id) jn bir geflogen. SSenn i^ ein ^oglein gertjefen ft)dre, miirbc ic^ ^n bir ^ gcflogett fcitt, 476 1. In the apodosis of an ideal condition the conditional mode may always be used instead of the subjunctive. 2. There are two tenses of the conditional : Present time corresponds to the preterite subj. formed of ttliirbc + present infinitive. Past time corresponds to the pluperfect subj. formed of ttiiirbc + perfect infinitive. Notice the use of ^ttbctt and fcitt in forming the perfect infinitive. See App. 77. 477-478] THE SUBJUNCTIVE 195 477 ^cr ^omg unb bcr Sanbmann ®er Sanbmann Icl)nt in ber ^iitte aHein llnb hlidt iymau§> in ben Ttonhen\d)ein Itnb f(^aut €m|3or 3u be§ ^6ntg§ ^alaft; ^r meife nid^t, tceld^^ ein ©efiil^I i^n fafet. 5 „5rd^, n)dr'2 1^ e^i^ ^onig nur eine D^ad^t, ^ann tooEf id^ fd)alten mit ntetner SO^adCit! S^ann ging' id) uml^er bon §au§ 3U §an§ Unb teilte ben ©djlummernben^ ©egen qu§! SSie ftro^Ite^ bonn ntorgen§ fo mancfjer 33IidE 10 2ie Sonne gum erftenmal !)ell gnriidf! 3Bie •ftannten'' einanber bte ©liidflidjen on Unb meinten"^: ba§> l)at ein ©ngel getonl" — 4 ®er ^ontg lel^nt im ^alaft oGein Unb hlidt l)inau§> in ben 90?onbenfdf)ein 1? Unb \d)aut l)inab ouf be§ fianbSmann^ ^au^ Unb (atf5t in ha§> meite ©djmeigen-^ l)inQU§: „Srd3, tvax' id) ein Canbmonn mir eine ^adjt, 2Sie gem entrief id^ ber briidfcnben Tlad)t\^ 478 ^ ttiel^ — uninflected form usual in this construction. Cf. foi(^ tin, mau^ tin. 2 Note omission of ttietttt. This sounds almost like a wish, but the following clause showing what he would do under the above stated circumstances indicates that it is an ideal condition. ^tien ^d^lltmrnerniJett = to the slumberers— a present participle used as a weak adjective, with the noun (gcntCtt) omitted. See App. 217. ^ftra^ltc — subj. pret. of weak verb, coordinate in construction with tijottt' jti^ttUen, line 6, above. ^iltt^ tiicitc St^tuetgCtt = the vast silence. *ber briijfcnbcn 2)laii§t— dative with entraten. See App 133. 196 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [479-481 SSte le^rt' id) mid^ felber hie fditoere ^unft, 20 92t(^t irr' gu gel^en mit meiner ©unft! SBie iDoEt' id) in§ eigene ^erg mir fel^n. Urn tviehet e§ of fen mir felBft gu gefte^n F SSa§ toufenb ®anbe tnir^ nic^t tioEBrod^t, ®a§ ttJoEt' id) geiDinrten in einer '^aii^tl" — 25 ©0 fd)Qun fie finnenb Beim ©ternenlauf, ®er ^onig I^inunter, ber Sanbmann !)inauf ; ©onn fc^fiefeen Beibe ben miiben 33Iid Itnb traumen Beibe t)on frembem @Iiid.^ m- ®aBrtel SetbL 479 Strong Verbs to be silent fc^tDeigen fc^tuieg gejd^tuiegeu to dispense with eutraten entriet entraten to win getDinnen gehjann getDonnen to meditate finiteu faiut gefoimeu Weak Verbs to recline (e^Ueil to rule f (fatten to glance bUcfen to reflect guriidftra^len 480 EXERCISES I. Write out in full each of the two conditional state- ments contained in the above poem, first with both parts in the subjunctive, then with the conditional in the apodosis, with and without the conjunction tuettn. II. Give these conditions in the past tense. III. (grga^Ien 8ie biefe§ (SJebi^t in ^rofa! r^ 48 I ' ttW Q^fic^tt = to frankly face the secrets of my own heart again, ^ wit — dative of interest. ^ tlOtt frembem ©liirf = of another's joy. 482-484] THE SUBJUNCTIVE 197 LE880N 57 SUBJUNCTIVE OF WISH— UNFULFILLED 482 This corresponds very closely to the prota*sis of the ideal condition. "Were I but king!" suggests "I should be happy if I were king!" which makes a correct statement of ideal con- dition. Present 23Bdrc td) bt)(^ ^onig ! Past SBdrc \6) bo^ ^onig gcmcfcn! Present ^^Ht \6) bie Ma6)i ! Past §dttc ic^ bte Wa^i gcJaBt! Observe that the tense use corresponds exactly to that in ideal condition. In fact, almost every wish of this kind could be made into a conditional sentence by adding the apodosis, and almost every conditional clause may become a wish, if the apodosis is omitted. 483 «I)tc liter 2Sitttf(^c ^onnt' \6) ho6) ber gelfen fein, ^tef tm ©rurtbe ha^ Urgeftein, ^o6) tm §immel ha^ ^Tngefid^t, ©tntg ftel^ett unb tnanfett tttc^t! 6 ^onnt' \6) bod^ ha^ 33riinnletn fein ©|:)rubelnb^ au§ !u{)Iem ©runbe reitt, ©e^ienb^ burcf) griines Hfergefd^td^t, @h)tg rtnnen uttb raften nic!)t! ^onitt' \^ bod^ ha^ ^dumleln fein, 10 2)te SSurgel geftrecft^ tn§ lifer l^tnein, 484 ^ f^lttttielttb and gc^Cttb— two present participles used adjectively with Sriittttletn, uninflected because they follow the noun. ^ gefh^edt — a perfect participle used like the present participles dis- cussed in note 1 ; modifies gSltrjel. 198 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [485-486 (StDiQ blii^en tinb tuelf en -ntcfjt ! ^onnt' id) bod) ha§> SSoglem fetn 9tuf ben S^eigen tm ©onnenfd^ein, 15 S)Q§ ©timmlein toncnb sum ^immel geridjl't, ©tutg tonen nnb fdjtocigen nid)t! 485 Verbs to run rinnen ranu geronnen to bubble fprubetu (w) to sound tonen (w) to rest raften (w) to direct rid^ten (/(;) to wither WzlUxi {tv) 486 EXERCISES I. 3[Bq!o finb bk bier SSiinfdje, bie l^ter au^gefproc^en ftnb? Xcv Wlann niiinfd^t, er fonnte ein Selfen fein u. f. w. II. SO^ac^cn ©ie btefe 3Bunfd]fa^e 5u Scbingungefatsen. SScnn id) ein 3SogIein fein fonnte, n^iirbc id) auf ben Srocigcn fil^cn u.f.tt). in. SSeld^e SSitnfi^e fatten ber Sonbmann unb bcr ^onig (Seite 195)? IV. ©e^en ©ie biefe§ (Sebid)t in ^$rofa um! V. Translate: 1. Siegfried said: "Oh, that I were a brave knight!" 2. Then I would go in search of (nad)) adventures. 3. If Siegfried had been a bold knight, he would have gone in search of adventures. 4. He cried: "If I only had a isword!" 5. If he had had a sword he would not have gone to the smithy. 6. Charles the Great exclaimed: "Oh, had the rich men's sons been as diligent as the poor men's sons!" 7. If the rich men's sons liad been as diligent as the poor men's sons, the school would have been much better. 8. What would the king have done, had he been a peasant? 9. If the peasant had been a king, he would have made everybody happy. 8 ttitegenti— see note 1. 487-489] THE SUBJUNCTIVE 199 LESSON 58 SUBJUNCTIVE OF WISH— TO BE FULFILLED.— DESIRE OR PRAYER 437 Fact— Indie. Wish— Subj. ©r ift glucflid^. @r fei glucfttc^! May he oe happy. @r ge{)t. (^e^e er ! Let him go ! S)em Sleid^ !ommt 2)etn Sletc^ !omme! Thy king- dom come! 488 ^cr 9Jht ift gcfommcn ^er Wax ift gcfommcn, bic 23dume fdjlagcn au^, Da bleibe, rt)er Suft I)at,^ mit ©oraen 3u §an§' ! SSie bie SSoIfen bort iconbern am I^immlifd^cn 3clt, ©0 ftel^t an^ tnir ber ©inn^ in bie tceite, tueite SSelt. 5 §err SSoter, Srau 9Wutter, bafe @ott eutf) Be!)iit' P 2Ber tueife, tro in ber gerne mein ©Iu(f mir nod) bliiljt?* (5§ gibt fo manege ©tra^e, ha nimmer id) mar|(^iert ;^ ®§ giBt fo manc^en SSein, ben \d) nimmer nod^ ^robiert.^ Srtfd^ auf brum,^ frifd) auf brum im l^ellen ©onnenftra^I, 10 2Bo!)I iiber h\^ 33crge, tDof)! burd) ha^ tiefe ^al! 2)ie £luellen erflingen, bie 93dume raufd^en all'; 9D^ein ^erg ift mic 'ne Serdjc unb ftimmet ein mit ©d^all. 489 ^ iia Meibc, tticr fittfi ^at, etc. = let whoever desires stay at home. '^ |o ^'WX = so does my mind turn to. 'bafe bc^itt'— supply i(^ tt)ittt|(i^e before this. * ©liitf fttii^t = fortune Avill smile upon me. Note the [figure ; bUt^ett is a favorite word in German to denote a flourishing condi- tion, asbte Mit^enlic Stabt; cin Mii^cntJcr ^itngUng, etc. ^ ^abe is omitted. ^ %ti\iS^ ttttf brum = Up and away ! 200 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [4490-91 Unb QbenbS im (Stdbtletn, ha Uf)i' id) burfttg ein: ,,$€rr SSirt, ©err SStrt, einc Marine hlanUn SSein! 15 ©rgreife bie gtebel, bu luft'ger ®|)ieImQnn bu! 3Son metnem ©rf)a^ ba§ Siebel,^ ba§> ftng' id) basu." Unb finb'^ id) feine ©erberg', fo lieg' icC) gur S^ad^t SSol^I unter biQuem ©immel; bie ©terne l^alten 2SQd)t; Sm SSinbe bie Sinbe, bie roufc^t mid^ ein^ gemac^;^^ 20 (5§ fiiffet in ber grtil^e ba§ 2^orgenrot mid^ tvad). O SSonbern, o SSanbern, bu freie 33urfd^enluft! ©a toel^et @otte§ Obemi^ fo frifdf) in bie ^ruft; 5)a finget unb jaud^get boS ©era gum ©immeBgelt: SSie bift bn hodj fo fd^on, o bu tveik, tueite SSelt! / Emanuel @eiBeI. >o Strong Verbs to sprout au^fd^lagen to resound erfliugen to seize ergreif en fd^tug au§ erflang ergriff Weak Verbs au§gef^lagen erflungen ergriffen to wander h)anbern to guard be^iitcn to march marf (^ieren to try ^robieren to rustle raufc^en to join einftimmen to enter tinU^XtXl 49 I ^ fiiclicl — a South German diminutive form ; would be Stetlli^en or giciJicttt. ^ Note the real condition with the Uientt omitted. ^ rttttfii^t mx^ tin = rustles me to sleep. ^" gemttl^— old form of ficmiiji^Iiii^, comfortable. ^^ Obcm— old (poetic) form of %itm. North German 492-494] THE SUBJUNCTIVE 201 492 EXERCISES I. Translate: 1. Let his mind turn towards home (naci^ ^aufe). 2. May God guard you! 3. Let the woods resound. 4, Let the host bring me a tankard of wine. 5. Let him lie all night under the blue sky. 6. May the winds blow through the trees and sing me to sleep ! 7. Let who will remain* at home, I shall go out into the wide, wide world II. (Se^en ©ie obige^ ^ebtc^t in $ro)a um ! LESSON 59 SUBJUNCTIVE OF DOUBT ^ 493 Besides the subjunctives of indirect discourse, condition, and wish, there are a number of subjunctive phrases and sup- positions which are not easily classified. Some are remnants of an older optative, others are parts of older conditional clauses which have become stereotyped. See App. 192. A very frequent use of the subjunctive is that after al8 ob or oil tticttn (as though). Note that the q6 or tticnn maybe omitted with the usual result upon the order. See App. 188. @r ioi, at§ ob e§ immer ©ommer marc. (Sr iai, aU tuiirc e^ immer (Sommer. 494 ^cr gitte ^atnerab S(f) '^cdi' einen S^ameraben, ©inen beffern finb'ft \)Vi mi} 2)i€ trommel \6)hxQ aum ©treite, ©r gtttg on metner ©ette Sn gletc^em ©d^rttt unb ^rttt.^ * See App. 197, 198. ^ ttit — South German form for ut^t. ^ 8«i^ritt ttttb Xrjit = in step. 202 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [495-496 ©ine ^ugel fam geflogen;^ (Silt's mir obcr gilt e§ bir?* S6n !)at eg toeggeriffen ; @r liegt mir^ bor ben Siifeen, 10 5tB tDdr'g^ ein ©titc^ t)on mir. SBiH^ mir bie §anb nod) rcidjen, ^ertoeil^ id^ eBen lab'. ,Mcinn^ hit hie ^anh md]t geBen; Skib bu^^ im eh)'gcn Seben 15 9P^ein guter ^amerob!" Sttbttitg U^lanb. 495 ^u Btft tnie cine 35Iuinc S)u bift tDie einc ^lume ©0 l^olb unb fd^on unb rein; Sd) fd^au' bid) on, unb 2BcI)mut ©d^Ieidjt mir xn§> $er3 f)incin.^^ mix ift,i2 Qig ^£13 1^^ ^ie ^^j^vjg 5tuf§ ^aupt bir^ legen foEt', 93ctenb, bofe ©ott bid) erl^olte ©0 rein unb fd}on unb ^olh. Ptiwxitii pt'ttit. 496 ^ fam gejlOgClt — note adverbial use of perf. part, with verb fommett, cf. 198, 1. 4 gilt eg = does it mean. ^ mtt . . . ten f^iifecit— what dative is mtt? '^aU tt)ttr'§—Wiiat is omitted? 'm\n = tt tiJitt. ^ berttiCtl — modern literary form is ttttieitt. ^fatttt = ij^ fatitt. ^"S31etb tlU — emphatic imperative. " ttt§ ^erj l^inettt — note tautological use of adverb. ^^ mir tft — short form of e§ ift mir = it seems to me. 13 Could oh be omitted? What change would that make? 497-500] THE SUBJUNCTIVE 203 497 Strong Verbs to tear away ttjegrei^cit ri§ tt)eg n^e jgeriffen to load laben lub gelabeit to creep fd^leid^en f(^li(^ gef(^lid)en 498 EXERCISES I. (Sr5ai)Ien 8ie ben 3n^It be§ obigen ^ebic^tS in inbirefter 9lebe! II. SSie tear bem $Ulann ^n Tluk, aU er feinen greunb tot fa^? III. 28er Wax £ubtt)ig Uf)lanb? §eutrid^ §eine? LESSON 60 499 GRAMMAR REVIEW ^ I. Form of subjunctive. See App. 72-83. II. Syntax of subjunctive. See App. 180-199. 500 REVIEW EXERCISES 1. Give present indie, and subj. active paradigms of fc^cn, flc^cn, burfcn, mcrbcn, fcin. 2. Give preterite indie, and subj. active paradigms of ge^en, ^akn, fein, tuottcn, fadcn. 3. Give perfect indie, and subj. active paradigms of laufcn, gc^cn, Men, muffcn. 4. Give pluperfect indie, and subj. active paradigms of burfcn, ^abcn, fcin, ttJcrfcn, Blcibcn. 6. Give future and future perfect indie, and subj. active paradigms of (cfctt, ge^ctl, miigCtt. 6. Give synopsis 3rd sing, passive indie, and subj. of fc^ctt, prcn. 7. Write out conditional paradigm active and passive of fcljcn and ^brcn. 204 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN II. Put into indirect discourse all the direct discourse in the stories on pages 189, 191. III. Tell the story on page 82 in indirect discourse. IV. Translate: 1. Once a rich man was addressed on the street by a beggar (ber S3ettler). 2. The latter said: ''Brother, give ine a penny (ber pfennig)." 3. Then the rich man asked how long they had been brothers. 4. The poor man re- minded him of the fact (baran), that we are all the sons of Adam. 5. The rich man said that he was right and that he had forgotten that. 6. Then he gave the poor man a penny. 7. But the latter thought that this was a very small present for a brother. 8. However, the rich man said: "If all the sons of Adam should give you a penny, you would be the richest man in the world!" V. %tht\\ (Sie ein SBeifpiel fiir \)t\\ SSunfc^fonjunftit), ben 93ebiugung§fouiun!tit), ben ^onjunftit) ber inbireften 3fiebe ! 601-503] IMPERATIVE 205 CHAPTER X IMPEEATIVE. COMPOUNDS. INFINITIVES. PARTICIPLES LESSON 61 IMPERATIVE 50 I Strong Verb Wiam, giB mir bein S&\\6) ! SRarie unb ^arl, gcbt mir eure 93iid^er! grdulein (Sd^mibt, bitte gcBcn Sic ntir g^r S3ud^! 502 f Weak Verb SBitf)etm, mtt^c bein 93itd^ auf! ^arl uub SSit^elm, moj^t eure §err 93rauu, mai^ctt Sic 3^r 93iic^er auf ! 93u^auf! ^ gib lauf(e)* Strong Qebt l)artet lauft geben (Sic ^alten @ie laufen (Ste ntad^e Weak ntac^t mac^en (Sie jet Slightly Irregular feib feien (Sie 503 / ^cjttfd^cr 9tat 3Sor oHern ein§, mein ^inb, fd treu unb tral^r! fiofe nie bie Siioc beinen 932unb entiDetl)'n! *^ ^^Jort^oIte^^^J^i im b€utfd)en 35oIfe toor S)er pd^fte D^tul^m, getreu unb tcatir gu fein. * * * * See 154. ^ 95on ttUetS l^er = since olden times. 206 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN (504-505 Suerft ein 3^erg, ein dik\e iymiennad)f 2)o(^ bein ©etDtffen ^eiQt ben geinb btr an, Itnb eitie ©timme ruft in btr: „©ei tDad^V S)ann tt)Q(^ unb fant^f! ©§ tft^ ein geinb bereit — 13 ®ie Sitg' in bir, fie^ brol^et btr ©efol^r. ^inb, S)eutf(f)e fom^ften tQ|)fer oEejeit; 2)u bcutfc^e^ STinb, fet ta^fer, treu unb ma^r! Z Sloficrt ^ctntif. 504 ^te Tla^nnn^ ^iitet eure Sungen ^ 9Sor 33eleibigungen ! Sofet fein Bofe§ SSort !)ert)orl ©tofet ben D^iegel t)or ba§ ^or! 6 (Stofet ben 9liegel t)or ba§ ^or! Cafet fein bofe§ SSort !)ert)or! 35or ^ekibigungen ^iitet @ure 3wngen! §iitet eure 0]^ren 10 Ober il^r feib ^oren! Sofet fein Bofe§ 2Bort bQrtn;^ @§ berunel^rt euren ©inn! ©§ berunel^rt euren ©inn; Sofet fein Bofe§ SSort barin 15 Ober il^r feib ^oren! ^iitet eure Ol^renl 505 ^ att8 ^erj j^eran— notice the tautology. Sje i:J)o. 11. ^ ^itttcnnari^ = later. * ^8 ifi Citt ^txn'h = there is an enemy. ^ ^ic 8it9' .... fie— poetic tautology. *iiaritt instead of |tnetti. 506-50a] IMPERATIVE 207 506 Verbs to push f togen ftieg Qeftogen to desecrate enttoeifien (w) to fight fdm^feti (w) to point out an^^eigen (w) to dishonor Derune^ren (w) to watch tuac^en (to) 507 EXERCISES I. Express the imperatives in the above poems in singular and plural. SBenn man btefe 93efel^Ie in ber tnbtreften 9^ebe auSbriidfett tntH, mufe man ha^^^ SOtoball^ilf^tnort f o 1 1 e u benu^ert, 3. 33. Tcr Xidjiet fagt, etn Simh folle (follte) treii unb tna^r fcin inib folle (foEte) nie eine Ciige fetnen 502unb entmetl^cn laffen. II. (Se^en ©te Beibe ©ebid^te in bie tnbirefte 9?eb€ urn! 508 In addition to the regular imperative there are three methods of expressing a command. (a) The present subjunctive — a command in the third person, as cr gc^c, let him go. (b) The perfect participle ) - , , / X rm . n -,■ > for brusque commands. (c) The infinitive ) 509 9? it ft t g ! c i t Srifd) getan unb ntd^t gefdumt! 3Ba§ tm SSeg liegt, meggcrdumt! SSa§ btr fel)let, ]ndj gefd^ininb! Orbnung lerne friil), mein ^inb! 5tu§ bent 33ett unb ntd)t gefdumt! 9^id)t Bet l^eEent %aQ getrdumt! i^rft bie ^TrBett, bann ba§> (Bpiell m^ ber 9^ctf€ !ommt ha^ Qiell 208 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [610-512 (Sd^nell befonnen, md)t getrctumt! ^id]t§> bergeffen, ntu)t§ berfaumt! ^id)i§> Blofe obenI)m gemodit! 2Ba§ hu tuft, baraiif gib ad)t! gr. 9ltt(fert. 5 I O Weak Verbs to hesitate fautTten to miss berfdumen to remove tDegrdunten 51 I Tlan fonnte aud) fagen: grifd) tun unb nic^t faumen! SBa§ tm SSeg liegt, tDegrciumen! 2Ba§ btr fe!)Iet, g€fd)tt)trtb fud^en! Orbnung lerne bQ§ ^tnb,fru!)! That is, a command may be expressed as follows — QtB! gebe er! gebt! gegeben! geben ©ie! geben! ^riiden ©te bie 93efet)Ie tm obtgen ^ebtd^te auf jebe ntogltd^e 2Seije qu§! LE8S0N 62 \^ COMPOUND VERBS 512 \ Separable Present W\6)tl ttJCl^t §an§ ttttS, Preterite ^ie 9Jlau§ l^oitgtc ber ^a^e bie (Sc^elle nic^t an. Perfect %\t SSogleitt fittb im SSinter fcrtgcflogcn. Pluperfect Siegfrieb l^tttte ben ^rac^en totgcfcjlagcn* Future ^er ^olbfc^ntieb tuirb bent 93aner 'txi^ ©olb aBnel^nten. Put. perf. ^er ^nabe tnirb jururfgcfotninctt f cin. 613-616] COMPOUND VERBS 209 513 Present Preterite Perfect Pluperfect Future Fut. Perf. 514 Inseparable ^er ^aufmann Umtxtt "oa^^ gaden ber S3orfe nid^t SDie Siige cnttuci^lc ietnen SOlunb. SDie ^aufleute l^aBctt ben 93eutel ticrlorctt. SStele 3af)re ttjarctt tJcrgangcn. ®ie ^naben ttJcrbctt hk ^riifimg Bcftc^cn, ^te ^inber tticrbctt fi^ Bcfonncn ^aficn. SYNOPSIS er Hertiert er fliegt fort er flog fort er ift fortgeflogen er tear fortgeflogen er njirb fortftiegen er ttjirb fortgeflogen fein er ticrlor er ^at Hcrloren er ^tte tJCtloren er n)irb ticrlteren er Wixh tjcrloren fiaBen 5 1 5 The separable particle, which is strongly accented, is always an independent word (adverb or preposition), which is closely associated with the verb. When it immediately pre- cedes the verb as in the participle, infinitive, and always in transposed order, the two are joined together as one word. The inseparable particle cannot be used independently, hence is always attached to the verb. .In the latter case, the augment of the perfect participle is omitted, since more than one initial short syllable is unusual in Grerman. 516 A few compound verbs are both separable and insepar- able with change of meaning. uficrfegen, fe^te nhtv, uBcrgefe^t to ferry ^ ttttter^alten, f)ie(t untcr, nntcrs ge^alten to hold under buri^tanfen, lief buri^, bur^ge- laufen to run through ttBcrfe|en, ubcrfe^te, uBcrfe|t to translate untcrfialten, untcr^ielt, untcrs flatten to entertain burc^tanfen, bur^lief, burr^tau^ fen to peruse hastily n^- 210 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [617-518 Separable compounds more often express the original mean- ing of the two parts, inseparable have more often taken on a figurative meaning. 517 ©tn grteb^ofiggang 93eim ^otengraber |)0(i)t e^ an: ,Madj aiil mad) au\, bu gretfer Tlannl Zu Qufi hie Zixv unb nimm ben ^tab, Tlu^t^ seigen mtr etn leure§ OroB!" » ©in Sternberg fprtd)t'g mit ftrupp'gem 33Qrt, SSerbronnt nnb raul) nad^ ^riegerart. ^SSie I}ei6t ber ^eure,^ ber ^udf ftorb Unb fic^ ein ^$fii(}I bet mtr evtvavh?'' „®te abutter tft eg, fennt S^r ntcf)t 10 ®er 9[)?Qrt{)a ©ol^n me^r am @efi(i)t?" „^tlp (Sott, tote grofe, toie braun gebrannt! ^citt'^ nun unb nimmer @ud^ erfannt. Xod) fommt unb fef)t! $ter ift ber €rt, 9^ad^ bem gcfragt^ nttd^ ©uer SSort; 518 Mtt ailf W Xitr— prose order would be ttt ilic ^iir ttttf. ^ 6ttt 3l*CWlier— note the substantive use of the adjective fremb- * Sttli^ — dative of possession. Note that bu and i^r are used inter- changeably — not uncommon in dialectic and poetic usage. ^^Uf ®Ott for ®oii ^elfe, the pres. subj. of pleading or prayer. ^^iitt'— what subj.? what is omitted? See App. 192. ^ gefragt— observe irregular (poetic) order. What is omittedlj 619-620] 20 COMPOUND VERBS §ier tDol^nt, t)er!)uEt t)on ©rb' unb ©tein, dlnn ®u€r tote§ 30^utterlein." 2)a fte!)t ber ^rieger lang unb f(f)iDeigt, 2)a§ $au^3t l^inab gur 33ruft geneigt. @r fteljt unb flarrt gum teuren ©rob 30?it trdnenfeud^tem 33Ii(i ]f)iriaB; S^ann fdjiittelt er fein $aupt unb fprid^t: „^f}V irrt; I)ter mol^nt bie ^ote riidjt. 2Bie fc^Ioff'^ ein 9^Qum, fo eng unb flein, ^ie Siebe etner SDZutter ein?" 211 19 Verbs to open auftun tat auf aufgetan to procure emerben erlDarb emorben to knock an|30c^en poc^te an angepod^t to open aufmac^en mad^te au{ aufgemac^t to burn up t)erbrennen tierbrannte t)erbrannt to recognize erfenueu erfaunte erfannt to hide t)er()u(Ien t)erp(Ite ter^iittt ^o^^^^e^f own ^tnabftarreu ftarrte ^inab ^inabgeftarrt 520 EXERCISES I. 2Bq§ tierlangte ber Srembe Don bem ^otengrdber? 2Sa§ tDoUte ber ^otengraber tDtffen? SSo^ fagte il^m ber Srembe? SBarum J^atte ber ^otengraber ben Sremben nid^t erfennen fonnen, nienn berfelbe fetnen D^amen ntd)t genannt l^dtte? II. (Se^en ©ie 3Serfe 7, 8, 11, 12 in inbircfte 9^ebe um! ^ f^liiffc — dubitative subj. See App. 192. 212 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [621 LESSON 63 INFINITIVES 52 1 The main uses of the infinitive have been observed incidentally in the preceding reading lessons. They fall under three main groups : I. Part of the verb. II. To modify nouns or adjectives. III. Substantive (when the infinitive takes the place of a noun or a clause). The German infinitive is a verbal noun. As such it translates sometimes the English infinitive, some- times the English present participle. Ex. — To be or not to be = Scin ober 9lit^tfetn. \j Walking is wholesome = ^o8 @C^cn tft gefunb. I. As part of the verb it is used (without ju) in forming {a) The future tenses. {h) The conditional mode. (c) The complement of modal auxiliaries and a few verbs of similar construction. Examples (a) Future — S^ tozv\)t a\l^t^tn, (b) Conditional — @r tDiirbe e§ tutt, n)enn er fonnte. (c) Modal s — (Ste h)iU nic^t f|Jtct^en. Verbs like the modals — Sa§t mi^ gc^cn ! II. With nouns and adjectives the infinitive always takes jtt : e§ ift fc^mer, ha§ jtt ttttt. ^te ^unft gut ju (cf en ift jelten. The art of reading well is rare. 622-523] INFINITIVES 213 III. As a substantive, the infinitive is used either with or without ju. When used for a clause, it always has ju. Ex.— {a) ®eutf^ lefcn tft leister at§ SDeutfd^ f^rc^cn. Or gut ®eutfc§ ju Icfen tft nic^t fo fe^r leid^t. {i) 8tc ge^t in ben Garten, um SBIumen gu ^fiuifen (= bamtt fie S3Iumen pfliicfe). For complete statement, see App. 205-213. 522 2)te bctttfcfjen ^iaW 2In ber Mfte ber 9^orb= unb ber £)ftfee,i an htn mQd)tigen (Stromen unb on ben lieblidfien gliiffen, bie in k^tere miinben, finbet man groge §anbeBftdbte, gefd^dfttge ©etnerb^ftdbte unb retgenbe altertitmlic^e £)rtfci)aften liegen.^ 3SieIe bcrfelBen 5 laffen fid^ ^\% gu mittelalterlidfien '^^\i^^\ aurii(ffiil)ren,3 unb laffen an i^rem 33auftil unb an bielen ©inrid^tungen hit ©nt^ tnidlung ber ^al^rl^unberte erfennen.^ ©in grower Unterfd^ieb tft 3u bemerfen jtoifd^en ben §on« bel^ftdbten be§ 9^orben§ (Bremen, Sitberf unb ^amburg^), W 10 burd^ tl^ren Umgang mit ©nglanb unb ben anberen benad&= barten Sdnbcrn ettna^ ^o§nto^oIitifrf)e§ an fid^ l^aben, unb benen be§ ©iibenS, W ein etn]^ettlid[)ere§ 5Iu§fe]^en f)aben. ^Berlin, bte $au|)tftabt be§ S^atferreidf)e§, ift eine ber grdfe* itn SSeltftdbte. ®a§ rafd)e ^Intnadifen ber ©intnol^neraal^I, ha^ 15 fdineUe SSergrdfeern be§ SofalbesirB unb ha^ rege 3Serfe]^r§» 523 ^ 9loril« VLM^ Oftfec— note the manner of placing the hyphen to form a double compound — in English we say the North Sea and the Baltic. ^ matt f tttbct .... Ucficn = are. See App. 206 and 220. ' Ittff Ctl jlr^ pritrffii^tCtt = can be traced back. See App. 220. * Ittff Ctt erfetinctt = show. See App. 212. '^SBo liegen biefe ©tdbte? 214 ELEMENTS OP' GERMAN [524-626 toefen ertnnern on bic rocftlic^en ©table ber SSeretntgten ©taa= ten D^orbomerifag. Tlitkn in ber ©tabt ift ha§> ^omgltdfie ©i^Iofe 3U fel}en6 — ein tnad^tiger 33au, ber ungefdl^r 700 ©die unb Simmer umfd^Itefeen \oUJ ^ort nimmt bte Beriil^mte 20 ©trofee, „llnter ben Sinben", tl^ren 5tnfang; fie erftretft fidft tion bem mdd^tigen S)enfmal griebric^g be§ ©rofeen ungefdl^r eine englifd^e SO^eile iDeftlid^ unb enbet am „^ranbenburger ^or." S)iefe§ ift eineg ber fc^dnften ^unftlDerfe 33erlin§. ®ie barauf fi(^ Befinbenbe ©tatue tvmhe 1806 bon D^apoleon nadj ^an§^ 25 gefiil^rt, ober 1814, Befonber§ buret) Sllidiers^ (Jinfd)reiten, iDieber guriicfgebrad)!. ((Sd)fu6 folgt) 524 Verbs lo grow anh)ac!^fen, tvud)^ an, ange- to interfere einfc^reiten, f(i)ritt ein, tDad^feu etngefc^ritten to empty miinben (tv) to recognize erfeuneu (w) to increase tJergro^Cm (?^) 525 EXERCISE Translate: 1. Along the coast of the Baltic Sea are situated many busy commercial cities and many large indus- trial cities. 2. Mighty streams and large towns are to be found in Germany. 3. The customs of the people and the style of architecture of many of these cities can be traced back to medieval times. 4. x\ more uniform appearance can be observed in the cities of the south than in the northern (ones). 5. A rapid growth of population and a great increase in area is to be observed in Berlin, the capital of Germany. 6. The capital 526 Mfi. . . in fe^ett. See App. 212. ' umfii^Ue^en foil = is said to contain. See App. 242. * S3(itd^er — the Prussian general in the Battle of Waterloo. 527-528] INFINITIVES 215 of the empire is said to resemble the large cities of western America. 7. By the intervention of Bliicher, the splendid work of art was brought back to Germany in 1814. LES80N 6Jf. /) 527 ^ic bcutfdicn ©tdbtc (©cfitufe) S)ie fiibltd^en ©tdbte tragcn tm aonacn ein ctnr)ettIt(^Gre§ (Se^rdge, inbcrn fie treniger ben au^Idnbifdjen C^infliiffen^ au§= gefe^t tcoren, oB bte, hit ber Mfte^ naffer liegen. Wm\&}Z\\, bie $QU|)tftQbt bec^ ^dnigrcidi^^ Sat)crn, ift bor 5 Qllem bie ^iohi ber ffinftlcr. ^§> mogen^ ha tnol^I einige ^aufenb^ Mnftler (arjaler, Silb^auer, ^upferftedjer u. a}) ttjofinen. ^rdc^ttge ^trc^cn unb ^^3aldfte, f)errlid)e S)enfmdlcr unb grofee SO^ufecn finb ha 3U ftnben. ^ontg fiubmig I. I)at hit grdfetcn ©iimmen Qu^gegebcit, urn 30?und^cn gur erften 10 ^unftftdtte 2)eutf(^Ianb§ 3U madjen. STnftatt eine Mnftlerftobt 311 ^eifeen,^ mie 2)^tind)en, I)at 5Iug§Burg am 2ed) feit ^aftrljimbertcn ben D^omen etner ber grdfeten ^onbeBftdbte ©iibbcutfd)Ianb§. Sm S^^^-e 1500 mar 5[ug§burg burd) fetncn 3Serfc[}r mit J^talien bie beriiljmtcftc 15 unb |)rd(^tigfte ber $anbeBftdbte, unb niemanb berei[te 2)eutfc^Ianb, o()ne biefen SO^ittelpunft be§ ^anbeB 3U befid)= ttgcn.^ 528 ^ ben tttt§tdttt>i)i^cn Cf titftitfiett— dat. with adj. See App. 145. ^ miigen — expresses possibility. See App. 234. ^ einige 2^ttU[entl = some thousands. Observe the singular form. * tt. a. = ttttii ontiere. ^ anftatt • • • • p ^eifjen = instead of being called. obtte...ficPii§ti8ett= without visiting. See App. 217. 216 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [529-530 Sm fubtt)eftlt(i)en ^eile bon ^ui\d}lanh tft bk Berii^mte ^taht ©trafeburg gu finben. ^ier liegt ber treltbefannte 20 ©trapurger SO^iinyter, ber toeit iiBer ba§ gange Sanb fd^aut, unb ber ein au^gegetd^nete^ 33eif|)tel ber altbeutfd^en (fogenannt gottfd^en) 33auart Bielet. 5tuc^ fann man f)ier bte toun- berbore Hl^r beftd)ttgen, beren Sauen emem 30^enfc^en ha§> Seben gefoftet I)aben foE. 529 EXERCISE Translate: 1. In order to make Munich the greatest art center of the world, King Ludwig I. expended vast sums of money. 2. Without having seen the southern cities one does not know the beauty of German art. 3. Augsburg was known for centuries as a commercial city. 4. In Munich were to be found great museums and splendid statues. 5. The building of the Strassburg clock is said to have cost a man's life. 6. The southern cities are less exposed to foreign influence; therefore they are more uniform in their style of architecture and in the customs of the people. LESSON 65 PARTICIPLES 530 As the infinitive is the verbal noun, so the participle is the verbal adjective in German. As such it conforms to every rule of adjective declension. It usually cannot be compared, and it may have its object or adverbial modifiers with it. These are always placed first. (See App. 214-217.) The present participle is active in meaning: ®ie \iCi^ ^inb rufenbe Wwiitx, the mother who is calling her child. The perfect participle is passive: ®a§ t)on feiner SJ^utter gerufene ^inb, the child that is called by its mother. 631-682] PARTICIPLES 217 S)ie ditefte un§> befonnte^ ©efdjtd^te S)eutfd£)lQnb§ ftnbet ftc^2 ji^ 5ei^ „@ermanta" be^ %adtn§> (gefd^rieBen im ga^ire 98 n. ©]&r.3). ^Qcitu^, ber ein genau beoBad^tenber ^efuc^er in S)eutfd^Ianb tear, berid)tet bon ben einfac^en ©itten, bem 5 tal^feren 9P?ut, ber munberbaren ^raft ber 2)eut{d)en. (Beit ber 3eit ©dfar§ toaren hk 2)eutfd^en in 93eru]^rung mit ben il^nen itberlegenen S^tomern^ gefommen, o!)ne fic^ jeboc^ unterorbnen 3U lajfen.^ gm S(^?)i^e 9 n. (SI)r. ^otte ber fluge unb befonnene $er= 10 monn ben fii^nen aber leid&t berfiilfirten SSaru^ im ^eutoburger SSoIbe gef(f)Iagen. S)a§ ndd^fte gu berirf)t€nbe^ @reigni§ ift hie fogenonnte 25oI= fertoanberung — biefe mddjtige 90^igration bon 9^orben nadj ©iiben, tooran gange 3SdIferftdnime teilno^imen. liefer nidd)= 15 tige, nie gang erfldrle 3ug in bie grembe bauerte ungefd^r bom tiierten U§> gum fec^ften ^ol^rl^unbert unb berdnberte hie gange biSl^er beftel^enbe fiage^ ber euro^dif(f)en 95dlfer. 3u einem sufammengefugten 3SoIfe iDurbe ®eutfd)Ianb erft tDieber burd^ hie ©r!)ebung ^avU be§ ©rofeen, ber im ^Q^ire 20 800 n. Sl^r. ^oifer he§> berii!)mten ^eiligen 9^dmifcf)en ?flei^e§> tvmhe. S)odf) balb noc^ feinem tief betrauerten Xobe gerfiel ha§> bon il^m bereinte Sanb unter ben unbermdgenben §dnben feiner fd^tcdd^Iid^en D^ad^fommen. (©d)IuB folgt) 532 ^ mi8 fiefttttttte = known to us. 2 flttbct M = is found. See App. 220c. ^tt. e^r.=ttttr^ (^^rtfio (A.D.) Cf. tj. g|r. (B.c ) * ilCtt i|ttett itberlegcttCtt ^lomertt = the Romans, who were superior to them. 5 See App. 217 and 220b. ^ Jtt fiettji^tmbc = to be related. ^ Bt§^cr Bcfte^Cttiie Sage = the situation as it had existed previously. 218 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [533-536 533 EXERCISE Translate: 1. The oldest extant"^ German history is found in the "Germania" of Tacitus. 2. Tacitus was a keenly observant visitor in the Germany known to the Romans. 3. By him the bravery and simple customs of the Germans were made known to the Eomans. 4. The Komans, who loere superior to the Germans^ were not able to defeat them. 5. Varus, lold hut easily misled, was defeated by Hermann in the year 9 A. D. 6. Whole families, including men^ women, and children, took part in the Tribal Migrations. 7. This migra- tion, 7iever quite explained, lasted for two centuries. 8. Not until (erft gur) the time of Charles the Great did the Germans become a united people again. 9. His death, mourned deeply hy all, caused (lie§) the land that had just been united to fall to pieces. LE880N 66 534 ^ic bcutf^c ©ef^i^tc ©rft tnit bem ©mporfommen^ be§ ^ofienftaufifcfien^ ^atfer= l^aufe^ (1138 bi§ 1254) felfirte ber t)erIoren gegangene^ (SJIang rt)entgflen§ ouf etne SSeile guriicf. ®od) )Durbe buret) bie STreusgiige unb W ^dm:pfe stDtfc^en ben ^aifern unb ben $a|)= 5 [ten W Uxci\i be§ Sonbe^ erfd)o|)ft. ®ie ndd^fte grofee ©^0($e, bie man in 33etrad)t giefien foil, * Translate all italicized expressions by participles. 535 ^ Srfi — ©m^iorfoinmctt = not until the rise. ^ ^O^Cttftaufljt^cn— note adjective formation from the stem ^oJ^en^ ftttttf(ett) — the name of a castle in Swabia, from which this imperial family came. 3 ber dcrlorett fiefiangene ©lattj = the lost glory. Note the tautolog- ical expression ticrlotett ge^Ctt = to become lost, i.e. to be lost. 536] PARTICIPLES 219 tft ha§> fed)3e]^nte ^a1:)tt)nnhQvi, mit ber alte ©itten unb tau= fenbiQi)rige (^inrid)timgen umftiirsenben D^eformation. SSieber tourbe ber erft^ eroberte (Slans gebdm^ft. 0!)ne \i6:} 10 t)oE auSleben gu fbnmn,^ tvuvhe bte neu ertoorbene ^taft burd) ben fiirc^terlidien Sreifetgidftrigen ^ricg (1618 — 1648) erfd^opft, tvohei Canb nnh Seute faft gu ©runbe gmgen.^ 9^ac^ ber le^tgenonnten ^ataftro^!)e fom ba§ ^reufeifdje S^dntgrcid), ha§> fpdter gang SDeutfd^Ianb 3ur 33Iute berl^elfen 15 foUte," langfam in bte ^dl&e.^ 2;er erfte Berur)mte unb tDoijt- E)aft grofee ©profe biefe!§ §Qufeg tear jener ^urfiirft Srtebrid^ aSil^elm t)on 33ranbcnburg (1620—1688), bon beffen er|)rob= ter ©trenge unb ^^3flid)ttreue tv'n in ber @efd)ic^tc Dom ^^ringcn don ^omBurg gelefen I)Qb€n. 20 (Sein birefter ^lad)fomme Wax jener griebrid), ber am Beften Bejeic^net tDirb burd) hen 9Zamen, ben i^m fein 3SoU' gegeben, ,,ber alte gri^". Siiefer t^erl^alf bem lange gebemu= tigten SSoIfe auerft toieber gu ©teg unb ©l^re, ha er bte ftolgen ^Irmeen SubtDig XIV fd)Iug (©djlad^t bei S^ofebad) in ©adjfen, 25 1757) in bein tDo{)Ibefannten t)on 1756 U§> 1763 bauernben ©iebenidf)rigen ^riege. ^od) eine bemiitigenbe ®^od^e l^atte S)eutfc^Ianb burd^au^ mad)€n. 2^ie Unterbriidungen he§> fiegenben ^apohon^, gtci^ fdjen 1795 unb 1813, brad)ten ba§ 2anb on hen dlanh be§ 9Ser^ 30 bcrbenS. S)ie t)er]^dngm§t)olIe 9ZieberIage gu Qena (1805) broI)te ben gdnalic^en Untergang. ®o(^ langfam em|)orftrebenb crftoB e§ fic^ nac^ ber (^efangennaftme be§ Unterbriider^ gu in= 536 * Ctft — translate newly. ^ 0|ttC . . . . p fomtCtt. See 628, 5. *5tt ©ruttic fttngett = perished. 7 lotttc = was destined. ^ in iic pof^t = to the front. 220 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN buftrteHer urtb ^oltttfi^er ©rofee, um fdiliefelid^ in bem beutfc^» fransofifd^en ^riege (1870 — 1871) gu Betceifen, ha% es audj 35 fremben Tladjten g€tDQd)fen ift.^ ^er ©teg Bei ®eban (1870) tnad^te bie oBengenannte D^ieberloge bet Sena (1805) iDieber ■ gut. Tin hex borauffolgenben llronung beg beutfc^en ^atfer§ ■ SStl^elm I m 3SerfatEe§ tm Sa^re 1871 mt ha§ burd^ Saftr^ i^unberte geteilte beutfdje Sanb 3u etnem beretnten ®eutf(f)Ianb 40 erfldrt. SSte unfer §etmatlanb, fud)t e§ je^t jeine ©tdr!e in feiner ©inl&eit unb bent fricblic^en ©nttcidfein feiner ^rafte. 3ur Qdt be§ eben genannten ^riegeS njurbe 'oa^ tm ^a^xt 1840 gefc^riebene (55ebtc^t „SDie SSad)t am 3flf)ein" oft nnb begeiftert gefungen. ^iefe§ §ur beutfdien 9^ationalt|t)mne ert)obene 2kh lautet: ^ic SSa^t am 9!^etn ©§ brauft ein 9tuf n)ie S)onner]^aII, SSie ©d^tcertgeflirr unb SSogen^raH: ' ,,3unt ^!)ein, gum ^^ein, gum beutf(f)en 9^t)ein! SSer tcia be§ ©trome^ fitter fein?" 5 Sieb SSaterlanb, ntagft ru!)ig fein: Seft fte^t unb treu bie 3Bad)t, bie SSac^t am 9^§ein! Surd) ^unberttaufenb sudt e§ fdinell, Unb aGer 5lugen bli^en !)ell: ®er beutfdje SiinQltng, frontm unb ftarf, 10 33efd^irmt bie IjeiFge Sanbe^ntarf. Sieb SSaterlanb 2c. ©r blidt !)inauf in ^immelBau^n, 2So ^elbengeifter nieberfd)au'n, Unb jdeitDort ntit ftolger ^antpf eSluft : 15 „S)u, ^tliein, bleibft beutfc^, trie meine 93ruft!" Sieb 35aterlanb 2c. ^ftcmtiett mWtn ftettltt^fett = able to cope with foreign powers. 637-638] PARTICIPLES 221 25 537 „ t)on jebem ber oben genannten ^riegel 222 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN [o3t»-640 4. 2Bk l^eifet hie hent\ii)e 9^ationQll3t)mne? SSann tour be fie ge= fd)rteben? SSann ift fie toteber t)tel gefungen toorben? 5. ©e^en ©ie bie fiinftc 3^ile iinb bie fedjfte 3etle in ben 3m= ^erottt) um! II. Translate: 1. Without being able to live itself out, the land was exhausted by a new war. 2. The exhausted country was humiliated by the proud conqueror. 3. The reformation which revolutionized many old customs occurred in the six- teenth century. 4. The Prussian Kingdom was destined to raise the humiliated country. 5. The Watch on tae Rlmie was made the German national hymn. LESSON 67 539 GRAMMAR REVIEW 1. Imperative— See App. 200-204. 2. Compound Verbs — See App. 80. 3. Infinitives— See App. 205-213. 4. Participles— See App. 214-217. 540 REVIEW EXERCISES 1. 1. Let the Rhine be the boundary of united Germany! 2." Go, German youths, and fight for your native land ! 3. Look at the beautiful cities, with their famous works of ai t. 4. Without having seen the art of south Germany, one has not seen the country. 5. The often praised scenery of the Rhine is said to be the most romantic in the world. II. 1. 93efd)reiben @ie bie fiibbeutfrfien ©tobte ! 2. 8e|en @te bie 9^ational^t)mne in ^rofa um! 3. Semen @ie bie 9fiattonaU)t)mne augtuenbig! APPENDIX GERMAN ALPHABET « a a ^'cy all a » ^ ^ bay b ® jr ..^^ tsay c 2) ^ ^ day (1 e ?? / / ay e f ® 3 f gay liah ee g li i 3 « 7 r ^ yot kali J k 8 =S? ^ ell 1 m P^ in ^if^^^ em 111 111 Stt ^ n ^^ enn n ^ .-^^ oil o GERMAN ALPHABET 225 X ^-^«^^ err in b^rry r ® ^ f« /k^ ess 2 :r t V tay u ^ tt oo SB ^ t) .-^/^ fow 2B ^^ to .^^X-^^ vay a^ ^ f ■t icks ?> ^ i| -y ipsilon Modified Vowels { a Umlautc r tset Diphthongs u w U ^ it .^ «K^ ^^ f« ^^^^^ For the pronunciation of modified f||^| fjf* itl ^^^ ^^ vowelsanddiphtliongs, seeApp. 6-8. ^^ LxX-^^ III ^^tyC-^^ 226 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN ■-^/^^^ ''/^^.^<^^>^<^^^ ti^//^f^^ Compound Consonants APPENDIX The following statement of the essential facts of German Gram- mar falls under the heads (a) of Inflections, ^) of Syntax. Rare usages, poetic forms, and complicated constructions have not been treated, as this Appendix purports to be, not a complete reference grammar, but a concise statement of those facts which are basic in their nature and which should be committed to memory by every student of German. Inflections which resemble each other, as definite article and demonstrative pronoun, indefinite article and possessive pronoun, etc., are placed side by side. Wherever actual usage differs from tradi- tional forms (as found in most grammars) the former is given prefer- ence. This is especially noticeable in the inflections of the subjunctive. PRONUNCIATION VOWELS Quantity I Vowels are long and short. Care must be taken to distinguish quantity. Long vowels are drawn out to greater length than in Eng- lish, short vowels are more decidedly clipped. A few rules can be given for the quantity of vowels, but in most cases the student must rely upon the authority of the teacher or the dictionary, and must endeavor to train his ear to the correct sound. (a) Vowels are always long [1] when doubled— §aar, 9Keer; [2] when followed by silent 1^ — ^cit)t, me^r; [3] i when followed by silent c — l^ier, ikb, 227 228 APPENDIX (b) Vowels are always short when followed by a double conso- nant — f oUen, tiaden. (c) Stressed vowels are generally long in an open syllable, i. e. one that does not end in a consonant (remember that r* single consonant always goes with the following vowel in syl- lable division)— btt, ^a^ben, le^gen. (d) Stressed vowels are generally short in a closed syllable — ba^/ ©pCtling, tDcg (before t, VX, and k in the pronouns, the vowel is long though the syllable is closed, bet, er, bent, ben). (e) Unstressed vowels are generally short — bin, ntit, ^o'n'tg, 5lbler. (/) Diphthongs are long, Quality 2 Vowels are termed front or back-vowels, according as they are articulated in the front part of the mouth (the hard palate), with the tongue pushed forward, or in the back part of the mouth (the soft palate), with the tongue drawn back. A fundamental difference between German and English lieo in the fact that German abounds in back vowels, and that such front vowels as exist are pronounced very decidedly in the front of the mouth, with the tongue pushed far for- ward, whereas in English, the tongue is more flaccid and the vowel much more neutral. The effect upon German vowels is to make thetn much fuller, clearer, and more sonorous than the corresponding Eng- lish sounds. 3 It is impossible to present through the eye an adequate idea of the sounds that make up a foreign tongue. An approximation is here attempted, but it must be used with great caution. Long Vowels 4 Long Vowels resemble the sounds that we give to Latin long vowels according to the so-called " Roman pronunciation. " Remem- ber always to articulate the vowels clearly, keeping the tongue more tense and the lips more active than in English. a resembles a in art e resembles e in eight i resembles i in pique resembles o in slow U resembles oo in swoon APPENDIX 229 Short Vowels 5 The short vowels resemble the long ones in quality but are clipped very short. ui • ^.-^ • i a resembles a m artificial e resembles e in yellow i resembles i in tin has no equivalent in English. Very much like German long shortenejd. Not at all like English o. u resembles u in pwt. Diphthong 6 Diphthong is the combining of two vowels to form one sound. There are three of these in German : ai and et resemble i in bind au resembles ow in how cu (an) resembles oy in hoy (with greater stress on second part of diphthong). All diphthongs are long. Umlant 7 Umlaut is the fronting of a vowel produced* by anticipation of the front vowel I in the following syllable. The mind visualizes the whole of a long word before a single syllable of it is uttered. If a later syllable contains something remarkable, the fact is apt to so attract the attention, that the tongue involuntarily seeks to form the required sound before the right time. This may lead to a decided modification of sounds by anticipation. A front vowel immediately following a back vowel naturally attracts the attention. The vowel nearest the front of the mouth is I. If, therefore, an i is anticipated in a word, all preceding vowels are drawn forward to meet it. For this reason a becomes a becomes d u becomes ii au becomes du 8 Observe that these vowels remain modified after the i sound that caused the change has disappeared, hence the prevalence in modern German of umlaut without visible cause. These sounds have no exact counterpart in English (except iitt which, like eu, is pronounced like oy in English). Hence they must be learned by continuous practice. A few helpful suggestions may, however, be given. a — very much like German e (as in they) d — round the lips as though to whistle and articulate German e ft— round the lips as though to whistle and articulate German i 230 APPENDIX . CONSONANTS 9 With a few exceptions, German consonants are pronounced as in English, only with more vigor. The lips are used more forcibly, the glottis is closed more energetically. Especially is this true of finals, which are rendered with a complete stopping of the breath so as to produce a total break between words — the very opposite of French liaison. For this reason the medials, b, h, are pronounced like t, p, when they are found at the end of a word. ttttb is pronounced like nnt, oB like op, etc. f O SPECIAL DEVIATIONS FROM ENGLISH (a) ^ — This has two different sounds according to the kind of vowel that precedes it. 1. After the bad- vowels tt, 0, U, tttt, it is guttural (far back). 2. After tho front vow Is t, \, a, 3, U, tttt, ett, t\, and after all consonants, it is palatal (farther front). A practical hint for pronouncing this difficult sound is as follows: Sound the preceding vowel very distinctly, then suddenly cease vocal- izing and c^ntinue breathing. The right sound will always follow. (Caution — Do not pronounce if like ^. The former is simply ft, pro- nounced as in English bacfc, but more forcibly.) ip) Q — At the beginning hard as in go. Medially and finally it approaches *he ^ sounds, with the variations noted in (a), (c) j resembles y in young. (c?) ti resembles /. (c) tQ resembles English v (but more loosely articulated). (/) f(^ resembles sh in sTiould. (g) f — At the beginning like English z, medially und finally like escaping steam (so also ^ In combination with t, p, it approaches f^ (but not qjite o forcibly). (h) g = fs (this must be carefully observed, as the English z sound is used for initial [ in German). (i) Jig is nasalized as ng in singer, never like ng in hunger, except in a few proper names. , , U) i\cn (from Latin) pronounced as though jtOtt, i.e., tsion. (jc) ^g = X as in fox. APPENDIX 231 DECLENSION THE ARTICLE 1,l:»t«"«e. If I. Definite— (a) Every case has a characteristic ending. (6) Like the def. art. are declined the demonstra- tive, relative, interrogative and indefinite pronouns and strong adjectives. (c) The def. art. and these pronouns are followed by the weak declension of the adjective. Definite Article Demonstrative Pronoun Singular Plural Singular Plural m. f. n. m. f. n. m. f. n. m. f. n. NOM. bcr bie ta& bie biefer biefc bie[c§ biefe Gen. be§ ber t>c^ ber biefeS biefer bicfcS biefer DAT. bem bcr bent ben biefem biefer biefem biefei? AGO. ben bie boS bie biefen biefe biefeg biefe II, Indefinite — (a) Three forms (nom. masc, and nom. and ace. neut.) are uninflected. (6) Like the indef. art. are declined the pos- sessive pronouns and fctll. (c) The indef. art. and the poss. pron. are followed by mixed adjectives. Indefinite Article Singular m. f. n. N. ein eine ein G. eineS einer eineS D. einem einer einem A. einen eine ein Possessive Pronoun Singular Plural m. f. n. m. f. n. mein meine mein meine nteineS meiner meineS meiner meinem meiner meinem meinen meinen meine mein meine 232 APPENDIX NOUNS GENDER 13 As a rule the gender follows the natural sex. Ex., bct SD^ann, tie d^au, Jio§ ^inb. Exceptions: — (a) All nouns in ^cn and lein are neuter, regard- less of their meaning: ba§ SWdbc^en, ba§ f^routcin, ha^Wann6)tn (the little man). (6) Occasionally one word forms an exception, as ha^ SBeib (the woman). 14 Endings determine gender: (a) Masc. : ct, Ultfi, i^ tfi — bcr S3Qc!er (baker), bcr grueling (spring), hex SSiiterid^ (tyrant), bcr ^cifig (cage). (5) Fem. : Ic, el, l^cit, itli, ft^ttft, «tt9, e,* in, if, ton — bic Sortie (company), bie S3dcferci (bakery), bie f^rei^eit (freedom), bic 2)an!barfeit (gratitude), bic f^reunbfd^oft (friendship), bic SSo^nung (dwelling), bie g3lumc (flower), t>k ^0(i)in (woman cook), bie £t)ri! (lyric poetry), bie ficftton (lesson). 15 But few additional rules can be given. Most nouns must be studied with the proper article without regard to rule. (a) Masc. : 1. Names of seasons, months, days of week, ber ^rii^" ling, ber ^anuar, ber 2)onnerjtag. 2. Monosyllabic nouns derived from the stems of strong verbs, ber @ang (from ge:^en=walk). (5) Fem. : Names of trees, flowers, most German rivers, bie ©idje (oak), bie 9?ofe, bie SScfer; but bcr U^tin. (e) Neut. : Substantive infinitives, and collectives formed with prefix ge: ha^ 6e!^en (seeing), ha^ ©cbirge (the mountain system). Almost every word ending in niS and fal: ta§ ©e^eimnig (secret), ha^ S^idfal (fate). 16 A few nouns have two genders with difference of meaning ttt S3anb (volume) tier 93unb (league) bag S3anb (ribbon) bttS 93unb (bundle) ber ©ee (lake) ber Xeil (part) bie ©ee (sea) bag 2:eil (share) •For masculines in C cf. 23 c. APPENDIX 233 DECLENSION OF NOUNS GENERAL. 1 7 (a) All feminines are uninflected in the singular. (6) All nouns add n in the dat. pi. iS 19 NUMBER OF DECLENSIONS Sing. Pl. I. Strong Gen. (e)8 i—,C,tV II. Weak G. D. A. (c)rt All cases i (c)n III. Mixed Gen. (c)8 ( (e)tt I. Strong Declension Endings: Gen. Sing. (e)§ Plurals — , t, tV Plural, no ending (umlaut rare) " e ( " more frequent) "ft ( " always) Classes (3 20 tiass 1 1 Plurals — Membership: (ct) Polysyllabic Masculines and Neuters ending in cl, tn, tt. (b) Polysyllabic Neuters ending in i^cn, Icin, and e. (c) Two Feminines, bie aJJutter and bie Xod^ter. Examples (a) (&) Sing. PL. Sing. PL. NOM. ber ©arten bie ©arten* t)a^ fjraulein bie graulcin Gen. beg ©arteng ber ©orten be§ f^rciuleing ber ^rdulein DAT. bent ©arten ben ©drten bent graulein ben ^roulein Ace. ben (3arten bie ©arten Sing. ha^ fjraulein (c) PL. bie §raulein NOM. bie muttex bie ajiiitter Gen. ber aJJntter ber aJJiitter Dat. ber aJiutter hen ajJiittent Ace. bie abutter bie ajJuttec ♦ A number of nouns in this class take the umlaut in the plural. No rule cao be given. Observe each noun carefully. 234 APPENDIX 21 Clas8 2p-«^-?^'^g- Plurals Membership: (a) Monosyllabic Masculines. (6) A few monosyllabic feminines and neuters, as btc ^anb, bie SBanb, tie Wlau^, bie 8tabt, ba§ ^-a^r, ha^ ^aax, ba§ ^f erb. (c) A few polysyllabic masculines in Ig, tttg and Htlfl and neuters in nU and fal, ber Sii«9ii"9/ ^^^ ^onig, t>a& ©e^eimnig, ba§ ©c^icffal NOM. Gen. DAT. Ace. (a) Sing. ber ©ol^n be§ (Sotinetf bent (So:^n(e)* ben ©ot)n PL. bie ©ol^ne ber (SoQne ben ©o|nett bie 8o^nc (&) sing, Sing. btc SSanb ber SSanb ber SKanb bie SSanb The omission of this C is a PL. bie SSanbet ber SBcinbe ben SBcinbett bie SSanbc ♦ Monosyllables may take an t in the dat. matter of euphony. t AH feminines and many naasculines of this class take the umlant to form the plural. N. G. D. A. 22 Sing. be§ Sa^re§ bent ^a^r(e) PL. bie ^a^xt ber Sa^re ben Sat)ren bie ^a^rc Sing. ber Mngting be§ §iingUng8 bent ^iingling ben ^tingling (c) PL. ^ungltnge "iinglinge iinglingctt bie ^iinglingc Class a J ^®^- ^^^S- (^)^ Liass 6 J Plurals tV Membership: (a) Monosyllabic Neuters. (6) A few monosyllabic masculines as ber SQiann, ber aSolb, ber ©eift, ber SSurnt. (c) Nouns in tttlll (mostly neuter, sometimes masculine). (a) Sing. NOM. ba§ §au§ Gen. be§ §aufe8 DAT. bent §aufe Ace. bag §aug PL. NOM. bici baufcr* Gen. ber. |)aufcr DAT. ben panfcnt Ago. bie, gaufcr Examples (P) Sing. ber SlJJann be§ 9!JJannc8 bent SO^anne ben SD^ann PL. bie Wanntt ber aPcanner ben SKdnncrn bie Wlanntv (c) Sing. bo§ Stitertum beg Slltertuntg bent 5lltertunt ha^ 2lltertuni PL. bie Stitertiintcr ber 5tltertiintcr ben 2tltertumettt tie Slltertiimer •Plurals always have the umlaut If the stem vowel permits. This class con tains no feminines. APPENDIX 235 23 n. Weak Declension Singular (c)tt (except in nom.) Plural (e)tt Membership: (a) Polysyllabic Feminines (except WlvLitex, Sod^ter), (6) Some monosyllabic feminines — bie U!^r, bie i^rau, bie Slrt, bie S3a^n, bie i8urg, bie ^flic^t, bie ©aat. (c) Masculines in e, ber ^nabe, ber -Su^ge, ber ®attc, ber 9?abe, ber §afe, ber fiotue, ber §eibe. (d) A limited number of masculines that have lost this e, ber 9Jfenfc^, ber ^etb, ber ^irt, ber giirft, ber ®raf, ber ^err, ber ^axx, ber £)d^§, ber S3ar, ber %ou (e) Masculines of foreign origin with the accent on the last syllable, as ber ©tubent, ber eiefant, ber tatnerab, ber mutuant Examples (a) (6) (c) (d) Singular Nom. bie geber bie %xavL ber ^nabe ber 9Kenf(!^ Gen. ber fjeber ber grau t>e^ ^nabett beS 9[Renicl(iett DAT. ber gebcr ber grau bent ^nabcn bem 90^enfd^ett Ago. btc geber bie fjrau ben Sl^nabctt ben aJienfd^ett Plural Nom. tie gebcrti bie %xautn* bie ^nabcn bie ^en\6)tn Gen. bet fjebem ber graucn ber tnabcn ber SD^enfc^en DAT. ben fjebern tim %xautn ben ^naben ben SKenfdiett Ago. bie geberti bie iJrauett bie ^nabcn bie SKenfd^ett ♦ The weak nouns never take the umlaut to form the plural. No neuters are weak. Singular (e) Plural Nom. ber (Stubent bie (Stubentm Gen. be§ ©tubentm ber ©tubentcn DAT. bem (Stubentctt ben ©tubentm Ace. ben ©tubentm bie ©tubentctt ®er ^err (the gentleman or the master) takes tl to form the G., D., A. singular and ett to form all the cases of the plural. ber fierr bie §errctt be§ |)ecrn ber ©errcn bem ^errn ben ^errm ben ^errn bie £)errm 236 APPENDIX 24 III* Mixed Declension Singular Strong Gen. Sing. (c)8 Plural Weak Plural (c)tt 25 Membership: (a) Masculines in e that have become contami- nated with Strong I., ber ©laubc, bcr ^ame, hex S3u(^[tabe* (6) Some monosyllabic masculines, ber ©c^merj, ber ©ee, ber ©taat, ber ©tro^t. (c) Some neuters, t>a^ ^uge, bo§ Df)r, bo§ S3ctt, t>a^ ^emb, ba§ @nbe. Examples (a) (&) (c) Singular / — ^^s NoM. bcr 9?ame(tt) ber ©Amer^ ba§ §erj ha^ 5Iugc Gen. beg Sf^amend* beg ©c^mergeg beg ^er^ett^* beg Stugeg Dat. bem Seamen bem ©c^tnerj bent ^ergctt bent 5Iuge Ace. ben Seamen ben ©d)nter5 bag ^erj bag 2luge Plural NoM. bie SfJontent ^ie ©c^ntergctt bie feergett bte 5lugen Gen. ber S^iantcji ber ©c^ntergcn ber ©ergctt ber Slugeji Dat. ben S^Jamett ben ©d)tner§ett ben ^ergctt hen ^lugen Ace. bie ^anten bie ©d^ntergeil bie ^ergett bie Slugeu *Note that the contamination of these two classes has produced in all the nouns under (a) a genitive in tlS. In the noun Ptt^, the genitive form is analogical with that of (o). t No umlaut in plural; nofeminines. A few nouns form two plurals with difference of meaning : bie SSorte = (connected speech) bie S3onfe = (benches) bie SBorter = (disconnected words) bie $8anfett = (banks for money) 26 PROPER NOUNS Places— Gen. g. S)ie ©inttJO^ner Serling (the inhabitants of Berlin). If the noun ends with g, g, or j no case ending is affixed. The relation is expressed by means of a preposition — bie @intt)£>^ncr tion^atig. Persons— {a) With the SLTticle—uninflected. ^tv Seinridb M ^einriq bem ^einrid) bctt §einri^ (&) Without the article— Genitive in g or (c)tt8t ^einric^g, gran^igfag, Souifcng, SKarieng, ^^ri^cnS, ^anfens.* ♦ If the noun ends in t, 8, J, or J, (e)ng is added to form Xi^e genitive, la all other cases only g. APPENDIX 237 (a) ib) declined like definite article. Plural toir i^r fie (©ie)* un[er euer il^rec (^l^rct) ung eud^ i^ncn (^l^ncn) un§ end) [le (@ie) 27 PRONOUNS Personal and Keflexive. Possessive declined like indefinite article. Demonstrative Indefinite . . . Interrogative Relative .... 28 ^Ii6 Personal Pronoun Singular ra. f. n. N. id^ bu er fie c§ G. meiner beiner feiner i^rer feiner D. mir bir i^m i^r il^m A. mic^ bid^ i^n fie eg ♦ Used In conventional conversation for 3d pers. sing, and plural. Reflexives 29 Singular Plural m. f. n. m. f. n. NoM. — — _ _ _ _ Gen. _ _ _ _ _ _ DAT. mir bir fidb unS euA fii Ace. mid) bid) fiq ung tuq \i 30 The other pronouns may be divided into two classes, according as they follow the declension of the definite or that of the indefinite article (cf. 11 and 12). Possessives 31 The possessive pronouns follow the declension of the indefi- nite article (cf. 12). f. n. Pl. unf(e)re unfer unj(e)re nnf(e)rer unfer(e)§ unf(e)rcr unf(e)rer unfer (e)m unfer (e)tt unf(e)re unfer unf(e)re * When two unaccented C's occur in successive syllables, one may be omitted. 32 The possessives are : mein, bein, fein, i!^r, unfer, euer. In inflection they agree in number, gender, and case with the noun which they modify. For the possessive + noun may be substituted : ber, bie, t>a^ meinige; ber, bie, ba§ meine; meiner, meine, meine§. The declension of these forms is given under adjectives (cf. 43 and 44). 33 Possessive compounds— With the prepositions UieQett and l^aKcV and itm . . . MUn (on account of, for the sake of) the genitive stem and the suffix ct forms a compound: meinettoeaen, meinetfialber, um meinetioitten (for mv sake). NOM. Gen. DAT. Acc. m. unfer unfer(c)g* unfer(e)m unfer(e)tt 238 APPENDIX 34 Demonstratiyes and Indefinites Sing. PL. ber beffen bem ben bie berctt ber bie beffen bem ba§ bic beretl benett bie The demonstrative and indefinite pronouns are: ber, biefcr, jcncr, felber, foli^er, mandjer, jeber, jebtoeber, jeglicfier, einer. The only deviation from the inflection of the definite article is in Jjer which has taken on a distinctive su^x.in the genitive singular and genitive and dative plural. The Demonstrative Pronoun Sing. Pl. N. biefer =e =e^ biefc G. biefeg =er ^e§ biefer D. biefem ^er *em biefen A. biefen =e -e^ btefe 35 For regular demonstratives may be substituted berfelbe, ber^ jcnige. In the declension of these compounds the first part takes the declension of the article, the second of the weak adjective (cf. 42). Other indefinites are: jemanb (somebody), jebermann (everybody), niemanb (nobody), man (corresponding to the French on, not easily translated, man fagt=they say). These are generally uninflected, though they may take (e)§ in the genitive (except mtttt, which is used only in the nominative, taking eittem and etttett in dat. and ace). Ex. —Gen. jebermann^; niemanbe§, jemanbeg. 36 Relative and Interrogative Relative: toclAer, toex, tt)a§, ber. Interrog.: tt)elc6er? tt)er? ttjaS? ttJa§ fiir etn? Relative Sing. Sing. m. & f . n. Sma. N. toetd^er toeld^e njetc^eS ttjer h)a§ ber bie ba^ G. beffen beren beffen* meffen (ttjeffen) beffen beren beffen D. ttJelA A. ttjclc^ em n^elcber n)eld)em en toelc^e melc^eg mem mem bem ber bem men ma§ ben bie ba§ Plural Plural Plural N. hjeld^c — bie G. beren — beren D. tt)elAen toeldhc — benen A. — bie ♦The genitive of the relative tiiel^et is not used; the genitive of the relative Oet has taken its place. For other deviations from inflection of def: art. cf. 34. Interrogative 37 Sing. Without Noun NOM. n?el(her 'C ^eS mer and ma* ma§ iir einer -e =e8 Gen. welAeg ==er ^eS same as rel. ma§ iir eineg -er *e8 DAT. njelffiem =er *em mag iir einem 'tt 'tm Ago. ttjeld^en 't =c8 ma§ iiir einen =e t& PL. (m. f. n.) With Noun NOM tt)elAe ttja§ fiir tin, eine, eltt Gen. tt)el*ef ma§ fiir eineS, ^er, ==e§ Dat. ttjelAett ma§ fiir etnem, -er, -m Ago. ttJeiSc toa^ fiir etnen, -t, cm APPENDIX 239 38 ADJECTIYES r Strong — when used without article or pronoun. 8 Declensions j Weak — after definite article or pronoun. \ Mixed — after indefinite article or pronoun. 39 Strong adj. — without article; declined like definite article Singular N. guter 9Kann gute f^rau guteS tinb G. gutc^ 9D^anne§* gutetr f^rau gutc§ ^inbeS* D. (iuUm SPfJanne guter i^tau gutem ^inbe A. guten SQJann gutc %tavL guteS ^inb Plural N. gutc Wl'dnnex, f^rauen, ^inber G. gutct aJldnner, grauen, ^inber D. gutctt SO^annem, i^xauen, ^inbem A. gutc Wlannex, fjrauen, ^iuber ♦ In gen. sing. masc. and neut. the weak ending (Ctt) is often used instead of eg to avoid recurrence of the sibilant. -Fa;.— f(f)ted)tCtt SBaffer^. 40 Weak adj. — after definite article or pronoun (inflectional syl- lables e or Ctt). Singular N. ber gutc SO^ann bie gutc %tau bag gutc ^iub G. beg gutctt "ifRanne^ ber gutcn grau beg gutctt ^iube8 D. bcm gutctt SJiauue ber gutcn %xau bem gutcn ^inbe A. ben gutcn SD^ann bie gutc fjrau bag gutc ^inb Plural N. bie gutcn Wannex, grauen, ^inber Q. ber gutcn 9Jianuer, §rauen, ^tuber D. ben guten SD^aunern, ^rauen, ^iubern A. bie gutcn SJidnner, ^rauen, ^inber 4 1 Mixed adj.— a/^er indefinite article and pronoun. {Weak when article is inflected, strong when article is not inflected.) Singular N. cin guter 9JJanu eine gutc i^tan eiu gutcS ^inb Q. eiueg gutcn Wanned einer gutcn gtau etneg gutcn ^iubeg D. eiuem guten SD^aune einer guten §rau einem gutcn ^inbe A. cinen gutcn aJiann eine gutc i^xau ein gutc0 ^inb Plural N. feine gutcn Wdnmx, i^xauen, ^inber Q. feiner gutcn Mannex, grauen, ^inber D. feiuen gutcn SQidnueru, grauen, ^inbern A. letne gutcn 2Jidnuer, g^^auen, ^inber 240 APPENDIX 42 The demonstrative compounds that are composed of hex, tie, hai, plus the adj. felb or jenig are declined like weak adjectives. (Not in frequent use.) N. G. D. A.- berjentge be^jenigett bemjenigett benjenigen Singular biejenige berjenigeii berjenigen biejenige bagjenige be^jeuigctt bemjenigett ba^jenige PL. biejenigett berjenigett benjenigett biejenigett 43 1. So also are declined the possessives ber, tile, bttS tttettte or meitttge and the indefinite tier ettte. Singular N. G. D. A. N. G. D. A. ber meine be§ meinett bem meinett ben meinett bie meinett ber meinett ben meinett bie meinett bie meinige bfl§ eine bee meinigett be§ einett ber meinigett bem einett bie meinige • bag eine Plural (all genders) v bie meinigett " bie einett ber meinigett ber einett ben meinigett ten einett bie meinigett bie einett 2. ^and)ex, melc^er, [oli^er are occasionally used without the end- ing: manc^, tt)e(d), [old^. In that case the adj. following would have the strong ending. Singular N. manc^ guter Wami G. manc^ guteg(ett) Tlanne^ D. mond^ gutetti SO^anne A. manc^ gntett 3Kann Plural mand) gnte 3Kanner mand) guter Wannet mand) gutett Tlannetn mand) gate 9)ianner 3. The strong declension is also used after a personal pronoun : ill armer 2Kann! SSa§ l^at man bir-, tn armeg ^inb, getan? 4. Also after the indeclinable pronouns and numerals: etttia^, ttir^tS, afferlet, etc: etnjag guteS 2Ba[fer; aUerlei fc^one ©ac^en; nic^t^ SBa^reg. APPENDIX 241 44 The possessives and the indefinite pronoun clllCt when used without preceding article or following noun are inflected like the strong adjective. Singular N. meincr -t "t% eincr einc eincg G. meineg -tx ti cincg eincr eincg D. nteinem=er=cm eincm eincr eincm A. meinen 't =e8 einctt einc eincS Pl. (all genders) (No Plural) N. meinc G. meincr » D. ntetnctt A. meinc ■ bcr, biC; \)a^ meinc // // „ meinigc us: This is mine, etc.= • 3)a8 \\i ■ mciner =C 'C^ mcin, bein, fein, unfcr, cuer t (but never hai ift i^r). The pronominal adjectives oHetlei, tjielerlei, mand^crlci, bcrlci, fotc^ctlci, attcr^anb were originally attributive genitives (as the gen, ending cr still shows). They are now used as simple, indeclinable adjectives or as substantives. Ex.—^HtxU\ Scute, ^ii) l^abc dielfTlei ju tun. 5 Ifnmerals 1 cin8 13 brei^e^n 50 fiinfsig 2 3tt)ci 14 bierge^n 60 fec^aig 8 bret 15 fiinfjc^n 70 [iebaig 4 bier 16 fec^se^n 80 acfitgig 5 filnf 17 [iebge^n 90 neungig 6fed)g 18 ac^tge^n 100 ^unbert 7 fieben 19 neungel^n 121 ^unbert einunbjnjanjig 8 a6)i 20 attjansig 200 gnjei^unbert 9 neun 21 einunbgnjangig 1,000 taufenb 10 ge^n 22 gtoeiunbgWangig 1,121 taufenb ein^unbert cin« 11 elf 30 breifeig unbgttJcfngig 12 8tt)oIf 40 bierjig 1,000,000 einc Shimon 242 APPENDIX 46 The cardinal numerals are indeclinable, except eltt?, which, when used adjectively, has the forms of cttt, CittC, Citt, the same as the indefinite article. (Occasionally gtuel and bret are found inflected in gen. : gttJcier ; and dat. : breictt). 47 ^unbert and taufenb may be used substantively and are then declined. Ex. — ^unbcrtc toaxen ba (Hundreds were there). @r f^at XaU'' fcnben unred^t getan (He did wrong to thousands). They are then declined like the plural of the definite article (e, er, eil, C). 48 Ordinals Ordinals are formed from cardinals by the addition of the suflSx t to all numbers from 2 to 19 — bcr neunge^^nte, and ft from 20 on— bet stponsig^e. The ordinal of eitlS is erji (ber crfte) " brel " britt (ber brittc) They may be declined strong, weak, or mixed, but can not be used without an inflection. Henry II = §einri(i) ber Bh^eUe §einricf)§ beg S^^itetl ^einric^ bent Bl^^itm ^cinrid^ ben 3^eitctt The ordinal adverbs are: crftcttS, 5tt)eiteil8, brtttettS (first, secondly, thirdly, etc.). 49 ADTEBBS Adverbs do not differ in form from adjectives, except that they are not declinable. Often they may be compared like adjectives. 50 Comparison of Adjectives and Adverbs The regular comparison of adjectives is formed by adding er and (e)P to the stem of the word, and is usually accompanied by umlaut. lang Ifinger langft (ber langfte, am langflen) 9ro6 grbfeer gr5§t (8 omitted for euphony) hitj fiirger fiirseft tniibe miibcr miibeft APPENDIX 243 51 Without umlaut: flat flarer flarft fd^Iau fdjlauer fc^lau(c)ft bunfel bunfler bunfelft 52 Irregular Comparison (a) Change of 1^ and ^ (d) is used finally and before CQOSonants, ^ is medial) : na^c nd^er naii^ft (b) Change in stem: ^ gut bcffcr beft btel mel^r mcift 53 Declension of Comparative and Superlative The Comparative is declined like the syllable being added to the er. ^a?. — Strong beffcrer SBein befferc8(ett) SBeineg befferem SBeine bcfferen SSein beffere SBeine beiferet 28einc befferen SBeinen bcifere SSeine Weak bie frf)onerc %xan ber [c^onerctt Stau ber fc^oneren f^rau bie [d^onere grau bie fd^onerm t^i^auen ber ben bie positive, the inflectional Mixed ein ^5^ere8 ^Ci\x% eineg l^o^eren ^aufeS einem p^eren ^aufc ein l^bl^ereg ^auS ^o^ere §aufer ^o^erer ^aufer l^ol^ercn ^aufern l^o^ere ^aufer 54 The Superlative can be used regularly only with the definite article, hence is always weak. Ex.—\itx nodifte g^ii^ling bie ndc^ften f^i^ii^Ungc beg ndd^ften iJrii:^ling§ ber nddijictt ^rii^Ungc bent ndd^fien ?5i^ii^Ung ben nddjftm f^rii^lingen ben ndcl)|ien grii^ling bie nddiften fJ^ii^linQC 55 In the predicate the phrase am en may be substituted. Ex—^axi ift icr Btofetc or ^arl \\i am orofeteti 8m gtii^ten, originally adverbial, can be used only in the predicate^ never attributively. 244 APPENDIX 56 Both bcr fitdfetc and am GrofftCtt are relative in meaning, i. e., they suggest a comparison with other objects of the same class, ^atl tft bet fitdfete or om grdfetctl means that he is larger than the other boys before mentioned. When the superlative is used to designate merely a high degree of the quality, vsrithout definite comparison, we substi- tute for the attributive superlative fttt^etft or pii^ft "1- the positive. {Ex.—%Vi^tx\i Grofec SSaume toadifen im ®orten, or pci^ft anocttc^mc Seute toaren gugcgen.) For the adverbial phrase am Ibcftett we substitute atlfS fiejie, but this can never be used adjectively. {Ex.—-> 5^ fi ^;^ 1=1 o cu fi w ^ C i jp fe fi fi fi !f^ *-> fi^jE ft: fc g f S a M M P OQ o o i fi s a fi fi fi'^fifil fifis^sfia 2 % & 7Q 1 fi a H g W 05 fc fc ft t No^oiH-^"^^^ fi fi a fa § • Oh CSS ^ *^ «-> "IT ^ « « a fc t fc rf ^ s fis^ r§^^ ^ a K «^ •'^ *-> « « e iti HH >o >o '^— - *"" i^ £ ^1^ I" Si « rt *-» a ^ix. fe ft ft ■9 -^ ^ ^ '-» w g fi fi fi g fi fi Is >g S ^ 3 ^ !^ fc fc ft «a-SsC^«a P^-g-s fian sErj3-^j_^^=*^sS3-p^i3i5a v»fi « ^ a a IS fie aS'ig. a a » a » b- g 03 ti ma 53 fits tt'^ 5 S fii^-iE 'B^ 5 H f^ >o 1" ** -e S J f^ fi fi e ? s - if eS g a a a * ft o ■g ft fe ft ft ft go « K a -i^ S -M s S fi B ^-■^U ^ B S3 »• ft e ft « a ^ a t^ ^ ,, ja jB ^ >0 »0 vO S ^^^ e^ * * * * * J ' ' I t ^ ' a ft . H «. ft ft ft ft ft •lSrB-g|?^i|iSB5§i *« ^ -c^ ,000 O vO >0 > — sC^ -iS- --*2 'B ^ :« ."S 53 C o ^ - 'B' 5 M p S& .2i jti- o •*:* rs D '** Q S „ -Si M-^ /3 . Bis fi i^"^ 248 APPENDIX 63 Conditional I. tc^ njurbe tjahen* \6) ttJurbe fein (etc.) IL ic^ touvte Qet)aht tjahcn* id) tvuxhe genjefen fein (etc.) I. ic^ luiirbc merben (etc.) II. ic^ toiirbe geirorbcn [cin (etc.) 64 Imperatives t)ahe (bii) fei (hu) toerbe ]^ab(e)t (il)r) fcib (i^r) hjcrbet (xp) ^aben ©ie [eien ©ie toerben ©ie 65 Infinitives Pres. Ijahen fein hJc^rben Perf. gc^abt l^oben gcircfen fein 0cn)orben fein 66 Participles Pres. l^obcnb fcienb hjerbenb Perf. ge^abt gettefen genjorben 67 Use of Tense Auxiliaries I. V ■ y form perfect and pluperfect tenses. {forms future and future perfect tenses, passive voice, conditional mode. 68 Use of labctt ^ 1. All active transitive verbs. l^dbftt \ 2. All intransitives, except those that express \ transition of place or condition. 69 llcpresentative Verbs that take fcltt 1. Transition of Place abreifcn = to start on a journey auffte^en = to get up . bcgegnen = to meet cilen = to hurry (but fld^ cilctt takes ^aben) erfd^einen = to appear f al^ren = to ride, to go faKen = to fall (but the causative f dttctt takes I^aben) ♦The full paradigm is: tc^ tDiirbe Ijaben (ge^obt l^aben) bu tt)iirbeft „ „ „ ettciirbe » « » flicgen = to fly fliel^en = to flee flicgen = to flow fofgen = to follow ge^en = to go gfeiten (ou§gtciten)=to glide, to slip frimmen = to climb ffettern = to clamber fommen = to come njtr ttJiirben l^aben (gel^abt l^aben) i^r ttJiirbct „ h n fie toiirben „ „ „ APPENDIX 249 frlcd^cn = to crawl fc^ttjimmen = to swim laufen = to run finfen = to sink reiten = to ride < f|)ringen = to spring rennen = to run fteigen = to climb rinnen = to flow fturgen = to fall, to dash frf)feicf)en = to creep treten = to step fcf)reiten = to step toeid^en = to withdraw jie^cn = to wander (but jie^en = to draw, takes ^aben) 70 2. Transition of Condition aufttJQC^en = to wake up (but ttja^ gebeit)en = to flourish d)en takes ^aben) gelingen = to succeed einfc^Iafen = to go to sleep (but genefen = to recover fj^lafctt takes l^aben) gtiicfen = to succeed entbtii^en = to burst into bloom fd)eitern = to fail (but Un^tn takes l)ahen) fc^melgen = to melt entfcf)Iafen = to go to sleep, to die fterben = to die ertrinfen = to drown tjerarmen = to become impover- erujac^en = to awaken ished erfrieren = to freeze to death tjer^ungern = to die of hunger tDai)\en = to grow The verbs fcitt and blei^Ctt also take the auxiliary feitt, although the transition idea is not so plainly apparent as in the other verbs of the above lists. 7 I Inflection of Verbs (a) The inflection of weak and of strong verbs is identical, except in the formation of the preterite and of the perf. participle as shown above. The personal endings and tense auxiliaries are the same for both. (5) Exception — Strong verbs with the stem vowel c change this e into I or ie in 2d and 3d pers. sing, indie, pres. and 2d imper. ; those with the stem vowel a change this to a in the 2d and 3d pers. sing, indio. pres., but not in imperative. So also tttt in verbs becomes iiU- 72 Subjunctive Mode— The present subjunctive shows none of the irregularities of syncopation or umlaut that we have observed in the indicative. It is formed regularly upon the present stem. In the preterite a distinction is observed between the strong and weak verbs, the former taking the umlaut, the latter not (except in Note— On the following pages will be found the indie, and subj. conjugation Of weak and strong verbs side by side to emphasize the difference in ending; one ▼exb in each case illustrating the l^aBctt verbs and one the f eiit verbs. 250 APPENDIX 73 Weak Verb with j^aBm Indicative SUBJUNCTIVB PRES. i^ licbe bu liebft er liebt i(^ liebte (licbe) t>vi Uefitcft (liebeft) er liebe toir lieben t^r liebt fie lieben tPtr UeBtett (lieben) t^r llcfttet (liebct) fie Ucbten (lieben) Pret. i(^ liebte bu liebtcft er liebte id^ liebte bu liebtcft er liebte ttJtr liebtcn i^r liebtet fie liebten toir liebtcn il^r liebtet fie liebten Perf. td^ f^ahe gelicbt bu ^aft „ er iiat tt)ir liaben „ i^r i)aU „ fie ^aben „ ic^ Wit gelicbt (^abe) bu ^abeft „ er i)cCbt „ toir ptten „ (^aben) i^r^iittft . (^abct) fie liittm ,, (^abcn) Plup. \u folgteft er folgte hJir folgten il^r folgtet fie folgten Perf td^ bin gefolgt bu bift „ er ift n)ir finb „ i^r feib „ fie finb „ Plup. id^ wax gefolgt \)u toacit „ er ttjar „ njir ttjaren „ it|r tt)ar(e)t „ fie njaren „ Fur. x6) ttJerbe folgen bu n)irft „ er njirb „ h)ir ttjerben „ i^x tt)erbet „ fie ttjerben „ Fur. Perf. id) toerbe gefolgt fein bu h)irft „ er toirb „ ttJtr tt)erben „ il^r tuerbet „ lie njerben „ with feltt Subjunctive id) folfitc (forge) t'u folfitcft (foloeft) cr folgc h)ir folgtm (folgen) il)r folgtet (forget) fie folgten (forgen) id^ forgte bu forgteft er forgte ftir f orgten i^r f orgtet fie forgten id) fei geforgt bu feift „ er fei h)ir feien „ i^r feiet „ fie feien „ td^ ware gefolgt bu hjareft „ er todre ;, n)ir ttjoren „ i^x n)Qret „ fie ttjaren „ id) tttitrbe forgen (ttjerbc) t)u ttjerbeft „ er njerbe „ toir toitrtiett « (ttjerben) tl^r toiirbet ,, (werbet) fie ttjiiriiett „ (werben) id^ tturbe geforgt fein (njerbe) bu ttjerbeft er tt)erbe njir toitrbett « (roerben) i^r ioitriiet „ (toextet) fie tourben „ (njcrben) APPENDIX 253 6 Strong Verb with feltt Indicative Subjunctive Pres. ic^ fane icf) fide (fafle) bu faUyt \iVi f afleft er f oEt er faHe toir fallen hJir flcIen (fallen) i^r faUt ilir fldet (faCet) fie fallen fie Helen (fallen) PRET. i^fiel ic^ fiele bu fielft bu fieleft erfiel cr fielc toir fielen hJir fielen i^r fielt i^r fietet fie fielen fie fielen Perf. id} bin gefaHen id^ fei gefoHen bu bift „ bu feieft „ er ift er fei toir finb „ XQ\x feien ,, i^r feib „ tf)r feiet „ fie finb „ fie feien „ Plup. id) war gefallcn id} ttjore gcfallen bu njarft „ bu toareft „ cr toat „ er ttjare „ Xoxx xoaxtn „ ft)ir tt)aren „ i^r tt)ar(e)t „ i^r ttjoret „ fie waren „ fie ttjaren „ Fur, icf) ttjerbe faOcn id) toitrbe fallen (ttierbc) bu njirft „ bu toerbeft ,, er tt)irb „ er hjerbe „ ttJir ttjerben „ toir tnitrben „ (werben) t^r luerbet „ i^r ttiiirbct „ (njerbet) fie ttjerben „ fie ttiiirbett „ (luerben) FuT. Perf . id^ ttJerbe gefaflen fein id} toiirbe gefaflen fein (n)erbe) bu ttjirft „ tw. tt)erbeft „ cr toirb „ er toerbe „ toir ttjerben „ tuir ttiiiriiett „ (ttjerben) i^r n)erbet i^r ttitrbet „ (luerbet) fie ttierben „ fie mitrben „ {xo^titn) 254 APPENDIX. 77 Conditional Weak I. i^ njiirbe UeBctt* II. id) tciirbe gcUeBt laBttt I. id) iDiirbe folgett XL ic^ iDiirbe gefolfit feltl Imperative liebe (bu) fotge (bu) neb(e)t (i^r) forg(e)t (i^r) lieben ©ic folgen @ie Infinitives KcBen fofgen gelicbt ^obm geforgt feln Participles liebcnb fofgcnb fel^enb geliebt gefotgt gefe^en 78 Passive Voice Strong id) ttJiirbe feljctt ic^ iviirbe Qeje^en ^attn id) tuiirbe faHen id^ ttjitrbe gefttaeu feln Pres. Perf. Pres. Perf. fie^ (bu) fe^(e)t (i^r) fel^en ©ic fel^en gcfc^en j^aHen faUe (bu) fall(e)t (i^r) faflen ©ie faKcn gefollen feln fallenb gefaHcn Form: conjugation of toerben -j- perf. part, of verb. Indicative Pres. id^ toerbe gel^ort bu tiiirfl „ er tiilrb ,, ttjirtoerben „ il^r ttierliet „ fie ttierlictt „ Pret. id^ tQurbe gc^ort bu ttmrlieiii „ cr ttmrlic „ ttJir ttiitrliett ,, ii^r ttittrbct „ fie tottrbm „ * The full paradigm is : id^ ttJiirbe liebcn bu ttJilrbeft „ er tDiirbe „ tt)ir toiirbcn liebcn i^r hJiirbet „ fie tuilrben „ Subjunctive id^ ttiiirbc ge^ort (toerbe) bu ttifrbeft „ er toctbc „ toir toiirliett « (tuerbcn) il^r ttiiirliet ,, (tuerbet) fie touthtn „ (toerben) id^ toiirbc ge^ort bu toiltbcfii „ er toiirbe „ toirmiitbctt „ i^r ttiiiriiet „ fie tiiiiriieii ,, id) tDiirbe geliebt ^oben bu ttJiirbeft „ er toiirbe „ ttir hJlirben geliebt ^aben il^r ttJiirbet „ fie hJiirben „ \6) tt)iirbe gefaHen fefn bu tDiirbeft „ er tt)iirbe „ toir ttJiirben gefoUen fcin il^r ttJiirbet „ fie tuiirben « APPENDIX 255 Indicative Subjunctive Perf. xO) h\n ge^ort ttjorben* \^ fei ge^ort ttiorbctt bu m n « bu fcicjl „ w criP /» ct fcl „ /i> \o\xm n n toir feten „ ^# t^r fcm „ tt i^rfeict „ }f fie Pnb ,, It ficfetctt „ II Plup. id^ toar gci^ort tijortm id^ to'dre geprt tooriim bu ttiarfi „ n bu totttefi „ 11 er tour ct er toiirc II toir ttittrett „ tt toirtoiirett „ II i^r ttjttrt ,. n i^r ttidret „ II fie tijaren ,, tt fie toiirnt „ It FuT. id^ ttcrbc ge^ort uierbttt id^ toiirtie ge^ort toerben (tocrbc) bu tiJirft tt 'tiVi toerbcfr „ If er ttjirb It er tocriic „ It njir ttierben „ tt toirttiirbctt „ „ (tocrben) i^r ttjcrbct „ It i^rttiurbet „ „ (n)erbet> fie tticrbtn „ It fie tottrten „ „ (toerben) F. P. td^ ttjerbe gei^ort luorben feln tc^ toiirbe ge:^5rt toorben fein (toerbc) bu ttilrfi n tt It bu ttierbeft „ It It er tijlrb ,, tt It er tuerbe „ It n ttjirtoerben „ It It toirmurben „ „ „ (toerben) i^r ttjcrbct „ It It i^r tDiirbet „ „ „ (toerbet) fie tticrliett „ It It fie tourbeit ,, „ (toerben) 79 Conditional I. id^ ttiirbc geprt merbeti II. tdf) tnurbe ge^ort ttiorbctt fcltt Imperative ttcrbc (bu) ge^ort merbet (il^r) ge^ort Infinitives Pres. gel^drt toerbm Perf. Participles Pres. ge^5rt toerbenb Perf. 80 Compounds An adverbial particle modifies the meaning of a verb and changes its form according to certain laws. ♦Observe tbat the perf. participle getoOtben loses its augment xn the passive. ttierbctt t ttiorben 256 APPENDIX Example fragen=to question ]befra8Cit=to interrogate These compounds may be : Ott8fragen=to draw out 1. Inseparable (a) Accent on root syllable — Befragcn (5) No augment in perf . part. — bcf ragt ( (c) Not separated in infinitive — gu befragcn i (a) Accent on prefix — auSfragen Separable J (5) Augment between part, and root — au^geftagt ( (c) Separated in infinitive — auSgufrageu Principal Parts 1. Inseparable Jefragen Jbcfragte befragt 2. Separable ougfragen fragte ttuS ttUggefragt Synopsis of Compounds Indicative Separable Inseparable i(i) befragc i^ befragtc i^ f^cthe befragt ic^ l^atte befragt id) tDcrbe befragen ici^ hjerbe befragt l^aben ic^ frage ottS i^ fragte aug ic^ ^abe a«8gefragt id) i^atti: auggefragt id) toerbe au§fragen id) toerbe auggefragt l^aben Pres. Perp. befrage (bu) befrag(e)t (i^r) befragen ©ie befragen befragt f)ahen Imperative Infinitive rage (bu) ou5 rag(e)t (i^r) au^ ragen ©ie au9 augfragen OttSgefragt ^aben Pres. Perp. befragenb befragt 8i Participles ttUSfragenb auSgefragt Modal Auxiliaries ftiinnett, mofien, biirfctt, miiffeu, fottcn, mUtn, These (all but moffen) are preterite presents, i.e., they have the form of the preterite (of strong verbs) while they are used as presents. Hence \6) fatltt (I can), t(5 barf (I may) correspond in form to i6) fatttt (I thought), id) ttiarf (I threw). The infinitive, weak preterite, and participle now in use were formed in analogy with weak verbs. This accounts for their peculiar form, which must be memorized with care. The singular and the plural present differ in form, and the new infinitive, preterite, and perf. part, are formed on the plural stem. APPENDIX 257 f5nnen fonnte gefonnt ntogen ttiod)te gemoc^t biirfen burfte geburft tttiiffen ntu^tc gemu^t foHen foEte gefoKt nJoCen tooUte gehJoUt Present Indic. SUBJ. Indic. SUBJ. Indic. SUBJ. id) lann fonne mag moge barf biirfc bu fannft fonneft ntagft mogeft barfft biirfeft er tann fonne mag moge barf burfe tt)tr fonnen fOtttltCtt* mogen miji^ten* biirfen biirften* i^r fdnnt ronntet mogt tniiiltet biirft biirftct fie !6nnen ronntctt mogeit mof^tm biirfen biirften Preterite Indic. SUBJ. Indic. SUBJ. Indic. SUBJ. i(f| fonntc fonnte moc^te mod^tc burfte biirftc bu fonnteft !onntcft mocf)te[t moc^tcft burfteft biirfteft er f onnte fonntc moc^te moc^te burfte biirftc ttjir f onntcn fSnnten mod)ten mod^ten burften burften i^r f onntet fonntet mo(f)tct mod^tet burftct biirftet fic fonnten fi3nnten mod^tcn mod)ten burften biirften Present Indic. SUBJ. Indic. SUBJ. Indic. SUBJ. id) mu§ miiffc foK folic hJill toollc tn tnu^t muifeft foHft foneft toittft ftjoUcft ermug nmjfc fott foUe njill hjollc icir ntiiffcn miigtttt follen fomen njoHen mHitn i^x mii^t mitpet font foatet hjont tooatet fie muffcn mtiitett foflen foaten n)oIIen mUitn Preterite Indic. SUBJ. Indic. SUBJ. INDIO. SUBJ. id) mufetc ntiifetc foUte fonte toonte UJoIIte bu mufeteft ntiifeteft fonteft foateft hjonteft hjoflteft er mu^te miifete fonte foUtc hjonte njoKte tt)ir mufeten nt listen foHtcn foUten moHten hJoHten il^r mufetet ntiifetet foHtet fontet hJoKtet hjolltet fic mufeten miifeten foEten fottten hjoflten hJoHtcn * Preterite forms Instead of presents which are identical with indicative; cL footnote. 258 APPENDIX 82 In the formation of the perfect tenses we distinguish between the use of these verbs as pure verbs and as auxiliaries. When used e j pure verbs the participle is weak . Qefotttti, etc., when used as auxiliary, with an infinitive complement the old strong participle (without aug- ment) is used : f onnctt. \(S) f)aJ)e gcfottttt id^ f)Cihe ge^en fottttCtt (I have been able) (I was able to go) id) l^abe gelittrft ic^ ijd^^ \pxe6)en bitrfctt (I was permitted) (I was permitted to speak) i^ f)ahe gefottt id) 'i)aU ge^en foffctt (I was supposed to) (I was supposed to go) id) \)aU gcttJOfft id) i)ahe ge^en ttJOffctt (I wished to) (I wanted to go) ic^ l^abe geittttfet id) f)ahe ge^en niiiffm (I was compelled) (I had to go) id^ 'i)ahe gemoi^t id) l^abe fd^reiben tttiifiett (I wanted to) (I felt like writing) The future tense and the first conditional are formed regularly: id) irerbe mogen ic^ wcrbe fc^reiben mogen id) njiirbe mogen id) hJiirbe [cfireiben mogen The future perfect and the second conditional are too long and clumsy for use. 83 Another preterite present but not a modal auxiliary is toiffm: ttJiffen hJu^tc gett)u§t Indic. Subj. id) ttjeig id) njiffe bu toeifet bu;n)iffeft er ttjetg er ttJiffc ttJtr toiffen voix tiiitfetctt (tt)i[fcn) i^r toi^t i^r tiju^tet (wiffet) ftc toiffen fie ttiitfetett (toiffen) Th3 other tenses are formed regularly. 84 Like the modal auxiliaries in use is the verb Ittffett: id) laffe ein ^leib madien I have a dress made ' „ lie§ ;, „ „ I had a dress made „ l^abe „ „ „ laffen I have had a dress made „ f)aU ba§ ^nd) gclaffen I have left the book APPENDIX 259 85 Cansatiyes Causatives are weak transit! ves formed from strong intransitive verbs. They represent the object as being made to do the action implied in the verb. liegen (lie) legen (lay) [i^en (sit) fe|en (set) fte^en (stand) fteflen (put, i. e., make to stand) trinfen (drink) trdnfen (give to drink) finfen (sink) fenfen (make to sink) 86 Reflexive Verbs Reflexive Verbs require a pronominal object that refers back to the subject. In the first and second person this object is the regular personal pronoun in the dative or accusative. In the third person it is fl^, both singular and plural. Present Future iNDic, SuBj. i^ ttjerbe mid) freucn, etc. ic^ freue mid^ freutc mid) (f rcue) Fut. Perf. bu f reuft bii^ fteutefi bic^ (freucft) ic^ merbe mic^ gef reut ^aben, etc. er freut fid^ freue fid) Imper. tuir freuen unS freuten un§ (freuen; freue (bu) bid) i^r freut ettr^ freutrt eud^ (freuet) freuet (i^r) euc^ fie freuen {id^ [ freuten fid) (freuen) freuen 6ie fid) Preterite Infinit. i^ freute mid), etc. ^'^ ^^^"^"' ^'^ Sefreut ^aben ^^^J^^^ fic^ freuenb, fid) gefreut id^ %Oibt m\6) gefreut, etc. ^^^^ Pluperfect id) ttJiirbe mid) freuen \6) ^atte mic^ gefreut, etc. „ „ „ gefreut ^abcn 87 Impersonal Verbs Impersonal Verbs have e8 (with no definite antecedent) for sub- ject. They usually represent a condition (mental or physical) and have many idiomatic constructions. Physical Mental e§ regnet e§ grout mir e§ fd)neit e§ freut mic^ e§ frtert mic^ e§ argert mid) 260 APPENDIX Idiomatic CS gibt (there is, or there are) e§ gitt (it is a question of) e§ fragt \\6) (the question arises) e§ ^anbelt ftc^ urn (it is a question of) e§ lol^nt fid^ (it is worth while) c8 Idfet fid^ tun (it can be done) 88 Irregular Verbs Seven weak verbs are irregular in appearance, since the infinitive has undergone an umlaut change because of a suffix (now lost) which did not affect the other principal parts. brcnnen brannte gebramit fenneii fanntc gefannt ncnnen nannte genannt rcnnen rannte gerannt fenben fanbte gefanbt ttjenben njanbtc genjanbt bcnfen* bad)te gebttdjt ♦ Observe that the last named has lost the nasal before (jh and has undergone a consonant change. So also: 89 bringen Ua6)it gebrac^t Table of Strong Verbs Two forms used interchangeably are connected by a brace. If one is less frequently used it is in brackets. If a verb is sometimes weak, this is indicated by a (w) after the infinitive form. Pbes. Indic. INF. PRET. IND. Pebf. Pakt. 3bd Pebs. Pbet. Subj. IMPER. Ibaden buf gebaden bQdt biife bocf(e)! ficfe^lm befall befo^Ien befie^lt befotjle befle^ll ^eflei^en befliB befliffen befleiBt befliffe befleifee! Beginnen begann begonnen beginnt begonne beginn(e) fteifeett btfe gebt[fen beifet biffe beife(e)! Bctfiett barg geborgen birgt biirge birg! fietftctt barft geborften birft borjte birft! bettJCBCtt(w) bettJog betDogen betuegt bettjogc bett)eg(e)! biegen bog gebogen biegft boge bieg(e)! Meten bot geboten bietet bote biet(e)! (tntien banb gebunben binbet banbe binb(e)i bitten bat gebeten bittet bate bitte ! tlafen blieS geblofen bliift bliefe blaf(e)! APPENDIX 26] PRES. INDIC, INTT. Pbet. Ind. PsBF. Part. 3rd Pers. Pret. Subj. IMPER. himtn blieb geblicbeu bteibt bliebe bleib(e)! hxattn briet gebraten brat briete brat(e)! Hrei^en brac^ gebroc^eii bric^t hxa6)C: brirf)! btngeti (w) bang gcbuiigen bingt bingte binge! brcf(i§ett j brafcfi i [brofrf) gebrofrf)en brifc^t brofcfie brifc^! ] tirtngen brang gebrungen bringt brangc bring(e)I emiife^Iett empfo^l empfol^Ien empfie^It empfo^le cmpfiel^n erbletj^ett erbtic^ crblic^en erbteic^t erblid^e erblei(^(e)! erlijfri^ctt erlofc^ erlofc^en erlifdit crlo[cf)e crtifc^! ClfCtt aB gcgeffen ifet o^e ife! fa^rctt fu^r gcfat)ren fa^rt fit^re fa^r(e)! faactt ftel gefaHcn fdllt ficlc fall(c)! fattfictt fing gcfangcn fangt fingc fang(e).' fci^ten fodit gefoc^ten m foc^tc fic^t! flnbett fanb gefunbeu finbet faube finbe! Her^ten floc^t gefloc^tcn fltc^t flotfite flicgt! fiiefien flog geflogeii flicgt floge flieg(c)! fitelen flo^ geflo^cii flie^t P^e flie^(e)!: fliefeett Po§ gefloffcn fliefet floffc flie6(e)! freffett fra& gcfreffeu frifet] frafee fn§! frictctt fror gefroren friert frore frier(c)! prctt (w) gor gegoren gart gore gare! flcfiiirctt gebar gcboreu gcbiert gcbarc gcbier! Qe6en gab gcgeben gibt gabc gibl Oeliei^en gebie^ gcbie^cu gebei^t gcbie^c gebei^(e)! fie^en fling gegangeu ge^t giiige gc^(e)! fieUttfiCtt getang gehiugen gelingt gelduge ftclten gait gegoUen gilt golte gilt! fteucjen gena§ genefen geneft gendfc gcnefe ! gente^en genofe genoffen genieBt genoffe genieB(e)! Oefii^c^m gefc^a^ gcfc^e^en gefc^ic^t gcfc^d^c fiettJittttCtt gettjami gcttjonnen gcnjinnt getuonne gettJinn(c)! fitefeett goB gegoffen giefet goffe gieB(e)! flkti^ctt gticf) geglid)en gteicfit glid^e gleic^(e)! fllciten glut geglitten gleitet glittc gleit(e)! gUmmen gtomm gegfommen glimmt glommc glimm(e)! grabctt grub gegrabcn grobt grubc grab(e) ! ftrcifcn griff gegriffeu grcift griffe greif(c)! lalten ^ielt ge^altcn ^alt ^ielte ^alt(e)! 262 APPENDIX Prbs. Indic. Inf. Pbet. Ind. Perf. Part. 3rd Pers. Pret. Subj. IMPER. ^angeit ^ing ge^angen tiangt ^inge ^ang(e)! ^auen tjieb ge^ouen l^aut l^iebe ^au(e) ! ithm ^ob ge^oben ^ebt pbe (pbe) ^eb(e)! mtn ^ieB ge^eifeen IieiBt ^iefee I)ei§(e) mtn ^alf ge^Dlfen ^ilft Plfc ^ilf! ftefett(w) for (ge)foren fieft fore fiefe! Htmmen (w ) flomnt geflommen flimmt flomme flimm(e)! fltngeit flong geftungen flingt flange fting(e)! fnctfen fniff gefniffen fneift fniffe fneif(e)! fommen lam gefontmen fommt fame fomm! ttmtn !rifc^ gefrifcJjen frcifd^t frif^e freif(f)(e)I ftlt^tn froc^ gefroc^en friecfit frdd)e friec^(e)! fitrctt(w) for geforen flirt fore fiire! Ittben (w) lub gelaben labet (labt) labete (liibe) lab(e)! laffett m gelaffen lofet liefee lafe! laufen lief gelaufen lauft liefc rauf(e)! leiben titt gelitten leibet litte leib(e)! lei^ctt tie^ gelie^en lei^t lielic lei^(e)! lefeti Ia§ gefefen Heft tofe lie§! Ilegeti lag gelegen Hegt tagc liege ! imn log gelogen lugt loge mg(e)! mcibett mieb gemieben meibet ntiebc meib(e)! mcffctt mo§ gemeffen ntifet ma§c mi§! ttc^mctt no:^tn genommen nimmt na^nte nimm ! ^ifetfett ^ftff gepfiffen pfeift ^ftffe ^feif(e) Ijftegctt (w) Pflog gepflogen ^flegt ^floge ^flege! Jjretfett pvk§> ge^riefen preift Ijriefe ^reif(e)! ^MtUtn quoU gequoKen quint quoHe quill ! ttttett riet geraten rat riete rat(e)! vtlttn rieb gerieben reibt riebe reib(e)! tt'i^tn rife geriffen reifet riffe rei6(e)! relten ritt geritten reitet ritte reit(e) ! tlcd^ett rod^ geroc^en ried^t rdd^c rie(^(e)! rlttgett rang gerungen ringt range ting(e) ! rttttten rann geronnen rinnt ranne rinn(e) ! rwfctt rief gerufen ruft riefe ruf(e)! faufett [off gefoffen fauft foffe fauf(e)! fttugen [09 gefogen faugt foge faug(e)! fi^affett(w) [d)Uf gefc^affen fc^afft fc^iife fd)aff(e)! fj^ttHCtt (w) fc^oa gefcfjoUen fctiam f(f)6ne fci)alle(e)! APPENDIX 263 Pres. Indic Inf. : Pret. Ind. Perf. Part. 3rd Pers. Pret. Subj. IMPER. fi^eitteu fcfiieb gefc^ieben fc^eibet fc^iebe f(f|eib(e)! fi^etnen (C^ien gefc^ienen idjeint fd^iene fcf)ein(c)! ji^elten ftfiart gefc^olten fc^irt fd^oUe f^ilt! fr^ereii (w) frfior gefd)oren fd)iert fc^orc fd^ier! Witltn fdiob gefc^oben fd)icbt fc^obc fd^ieb(e)! mtfitn fdloB gefc^offen mm fc^offe fc^icB(e)! f(^ittiictt fd)unb ge[d)unben fc^inbet fc^iinbe fd)inb(e)! jt^Ittfen fc^Iief gefc^rafen \m\t fdtiaefe frf)Iaf(e)! fr^tagen fc^Iug gefc^ragen fdjldgt frf)tugc fc^rag(e)! ft^Icii^ett Wi^ gefd^Iid)en fd)Iei(^t frf)Iid)e fcf)tei(f)(e)! f«^lclfen(w ) fc^ltff gefc^liffen fd)reift fc^affe fcfifeif(e)! |(^lte^en fcf)lo6 gefc^Io[fen fef)Iie§t mm fci)Iie6(e)! fd^Uttfictt f Chiang gefc^rungen fd^ringt fciirange fd)ang(e)! fi^meigen fc^mife gefc^miffen frf)mei§t fd^miffe fc^meiB(e)! fi^tncljett (w) fc^mol5 gefc^molaen fc^mit^t fdimol^e frfimir^ ! ir^ttaubett(w)fcf)nob gefc^noben fd^naubt fdinobe fd^naub(e)! fc^ttctiJCtt frf)nitt gefd^uitten fc^neibet fc^nitte fc^neib(c)! fi^rerfctt fcfiraf (ge)fc^ro(Ien fc^ricft fdirafe fcfiricf! f^retben f(i)rieb gefc^ricben frfireibt fc^riebe fc^reib(e)! fj^reten fdiric gefc^riecn fd)reit fd^riec fcf)m(e)! f(^rettctt fc^ritt gefc^ritten fc^reitet fc^rittc fd)rcit(e)! fi|to)aren fc^ttjor gefd^njorcn fcfttuiert fc^iDort fc^trore j fcbttjore ! 1 fc^njier! 1 fjlttlCtfiCtt fc^iBicg gefd^ttJicgen fc^tueigt fdjttJiege frf)tucig(e)! ft^ttjeUeii (w) fc^mott gefc^iDoUen fd)h)iat fc^tuotte fc^ trill! f(^tt)tmmen [d^tDaitint gefcf)h)ommen fdjmimmt fc^ttjommc fd^ttjtmm(e)! fi^ttimtien fc^tuanb gefdjirunbcn fd)tt)inbet fcf)tt)dnbe fc^njinb(c)! fl^ttltttfiCtt fc^tcang gefc^njungen frfiiuingt fdjtDQngc fc^h)ing(e)!; fii^tDdren ( frf)tt)ur } \a)tt)OX gefd^ttjoreii fd)tt}ort fc^ttjiire fc^n)or(e)! fc^en fa^ gefe^en fie^t fS^e [ie^! fetn mar gettjefcn ift ttjare fei! fiebett (w) fott gefotten fiebet fotte fieb(e)! jittflctt fang gefungen fiiigt fange ftng(e)! finfeit fanf gefunfen fin!t fan!e finf(e)! finneit fann gefonnen ftnnt fanne(fanue)finn(e)! ft^ett faB gefeffen fi|t fafee file! f^ICiCtt f^ie ge[))ieen fpeit fpiee fpei! fjilnnen fpann gefponnen fpinnt fponne fptnn(e)! Hirct^ctt fprac^ gefproc^en [priest fprdc^e fprid) ! {)irie|en [profe g»f|)ro[fen fprielt fproffe fprieB(e)! 264 APPENDIX Pres. Indic. t Inf. Pbbt. Ind. Perf. Part. 3rd Pers. PRBT. SUBJ. IMPEB. fjirinfien fprong gefprungen fpringt fprdnge fpring(e)! mtn \tad) geftoc^en fticfit ftad^c ftirf)! fierfen (w) \ial geftedt ftedt ftQ!e ftecf (e) ! ftc^en ftanb gcftanben fte^t { ftdnbe I ftiinbe fte^(e): fte^lett rta^i gefto^fcn ftie^rt fto^Ie(ftd^Ie)ftiet)l! fteigeti ftieg geftiegen fteigt ftiege fteig(e)! fterktt ftarb geftorben ftirbt ftiirbe ftirb! fiicBeit ftob geftoben ftiebt ftobe ftieb(e)! ftittfm ftaitf geftunfeu ftinft ftdnfc ftinf(e)! Mtn ftteB geftoBen ftoBt ftieBe ftofe(e)! ftrcii^ett ftrid, geftrid^eu ftrcid)t ftric^e ftrei(f)(e)! ftretten flritt geftritteu ftreitet ftritte ftreit(e)! trttficn trug getragen triigt triige trag(e)! treffctt traf getroffen trifft trdfc triff! irciktt trieb getriebeu treibt triebe treib(e)! trcten trot getreten tritt trdte tritt! ttlcfett(w) troft: getroffen trieft troffe trief(e)! trittfeit tmnf getrunfeu triiift trdnfe trinf(e) ! triifictt trog getrogeu triigt troge triig(e)! tm tat getan tut tote tu(e)! tierMcti^ett tjerblic^ t)erblid)en tjerblei(^t Oerblic^e t)erb(ei(^(e)! Ueriicrften(w) derborb tjerborbeii tjerbirbt Derbiirbc berbirb ! tiertirie^eu t)erbro§ tjerbroffen berbrie^t Uerbrofee t)erbrieB(e) ! tjctfleffen Dergafe Dergeffen Dergi§t Dergdfee t)ergi§! ticrliereit berlor tjerroren berfiert t}erlore t)eraer(e)! tiJttt^fCtt tt)ud)§ gehjac^fen ttJdc^ft ttJiic^fc Jt)act)f(e) ! ttiiiften (w) tt)og gettjogen ttJogt tt)6ge tt)dge(!) ttiaf(^en tDUfd) genjofd^en luafd^t n)iifd)e n)afc^(e)! mhtn (w) tt)ob, gelDoben ftjebt tcobe n)eb(e) ! tueit^en tt)ic^ gettJt^en meic^t njtc^c ttjetc^(e)! tueijen h)ie§ gehjiefen hjeift njtefe hjeif(e) ! ttierftett luarb gett)orben n)irbt njiirbe n)irb' toiertien tt)arb rtlllfhp gettjorben ttJirb njiirbe ttJerbe! tticrfm lUUtUt' njarf gettjorfen hJtrft tt)iirfe Wirf! toiegm ttjog geiDogen tuiegt n)ogc n)teg(e)! ttitn))en ttjanb genjunben n)iubet h)dnbe tDinbe ! xei^eit 5te^ ge^ie^en aei^t gie^e 3eit)(e)! jle^en 309 gejogen Sie^t goge aiet)(e)! attilnfictt 5tt)ang gestt)ungen gtutngt 5tt)dnge 5ttjing(e)! APPENDIX 265 SYNTAX 90 THE SENTENCE— ORDER J. JVbrmaZ-Subj.Terb Adjuncts, obj. { ^^^.^P^^^^^* °^*"f^ ^' ^ gmning with subject. ) Question. Independent clauses not begin- ning with subject. III. TVansposed—S, Adjuncts. O. V,— Dependent clauses. Examples I. ©r Itefl je^t ha^ SSuc^. (£r f^at je^t t>a§ md) gclefen. II. ^ei^t \it^ ex ))a^ 93ud). ^at er je^t t>a^ S3ud) gelefen? III. Scf) fe^e, boB et je^t t)a^ mci) Ilej}. S^t^ fe^C/ ^ofe er jcfet ba8 58uc^ gelefen |ot. It is only the inflected part of the verb that changes its position. MINOR RULES 91 Of a number of adjuncts the most important comes last. Hence ; 92 The infinitive, participial, or adverbial complement always comes last in the sentence : @r ftjiU nai) ^aiife %t^tn, ®r ift md) ^au\e gcBangett. @r fc^lagt ha^ ^u6) auf. 93 An infinitive phrase (with ju), together with its adjuncts, comes last : (Sr ging au§, um ba§ ju fcl^eit. 3c^ bad^te, ba§ er auggegangen fci, um i>a^ ju fe^etl. 94 The negative adverbs u\^i, UXt, UlttadU come last, unless the negation applies to one especial word, in which case the negative adverb immediately precedes it. Ex. — ©in ebler SUJann bergi^t fein SSaterlanb niri^t (A noble man does not for- get his fatherland). But : ©in ebler ffftann Dergifet aUe^, nur ttid^t fein SSaterlanb (A noble man may forget everything, but he never forgets his fatherland). 96 An adverb of time precedes all othei*s: ®r fiel^t petite morgctt langfam jur ©d^ulc. 266 APPENDIX 96 A pronoun precedes a noun object. @g and ^^ precede all others. When both objects are nouns, the indirect usually comes first. er gibt c8 tcm Wlann. er toxU flr^ bem Manne nid^t anbertraiien. er njin bem SRanne tiag ©c^cimnig nidjt ant)ertrauen. When both are pronouns, the direct takes precedence : @r gibt i^tt und. 97 -<4fi/ecfives — As a rule adjectives precede the nouns they mod- ify. If the adjective itself has adjuncts, it is preceded by them. ^Ir.— 3)cr gttte ^nabc. S)er fe^r %uit ^nobe. S)cr ton feincr abutter 8c|(^oItettc ^nabc. S)er wit lanitv ©timwe ein IciUgeg fiieb flnfienbe SKart^rcr. 98 An adjective word, phrase, or clause may follow its noun, especially in elevated diction : 3)tc junge grau, fii§an llttll llcbettSttiiirblfl* toJte ein enficl, er[rf)ien on ber Xiir. S)er ©anger wit ben ml^tn 8odfen, ergriff bie §arfc. ®er ^onig, ber lanfle flefr^miegen ^atte, fing an ju reben. ♦The adj. in this position, like the predicate adj., is not inflected. Only the modifiers of the noun may intervene between subject and verb in normal and inverted order. Thus for the English: She never saw him, we must say : ©le |at tl^n nle gefel^en. USE OF ARTICLE Definite 99 As in English, the definite article is used to individualize. 1 OO Deviations from English— 1. GENERIC — With abstractions, verbal nouns, and nouns of mate- rial,* where the English omits the article, the German inserts it. J^ttS 2ehen i[t ber ©iiter l^oc^fteS nic^t (Life is not the greatest of blessings). ^aS ®el^en ift bir gcfunb (Walking is good for you). $^a8 ©ifen ift ba§ nii^lid^fte TletaU (Iron is the most useful of metals). In all these cases the noun is generalized by its article, i. e., the particular noun stands for the entire class. APPENDIX 267 2. CLASS, OCCUPATION, NATIONALITY — Here the article is omitted when the noun represents an abstract idea rather than a particular individuality. Ex.—^x \\i %tf\t\itt (He is a workman). (Sr hJtrb ^rjt (He will become a physician). ^6) bin ^merifanet (I am an American). 8. WITH PROPER NOUNS— (a) Familiarly: ^ennft bu betl Xctt? ^^ fe^e iiett ftarl. (6) With a preceding adjective: bet jungc ®oet^c. (c) Names of countries are usually not preceded by the article, (Snglanb, 2)eutfc^Ianb, but those ending in el always take it, as: bie Xiirfei, bie Xaxtaxei; also bic ©c^njcij, bic ^falj, bic SfJicbcrfanbc. (d) Names of rivers, mountains, and seas take the article: ber 9l^cin, bic S)onau, bcr fjclbbcrg, bic D[tfcc. 4. INSTEAD OF POSSESSIVE — When the relation is very clear. ®r nimmt ten $ut tiom fto)lfe (He takes his hat from his head). 6. DISTRIBUTIVE — Where in English we use the indefinite. ^aS Sanb f oftet l^unbcrt Xalex ben Sfttfe (The land costs one hundred dollars a foot). f O I There are many deviations which can not be classified. Certain phrases have become stereotyped : nadb Sfiorbcn, ©iibcn, etc.= towards the north, south, etc. nam ^au8 = home na6) bent ^au3 = to the house gu ^au§ = at home gu bcm ^aug = toward the house f^olgcnbe^ = the following With©acl^c,@runb, Urfac^c, etc., the article is often omitted. 102 Contractions — The dative and accusative cases of the definite article are often contracted with a preceding preposition so as to form one word. No apostrophe is used. Ex. : uhex tai ^a^r = iiberS ^a^x untcr bo§ ^au3 = unter8 §au§ ju bcr ©d^ule = gut ©d)ulc in bag ®cbirgc = in§ ©ebirgc m bent ®cbirgc = im ®ebirgc bei bent SSater = beim SSatcr 103 This contraction takes place very frequently in familiar lan- guage, but can not be used when the noun is particularized by a fol- lowing clause or phrase. Ex. : ®r Qtf)t 5ur ^ird^c, but, @r gcl^t gu bet ^ird^c, gu bcr and) fcin SSatcr ging. ®r lebt im ©cbirgc, but, @r lebt in bem ®ebirge, t)a^ man oon ^ier fcl^cn fann. 104 Where several noims in the same construction follow each other, the article must be repeated before each : The father and mother were at home = 2)er SSatcr unb bic SKutter toaxtn ju §au[e. 268 APPENDIX NOUNS Syntax of Cases GENERAL 105 Appositives — Nouns in apposition with other nouns or pro- nouns are in the same case. They may stand without connecting particle or with the particle ttl0 or toie. dx tritt aU filacer auf. (£r fie^t i^n al§ fctnctt ffftnti an. er ^at ijen ©cncral, ben crftcn Wlann be§ fianbeg gefe^en. NOMINATIVE 1 06 !• Subject (and vocative) — as in English. 1 07 II. Predicate Noun— with or without aU, 1 08 III* Absolute. II. Predicate Noun 109 After the verbs geltett (to be valued at), erfii^clnett (appear), l|ertiorfic|ctt, oufjie^ett, Itbtn, ^tthtn, fie^en, the participles anficjieHt (placed), krufctt (called), erfiiirt (explained), ttUgoeflCbCtt (declared), ftcfUttbctt (found), gefit|U (felt), erfattttt (recognized), gcfitri^tct (feared), Hege^rt (desired) (i. e. , verbs which are synonymous with to be in a wider sense), we use the predicate nominative with the inter- medial particle dU. Ex.—(^e^t ^^x itic^t aU cine tonigitt ^crtjor? er toax aU rettcnber ^ngel erfc^ienen. S)er S3auer fonnte aU Wontv 2Rtttttt gelten. I lO After the verbs fcitt, ttJCrbctt (become), bleiftctt (remain), fji^ela nett (seem), iJiittfftt (imagine), ^cifectt (to be called), gcjri^imjjft tocrbctt (to be called in a bad sense), in fact, after all verbs denoting condi- tion, the predicate nominative is used without the intervening particle. Ex.—^x tft cltt pter SKatttt geBIieben. er h)irb cltt tttficr ©ofcmitl^t gefc^im^ft. SBit^elm tjon ber S^orntanbie tuirb bcr 6rokrcr gcnannt. es ift nic^t jebem gegeben, citt flrofecr ^clb gu [ein. The English construction after to be elected, nominated, created, etc., appears in German in the form of a prepositional phrase: gu -f dative. Ex.—lELe is elected president = (£r toirb inm ^riifliietttett APPENDIX 269 The same is true after the active form of these verbs. Ex. — They nominate him mayor = (Sie ernennen x^n jum ©itrgermeificr. The predicate after tDCrbett may also be expressed with ju and the dative — Seiber ift btr bie ^eitnat gur Srcmbc getnorben, instead of: S)ie ^eintat ift bie i^xem'be gettjorben. This is especially the case when Uierlien expresses a complete change in substance as in the above example. The English, "I consider him to be a good man," where man would agree with him in the objective case, is expressed in German by means of a preposition, fiir — ^d) italic t^n fiir elttCtt fitttctt 9kam. Ill III. Absolute The Nominative Absolute is not very frequent in German. It is used mainly for vivid description. Ex.—'^^ie STrmce 5og iihev bie 93ruclen, affc ©ejlii^ter bilfter, Jebet SWuttli tjerfc^Ioffen. — 2)ie ©rafin ging gurilcf, in i^ren Hugen flebcr^after ©Ittttg. In all these cases some part of the verb to be may be supplied. I 12 GENITIVE I. Attributiye — modifying nouns. Ilk Partitive — denoting the whole from which a part is taken. III. Objective — after verbs, adjectives, adverbs, prepositions. IV. Adverbial— used instead of an adverb. V. Appositional— with another genitive. I. Atiributive (expressed in English by of). 113 A genitive is attributive if it modifies a noun. It may then express a variety of relations* I 14 POSSESSION — S)ie ^eimat bc8 ^InM toar unbefannt. — 2)o8 @elb ift M SttifcrS. I i 5 IDENTITY— ^ag Softer M Xtnntti, Proper nouns are placed in apposition, instead of in the genitive: ber momi ^pxW, bie Stabt gJarlS. I 16 QUALITY OR MATERIAL— ^et Sijulctt ©IttTtj (for bic granjenbcit ©aufen). — @in SSec^er cblcn ©olbcg. 117 AS OBJECT OR SUBJECT OF THE ACTION IMPLIED IN A VERBAL NOUN— 2)ie Xeilung tier 6rbe, bie Siebe @otte0, bie gutd^t 270 APPENDIX I 1 8 Instead of the genitive we may use tlOtl + dative in certain cases : (a) To avoid ambiguity where no article can be used and where no inflection of the noun designates the case : Ex. — S)ie ©tra^en ton Sonbon, bie S3cforgung t)on ©cfc^aften (but, bic SSeforgung mand^er ©efc^afte). (6) In the designation of ranks and titles: Ex. — 2)er ^onig t)on ©ad^fen. (c) To avoid a series of genitives: Ex.—'^ex ^at)re§tag toon Sl^afe* fpearg Xob (not be§ XobeS S^afefpearg). I 1 9 The relationship as expressed by tlOtt + dative is less close than that of the genitive. ^eutf(||lanb§ ^aifet indicates a unity of interest, while hit St(il\tX tlOtt ^Cttt|(i^(tttttl merely expresses the title. II. Partitive 1 20 Denoting the whole, from which a part is taken, (a) After numbers— Qtoei bet aufe. He was sick, therefore he stayed at home, ©r war franf, ttieS^alb er §u ^aufe blicb. He was sick, for which reason he stayed at home. Tenses Past Time < perfect tense 282 APPENDIX VERBS Mode INDICATIVE— Statement of fact. cSZtionI^ i statement of a supposition. IMPERATIVE— Command. INFINITIVE — General statement of the action. Indicative 176 Direct statements or questions are expressed in the indic- ative mode. 1. Present Time — present tense preterite tense perfect tense pluperfect tense I 3. Future Time } ^^^^® *^"f \ , I future perfect tense 1. Present Time (a) To express an action taking place at the time—^d) gc|c je^t aug. (6) To express a general truth— ^etcn Ifi ©ilber, (Sc^tueigen ifi ©olb, (c) To express a very vivid future— WtoxQen ge|t er fort (To-morrow- he will go away). (d) To express a state of affairs beginning in the past and con- tinued in the present (expressed in English by the perfect tense)— ^d^ bin je^t gtoet ^al^re in ©l^icago (I have now been two years in Chicago). In German ^6) Bin JhJei ;^alf)re in ©l^tcago Qettiefen vt^ould mean, I was in Chicago for two years. Such a use of the perfect indicates a cessation of the action or condition in the present, hence: er i)at gelebt = he is dead. (e) To express a very vivid imperative — ®ic ^ontgin fprad) junt $agen: 2)u Xm\\i einmal unb |oIfi mir ben S3eutel gum ©^iele. This use of the present indicates that the speaker is very sure that the order will be carried out. (/) Historical present for very vivid past descriptions — ^ann mat* fii^lert "^(^i^ §eer im rafd^en %tmpo weiter unb jeber ©olbat fji^U fid^ gel^oben (Then the army marched on at a rapid pace and every soldier felt himself uplifted). APPENDIX 283 ( Preterite 2. Past TimeK Perfect ( Pluperfect 1 77 Past time may be expressed by the preterite, the perfect, the pluperfect, according as the action is considered as absolutely or rela^ tively past. If a simple statement of a fact that has taken place in the past is made without any reference to an accompanying fact, it is more usual to employ the perfect tense. ^c^ Bin geftern bort QctDCfen (I was there yesterday). ^d) f^aht bag gefagt (I said that). If this is limited by some other fact, the preterite is preferable: 21I§ er in§ 3^1""^^^^ txat, gtttft fein S3ruber l^inauS. When he stepped into the room, his brother went out. This rule is not absolute, as the best writers show great divergence of use, but it will be found a safe working basis. The pluperfect tense represents an action that has occurred previ- ous to some other past event — ®r ^tttte fc^on fein Sdud) tmrd^gelefeu, e^e ber Scorer lam. He had read his book through before the teacher came. 8. Future and Future Perfect 1 78 The simple future tense is used (as in English) to express an event about to take place from the standpoint of the present- er ttiirii morgen fommen. 179 The future perfect expresses an event completed from the point of view of the future— ©r tolrb big ba^in %ttommtn fein (By that time he will have come). For the future we may substitute the present [cf . 1 76 (c)]. For the future perfect we may substitute the perfect— S3i§ ba^in ifi er fdjon (jefommen. These substitutions give a greater vividness. The future and future perfect have an idiomatic use to indicate probability — eg mirb njo]§t tier U^r feitt. It is probably four o'clock, ©g toirb tuag anbereg tt)o:^l ht'^tutti l^aBen. It probably meant something else. SBo ttiirb er bie ^aci)t jugebrttt^t ^aftm ? Where can he have spent the night ? 284 APPENDIX Subjnnctive 1 80 The subjunctive, in contrast to the indicative, expresses not a fact but a thought, often a thought for the truth of which the speaker assumes no responsibility. KINDS OF SUBJUNCTIVE I. Snpposition. (a) INDIRECT DISCOURSE. (6) CONDITION (UNREAL), (c) DOUBT. II. Desire. (a) UNFULFILLED. ( COMMAND, (6) POSSIBLY FULFILLED \ PRAYER AND WISH, ( CONCESSIVE. I. Supposition (a) INDIRECT DISCOURSE 1 8 I This use of the subjunctive occurs most frequently and must be carefully studied. It is used after verbs of saying, wishing, think- ing, feeling, asking ^ etc., whenever the quoted sentence is not stated ^s a positive fact. Thus we say, (5r glaubte, W^ e0 ric^ttg fei (He thought it was right), but @r tru^te, ba§ e§ rid)tig torir (He knew it was right), because in the second sentence is implied the actuality of the fact. 182 The conjunction bttft is frequently omitted in ordinary con- versation. In that case the order becomes normal, and the sub- junctive mode is used to show the indirect discourse. Ex.—^x tDu^te, c§ fci tt)a^r. Tense Use of Indirect Discourse 1 83 In ail uses of the subjunctive tenses we find a weak sense of time. The various tenses are used to express a variety of relationship of the speaker towards the thought expressed. In indirect discourse, the tense of the quoted sentence has no dependence upon that of the leading verb, i. e. , there is no sequence of tense as in Latin. Each tense of the indirect discourse may correspond with the tense of the direct quotation, except in the preterite. The preterite, as shown in the paradigm (cf. 62, p. 2.) has, in many instances, crept into the present, to take the place of those present forms which, because of similar- ity with the present indicative, have lost their subjunctive force. Thus the preterite subjunctive has lost the significance of past time and stands for the present. For the preterite we use the perfect in indirect discourse. APPENDIX 285 1 84 Hence we may have the following correspondence Direct Quotation Indicative Present tense Preterite tense Perfect tense Pluperfect tense Future tense Future Perfect tense Indirect Quotation Subjunctive ( Present tense ■j or (Preterite tense Perfect tense Perfect tense Pluperfect tense Future tense Future Perfect tense This shifting has tended still further to weaken the sense of time in the tenses, so that good authors use present and preterite, perfect and pluperfect, future and conditional, interchangeably to avoid wearisome repetition, without any feeling of difference in time. Examples Direct Indirect ( fic^e ) ^t ge^t ^eim 6r -J or ■ ^eim ( fiinfie) ^^ fitttg ^cim J ( ^P^ ) (£r ifi ^eim gegangen !■ ©r -j or ()cim gegangen er ttittr ^eim gegangen ) (ttittrc) er ttiirb l^eim ge^cn (5r mettle ^eim gel^en er ttiirb ^eim gegaitgctt feiit er merbc ^eim %t%m^tn feitt When the present subjunctive is identical in form with the present indicative, or similar in sound, the preterite subjunctive is to be pre- ferred. This is always true in the 1st person singular and in the plural. iNDic— ^d^ ^abe t)a^ 93u(^. Subj.— (Jr fagt, ta^ \^ bag S3u(^ f^dite (not l^ttBe). Indic— 2Btr ^aben ha^ 93u(^. Subj.— ©r fagt, ba^ n)ir ha^ ^VLii) J^iittCtt (not |akn). For insertion or omission of tittfe cf. 182. (b) UNREAL CONDITION 1 85 This levelling out of all difference in meaning between present and preterite, perfect and pluperfect subjunctive has not extended to the other uses of the subjunctive. On the contrary, there is here a very sharply drawn distinction in meaning. 1 86 The present and perfect are used for the expression of thoughts which may be true to actual facts ; the preterite and pluperfect for suppositions which are known to be unreal. This is illustrated in unreal conditions. 286 APPENDIX Present time = Preterite subj. Past time = Pluperfect subj. Ex.—^enn i^ ein SSoglein toiit', flog' id^ 3U bir. If I were a bird, I should fly to you. aSenn id^ ein SSoglein %mt\tn ttrire, ttiire i^ gu bir geffogm. If I had been a bird, I should have flown to you. 1 87 In place of the subjunctive in the apodosis, the conditional mode may be used (cf. paradigm 63). Ex.—fS^enn i^ ein SSoglein toare, toiitrtie \^ s^ bir fliegett. SSenn icf) ein SSoglein gettJefen ttjare, tuittbe id) ju bir geflogett fclit. 1 88 The ttientt may be omitted, in which case the order is inverted : SBiire idi ein SSoglein. 1 89 A real condition is a statement of fact, hence is expressed by the indicative: SSenn e§ tt^ntt, tttmmt man einen 3fiegen[cf)irm (When- ever it rains, one takes an umbrella). 1 90 Occasionally one of the two parts of the condition is made espe- cially vivid by being placed in the indicative: Wlit biefem $feil tutrd^^ fd^O^ i^ (Sud^, ttJenn id^ mein liebeS ^inb getroffen t)dtte (With this arrow I should have shot you, if I had hit my beloved child). (c) DOUBT 1 9 I After nU oh (as though) —closely related to the conditional subjunctive — @r \at} au§, al8 ob er ein Unred^t Ibegangen l^dtte (He looked as though he had done a wrong). (£r tat alg fd^Uefe er (He acted as though he slept). 192 Dubitative or Diplomatic (also known as subjunctive of weakened assertion), i.e., a modest statement of a fact which, by being put into the subjunctive, receives a ten- tative air, as though the speaker were open to conviction on the subject. (This may be considered a part of an unreal condition. ) Ex.— ^d) bac^te boc^ = I should really suppose ^\6)i ha^ id) ttJiifeie = Not that I am aware of ^d) moc^te njo^t = I should like ^6) pttc e2 lieber = I should prefer ®§ ware too^l an ber 3ctt = It is about time 2)a§ biirfte gef al^rlic^ fein = That might be considered dangerous 28er toilfete t)a§ nicf)t? = Who doesn't know that ? 2Ba§ l^atte ic^ gu fiirc^ten? = Of what should I be afraid ? 2)a§ toaxe tt)a^r? = Could that be true ? ©ie l^attc ba^ fietan? = I cannot believe that she has done that APPENDIX 287 II. Desire f 93 The difference in meaning between the present and preterite, perfect and pluperfect tenses of the subjunctive (cf. 186) is further illustrated in the subjunctive of Desire. 1 94 A desire may be of two kinds : r ,/»„ ^ j Preterite subj, (a) Impossible of fulfillment | pluperfect subj. (6) Possible of fulfillment— Present subj, Ex.^{a) SSenn er hod) noc^ am fieben ttJire I Oh, that he were still alive! SSenn er t)oc^ nod^ einige ^diixe gelcBt f^Uit I Oh, that he had lived a few years longer As in case of the conditional subjunctive (cf. § 188) the ttJeittl may be omitted and the order become inverted: Wdtt er boci^ nod^ am Seben ! §dtte er borf) itoc^ einige ^a!^re gcIcBt ! (&) Desire that is expected to be fulfilled. 195 1. COMMAND— 1st and 3d person. 2. PRAYER OR WISH— 1st and 3d person. 3. CONCESSIVE. 1 96 !• Under the desire that is expected to be fulfilled we class the command addressed to the first and third persons (represented in English by let and the infinitive). Let us go home ! = ®tf^tn tiJir nad) §aufe ! Let him not forget ! = JBcrgeffe cr nic^t. 197 2. Forms of prayer or beseeching: S)ein 9leid^ fomntel (Thy kingdom come!) Since the third person plural subjunctive is identical in form with the corresponding person of the indicative (cf. § 62, p. 2 .) we often substitute for this construction the modal auxiliary tnogPIt + infinitive. Ex.—JXtttiltn SBeifere iiber bie forage = SBetfere tnoQcn iiber bie forage itrtcileti. 1 98 3. Concessive — This represents a willingness on the part of the speaker to grant certain claims as not affecting the validity of his main contention. It is always in the present. Ex.—Wie§ anbere, fct e§ tt)a§ e§ fei, gilt nid^ts. Everything else, be it what it may, coimts for nothing. e§ fel fo tote bu gefagt J^aft. ( ) Let it be as you have said. 288 APPENDIX 1 99 The same idea is sometimes expressed by the modal auxiliary mogm + infinitive. Ex.—Q^ tnag fo fein, trie bu gefagt t}a\t Granted what you have said. Imperative 200 Strictly speaking there are but two forms of the imperative, the second person present singular and plural — Btfi Bcfi(e)t 20 1 But the use of the third person plural pronoun (©ie) for the conventional form of address has introduced a new form into the imperative (cf. 105): gebett ®lc (always with the subject expressed after the verb). 202 These three forms are used for direct command addressed to another person or persons. 203 An indirect command referring to a third person may be expressed by the subjunctive (cf. 196). 204 Extremely emphatic commands in familiar speech are often expressed by the indicative present (cf. 176e), by the perfect participle: \d)neU gelaufen! (run quickly) and by the infinitive: nirfit fo laut fprec^en! (don't speak so loudly). Thus we may express commands in eight ways — Imperative jtt»*5f»^f(^«)J ( axWttti (i^r)! ( ar0eiten ®te I Subjunctive ■] at!6ette cr ! Indicative— titt tttbettefi I Participle— fij^neff fiCttrtettctl Infinitive— f^ttctt ttrbclten! 205 Infinitive -Yerbal Noun I. Part of the Yerb (without ju) II. With Noun or Adjective (with pi) III. Substantive (with or without jn) 206 !• Part of Yerb The infinitive is used to form (a) the future tenses, (b) the con- Mlitional mode, (c) the complement of the modal auxiliaries and (d) of a few verbs of similar construction. In this use the infinitive without |tt is the rule. APPENDIX 289 (6) ^d^ ttjiirbe BcganGCtt fcin. (c) (S§ mu§ gefttgt meriJett. (d) The other verbs that admit of this construction are : finben, fiil^Ien, t)ei^en, l^elfen, l^oren, ta[fen, le^ren, ternen, ntad)en, feften. ;Sc3^ laffe ba§ bon ber 9JJagb tun (cf. 212). er mtt^t tnic^ t)or bent gangen |)ofe erroten. He makes me blush before my entire court. (e) After a few verbs the infinitive (without gu) is used idiomat- ically to express duration of condition. Ex.— dt Ut'ibi fl^etl. He keeps his seat. 6r Itttte t>a^ ®elb tm ^aften lit^tn. He had the money lying in the box. @e^', lege t)i6) fiJ^lofenl Go to sleep I ©C^C ftlttjicrcn ! ®C^C Pfd^cri I Go for a walk! Go fishing 1 207 Command — In familiar language this infinitive is used to express an emphatic command, especially in prohibition, correspond- ing to our English don't : %ie Wluttn fagt gum ^inbe : „^\a^ SSaterlanb ju fterten ift em tul^mfid^er %oh. To die young for one's fatherland is an honorable death. When the substantive use is the more emphatic, the ju is omitted. Ex.^x gog eitt fj^netteS (©terpen bem MnriilmUii^ett 8eften 5>ot» * He preferred a quick death to a dishonorable life. When the substantive infinitive is used for a clause of purpose or direction the JU must always be inserted. ©ie ging nm Slumen p iiprfcn (bamit [ie SSrunten p^Me), 2 If ■ Sometimes in exclamations a connecting word is omitted and the so-called elliptical infinitive appears to stand alone in the sentence. Sld^, auf ba§ tnutige 9io^ m\6) p f^ttitngen ! (we might add, to com- plete the sense: ift ntein fel^nlicifter SSunfci^.=To mount the brave charger is my dearest wish.) ^6) ta^ im ! (for ic^ foE \>a§ tun! = I do that!) 2 1 2 After loffm, Mcrt, prett, fit^lctt, as well as after the verb fefel, the active infinitive may have a passive meaning. Ex. — @§ ift t)iel p tJItt (There is much to be done). @r I'd^t e§ ttttt (He has it done). Wan t)5rt bict) lobtn (One hears you praised). 213 Precaution The use of the infinitive with subject accusative, so common in English, is not found in German. The infinitive must either have the same logical subject as the main verb: id) tt)iinf{f)e i:^n ju fcl^en (I wish to see him), or must be the direct object of the verb: id) befal^I il^m nac^ ^aufe gu gefjen (I commanded him to go home). Such constructions as, I wish him to go, or I believe him to he a good man, must be translated by a clause : , . :Sd) iDiinfc^e, bttfe tx ge^e. ^d) glaitbe, baff er eitt outer Wtmn ifi. 214 The Participle— Terbal Adjectire In use, the participle conforms entirely to the adjective, being declined like the latter and employed, attributively, predicatively, or substantively like it. The only difference is that the participle may have a verbal or objective modifier which always precedes it. The present participle is active, the past participle passive in its meaning. Ux.^^a^ ben roten Sl^jfel mit gro^em SSergniigen tjerfjieifettiie ^inb. • The child who was eating the red apple with much pleasure. . « ' '©cr^bcn tierfjjelfte ^pfel befatn i^m nid^t. The apple that had just been eaten, did not agree with him. APPENDIX 291 2 15 The participial noun common in English, is not fouiid in German. In translating, either an infinitive or a clause taust be sub- stituted. 216 If the participle is used as subject or object, the substantive infinitive (without ju) is used in German. The rain made walking very difficult. The rushing of the water. ^ttS ^IttUfi^Ctt be§SSa[jer§. 217 If the English participial noun is governed by prepositions, it is translated by a prepositional infinitive or a clause. 1. The prepositions alette, attfiatt ttitt govern the infinitive phrase, Kx.— Without seeing his friend = ot^nt ^^ineux^xeunt) pt \t^tn. Instead of going home = ttttfitttt nad) ^aufe pi p|eii. For the purpose of seeing her once more= ttllt fie nod) ein* mar in fc^en. 2. When prepositions other than these three govern the English participial noun, the phrase must be turned into a clause in German. Ex. — After seeing his mother = 9la^beHt cr feine SUiutter gefe^ett ^diit. By saying this = 3ntlcm er bie§ \a%tt. The participle as such can not be substantivized in German. It is primarily an adjective with the full adjective declension. As an adjective it may be used without a noun. Ex. — dx freute \i6) iiber ^rig (Bejli^el^ene (He rejoiced at what had happened). Here ba^ ©efd^eljtne stands for bttS gefl^e^CtlC ^Ittfl, just as tag @tttc may stand for ttt^ pte Xing. The participle may be used to express an emphatic command: SfJicfit gefadelt, [c^neE an§ SBerf gCQangm ! (No fooling there, go to work quickly!) The Passive Toice 2 1 8 Every transitive verb can be made passive as in English. The preposition of agency (English by) is tiott. Active— @r fti^ldgt ben ^naben. He strikes the boy. Passive— S)cr f nabe ttirb ijon i^m %t\fi^la%m. The boy is being struck by him. 292 APPENDIX 219 In German we distinguish carefully between the real passive, i. e., an action of which the subject is the sufferer and not the agent, and a mere condition of the subject, arising out of some former action. ®a§ papier miril ^ettiffm = The paper is (being) torn. S)a§ papier tfi jerrtffen = The paper is torn. Observe that jettiffett in the second sentence is only a predicate adjective. 220 SUBSTITUTES FOR THE PASSIVE (a) man + active. (&) M ittffen + active infinitive. (c) Reflexive Form of Verb. 22 I The passive is often clumsy and is used less frequently in Ger- man than in English, especially in cases in which the agent is not named. Ex.-^{a) aj^an offnete eine Xwc (A door was opened). (6) ^a^ Idfet fid) tun (That can be done), (c) %xt %nxt offnete fid^ langfam (Slowly the door was opened). This substitution is especially frequent after modal auxiliaries, where a passive infinitive would cause unwieldy length. The door could not have been opened = 2)te Xitr ^Hit nid^t geoffltct toetben UWXVX, or better: (a) Wan pttc bte Zux nid^t dffneti fottiictt. (5) %\t Xitr Ittttc \v^ nid)t offnett laffcn. 222 When the object of the active verb is in the dative, it can not be made the subject of the passive. An impersonal subject must then be substituted and the dative object remains unchanged. Active— ©te ^at i^m fie^olfett. Passive— @g ift i^m t)on i^r ge^olfett tiiorlictt. Modal Auxiliaries 223 They express the mental attitude of the speaker to the action implied in the verb. There are six. fiittttett = possibility (physical, moral, or intellectual) Qtogen = desire (always a mental attitude) bitrfcil = permission (on the part of an outside power) Wiiffen = necessity fotten = the desire or declaration of an outside power ttlOtten = the desire or declaration of the speaker himself 224 I. 225 11. 226 in. 227 IV. 228 V. 229 VI. APPENDIX 293 From these general meanings various allied uses have been derived. I. fotttten = possibility 230 ^(^ tatttt t>ci^ nid^t tJtn (I can not do that). The infinitive of the verb may be omitted if the meaning is clear from the context: ^6) fann e§ nic^t. 23 I An original meaning of fdnttett was to know. This is still preserved in phrases like: ^attttfi t)U beine 5lufgabe? (Do you know your lesson?) ^attttfii buS)eutfd)? (Do you know German?) etc. II. mofiCtt = desire 232 2Ber mo^tt fofd^ cin Sebcn fiil^ren? (Who would care to live such a life ?) After ntdgeit, also, the infinitive may be omitted. ^6) tnag nid)t (I don't want to). ^6) mag e§ nid^t (I don't like it). 233 The original meaning was to be able. But this is now found only in the compound tiermogen: @r tiermag ba^ nid^t ju ttttt (He can not do that). 234 SD^ogen occasionally translates the English may, with the idea of possibility or probability. Ex.— fBa^ ag wol^l brinnen fein? What may be in it ? 6r tnag ein bofeS @ett)i[fen l^aben. He may have a bad conscience, ©r tnoc^tc gttjet ^al^re bageiuefen [cin. He may hav'e been there for two years. But the English "May I go"? is „2)arf id^ gel^en"? III. bitrfen = permission 235 ^n bet ©d^ule barf man ntdf)t f^jred^en (One is not permitted to speak in school). (The English you must not do so is also bu batfft ha^ nidf)t tun.) 236 The original meaning to be in want of is now found only in bebiirfen. ajian bebarf manc^eg in ber SSelt (One needs many things in this world). 237 The preterite subjunctive of Diirfen (biirfte) is used idiomatically to express probability. S)a§ biirftc 5U fd^mcr fein (That is probably too hard). 294 APPENDIX IV. miiffett = necessity (from without) 238 ^(S) tnufetc nad^geben (I had to submit). er tDirb e§ tun miiffett (He will be obliged to do it). 239 A derived meaning is found in the following usages: 9?un mu^tc e§ and) nod^ regnen ! (Now fate would have it rain !) S)er mni^ ein SO^orber fein! (He must be a murderer!) V. foffett = desire or statement (from without) 240 S)ufoaftnic^t Mien! (Thou Shalt not steal). 2)er ^onig foH leben! (Long live the king!) ®r fott einen 2tuf fa^ fd^reiben (He is to write an essay). 24 I Without the infinitive— SSaSfjjaber^nabe? (What is the boy to do?) 242 Hearsay— 2)a§ foff ein reigenbeg Sanb fcin (That is said to be a charming land). 243 In the subj. pret. it represents a conditional meaning— Wan foUte glauben (One should suppose), ©r fottte ge^en (He ought to go). Note that this is the only exact rendering of the English ought. VI. tiiottett = desire or declaration (from within) 244 SBittfi ^n eth)a§? (Do you want anything?) er ^at ta^ nidjt tun tooKcit (He did not want to do that). 245 It is not to be confounded with the English "wiir'=futurity. For this purpose the German employs ttierbett. But sometimes it is to be translated with to be about to^ or on the point of, but always expressing volition. (Sr toiU gel^en = He is about to go (makes a motion of going). 246 With non-personal verbs ttiottett has many idiomatic uses, aJl of which rest on personification. S)a3 miff btr nicf)t gefaUen (That does not suit you). S)a§ tultt ntdf|t§ fagen (That is of no importance). ^a§ ttJtff tuol^r bebad^t fein (That requires careful consideration). 247 ^oHett may express a claim on the part of the speaker. @r ttiiff ein reic^er ©nglanbcr fein = He claims to he a rich English- man (cf. with a similar use of foUen 242). APPENDIX 29S VERBS OP A SIMILAR CONSTRUCTION 248 loffctt = permission or command. j^ei^ett = command. ^d) lic^ @uc^ ftet§ entttJifcfjcn = I always let you escape. Wlan breitet au^, [tc fc!^ttjinbe, la^t fie franfcrunb txanler: toexhen, enblid^ ftifl fierfd^eiben. (One can spread the report that she is declining, make her grow worse and worse, and at last quietly fade away). ^^ Ittffe ntir ein neue§ ^leib mac^en = I have a new dress made (order it to be made). j^ei^en = command (to be carefully distinguished from l^ei§cn = to call or be named), 6t ^ctfet bie Oolbaten bic SBriiden tjerbrennen. He commands the soldiers to burn the bridges. Impersonal Verbs 249 Many verbs which have a personal subject in English are impersonal in German, i. e., the person concerned is regarded as being affected by the action rather than as the agent. The subject is the impersonal c8, while the person affected is represented by a dative or accusative noun or pronoun. e§ bauert mid) = I am sorry e§ efelt mic^ an = It disgusts me e§ erbarmt mid^ = I pity cS faUt mix ein = It occurs to me e§ fdHt mir auf = I notice (my attention is attracted) c8 freut mid) = I rejoice e§ gefallt mir = It pleases me (I like) c§ gelingt mir = I succeed e§ gcniigt mir = It suflaces me e§ jammert mi(^ = I take pity on e§ rent mic^ = I repent eg fd^minbelt mir = I grow dizzy eg tut mir leib = I am sorry eg tut mir mel^ = It hurts me eg oerbrie^ mic^ = It vexes me VOCABULARIES VOCABULARY EXPLANATORY NOTE 1. Words not marked with the accent are to be accented on the first syllable. 2. The principal parts of strong and irregular verbs will be found in Section 86 of the Api)endix. 3. Verbs that form the perfect tenses with the auxiliary [eill, are indicated as follows : bleiben, to remain, (fein) 4. The endings of the gen. sing, of masculines atid neuters and of the nom. plur. of all nouni^ are given. A dash indicates that the plural is formed without additional ending. 5. Irregular comparatives and superlatives are given. 6. The parts of speech are indicated only when the translation might lead io misunderstanding. ABBREVIATIONS ace. = accusative adj. = adjective adv. = adverb App, = Appendix art. = article aux. = auxiliary of. = compare cond. = conditional conj. = conjunction dat. = dative def. = definite dem(onstr.) = demonstrative dim. = diminutive . Eng. = English ex. = example fem. = feminine fut. = future gen. = genitive imper. = imperative indecl. = indeclinable indef . = indefinite indie. = indicative inf. = infinitive inter. = interrogative interj. = interjection intr(ans.) = intransitive irr. = irregular masc. = masculine neut. = neuter nom. = nominative num. = numeral obj. = object part. = participle perf. = perfect I)ers. = i)erson(al) plup. = pluperfect pl(ur.) = plural poss(ess.) = jxjssessive pred. = predicate prep. = preposition pres. = present pret. = preterite pron. = pronoun refl. = reflexive reg. = regular rel. = relative sing. = singular str. = strong subj. = subjunctive subst. = substantive superl. = sui>erlative tr(ans.) = transitive w. = weaik GERMAIS^-ENGLISH VOCABULARY bcr 2Cai:, -(e)S, -c, eagle X ti^, away, from bag SlbcttbUeb, -(e)^/ -«r. evensong bag 2lbentcucr, -§, — , adventure ober, but, however ttbjjerlffcu, shabby a b' (eg en, «'., to take oflF ttb'nefjmen, sir., to take off ttb'reifeit, «'., to depart (feitt) ab'f ^o., to hang on to, attach to on'f ommen, str. , to arrive (fein) bie3lnl0fie, - talent, disposition, advantage ber 9ln(a^, -ffeg, ^fle, occasion an'tio^en, w., to knock an'f^tie^en, str. rejl., to attach one- self to on'feben, str., to look at bag Slnfeben, -g, — , renown on'ftannen, «>., to stare at aii'ftrcnflen, «•. re/l., to strain, make an effort btc ^nttvovt, -en, answer ont'niorten, w., to answer on'bertrttnen, w., to entrust to on'maibfen, str., to grow, increase bag Slnmadilfen, -g, increase, growth «in''selflen, w., to report ttn'jitnbett/ w., to kindle, light 300 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN ber 2H>fct, -§, •", apple ber 9l^felbaum, -ie)5S, ^e, apple-tree O^JfclBtOU, dapple gray J bie 2UtJCit, work / atbcitctt, w., to work ber ^vbtitev, -§, — , workmao, laborer ber Slrget, -^, vexation axm, poor ber Slrni, -(e)§, -e, arm bie 2lrmcc', -n, army bie 2lrt, -en, kind, sort au^, also bie 2lu{c), -en, meadow auf, ^J'ep. wilh dat. and ace, up, at, upon ; adj. or adv., open auf'bemoIjtCtt, w., to keep, guard ouffrcffcttf «<^., to devour bie ^lufsabCf -n, task, exercise, lesson ftltf gebcitf sir., to put to ; give up auf'ficfien, sir., to rise (fein) auf'ftcbcn, J thoroughly baked, done auS'fiCbCU, str., to give out, spend auS'flCljcn, str., to go out (fein) auSflcfc^t, exposed ^ auSflcjcidjnct, excellent < bie 9ru§fUttft, ^C, information ber 9lu§lan»er, -§, — , foreigner auS'lanblfdi, foreign au§'(eben, refl., to live oneself out au§'red)ncn» w., to reckon, work out au§'fd)auen> w.,ixi look out ttttS'felllttflCtt, 5 to threaten ' ber IBcfcftt', -§, -e, command f bcfcb'tcu, «C, both ; aUe — , both of them ; bie beiben, the two fici'ieite, aside, to one side bei'fteUen, w., to set aside htx^tn, sir., to bite bci'trctctt, str., to join (fetn) htlawxxt' , known, acquainted bcfotn'mcn, str., to receive; e§ 6e* fommt mir gut, it agrees with me. bic iBctci'btfiunB, -en, insult V ^cUcn, tf'., tobark ^ htioli'ntn, w., to reward btm'ddt^tiRcn, w. refl., to get posses- sion of bcmet'fctt, w., to notice, remark bie fflcmcr^funfl. -«"> remark, obser- vation bcnath'bavt, neighboring ^ ' htnu'litn, w., to use. htob'aiittn, w., to observe bereifi'nen, «"., to take into account, reckon up ietclfen, w., to travel through btxtW, ready *^ ber ©ergf -(e)^» -«/ mountain Bernettr *<»"., to hide ber ©criiftt', -§, -e, report btx'WXtw, w., to report beru'fcit, « -^, "^e, reference, regard btetettf str., to offer bag S3ilbr -(e)§, -er, picture, reilectiou bilbett, w., to form / ber 93i(bb(iutv, -§, -^,^ sculptor bie SBt(bunSr education biaiB' cheap binbem «^r., tobind bi§, until, up to bii^er'r up to now, formerly bie 93itte, -n, prayer, request blttc, please ! -^ bitten, str., to request, ask bitter, bitter bittcrli*, bitterly blanf, bright, sparkling blafen, str., to blow baS ©tott, -(e)g, -^er, leaf, page bteiben, str., to remain (fein) ber S3IidF, -{e)§, -e, glance, look blidfett, w., to look blittb, blind bHt^cn, w., to fiash blitljen, w., to bloom, flourish ba§ 93Iiintd)ett, -§, — , rfuft., flowret bie ©Iltmc, -n, flower ba§ ©Ittt, -(e)§, blood |/ 302 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN y bic S&tntt, -H, blossom, flourishing condition bcr Soben, -^, ^, ground, floor ber iBbljnicrttialb, -(e)^, Bohemian Forest bic ©orfc, -n, purse ftO^, bad, wicked, angry hH^avtii, malicious Btrateit/ sir., to roast ber JBraucft, -(e)§, ^c, custom htdXtiiitXtt w., to use, employ hvamn, i^., to brew firaUtt, brown hV(lU\cttf «'., to roar, resound hvtditnt sir., to break hxtit, broad hvtnntn, irr to burn ; cf. App. 88 bcr «Brtef, -{e)§, -e, letter bic ^riUe, -n, spectacles brinoett, t/*?"., to bring, take ; cf. App. 88 ba§ Sdvot, -(e)^/ -C/ bread bcr IBru*, -(e)^, ^c, fraction bcr IBruber, -^, ^, brother hvummtn, w.^ to grumble bcr Srutttten, well ba§ S^ritnnleiUf -S, — , rfm., little spring bic Stuftr ^c, breast, bosom ba§ JBu*, -(e)§, ^cr, book bie aSiidjfe, -n, rifle hudtn, w. refl. , to bend Ibuffeitt, to study, •' dig" boS ©uttbet, -3, — , bundle hunt, gay, varicolored bie 93urBf -en, castle ber 93urscr, -3, — , citizen ber Surf^e, -n, -n, student, lad bic SSnfiitttnlitvv'UitiUit, joyous student-life bic 93utf$entuft» ^e, joy of youth bcr Gfiarol'tcr, -8, -c, character bic ^OttWnt, -n, cousin s bo, adv., there, then ; coraj., aa babel', adv., with that, over it ba§ So^, -e3, -^cr, roof bofur'f for that bftficr', hence, from there ba^in', thither, there bdtttalS, at that time bamit', iu order that, with that batn^fen, «'., to subdue bonn, then batauf, thereupon, on it barin'/ in that, therein bftru'bcr, at it, about it, at that borum', therefore, about it barun'ter, under it boft, C071J., in order that ; that bau'cm, «?., to last babon, adv., from that, away ' batJDt'', before that bQ3tt'» at that, in addition, besides beifen, w., to cover, set bcitt, thine, your ber Segen, -3, — , sword bcrfcl'be, that one, he beftittie'ren, w., to decline bemittisen, w., to humiliate benfen, in-., to think. Cp. App. 88 ba§ 2)enfma(, -3, -"er, monument beim, conj., for bcr, bie, ba§, the; this; who berienige, dem. pron., that one bertuetr, while, meanwhile ber 2)crhilfjft, -8, -C, dervish bc^, archaic for beffen beS^albf therefore, on that account befto, adv., the bCUtUd), distinct beutfA, German; ber, bic 2)eutfcfte, the German beutfft'frottjbflf*, Franco-Prussian ba^ 2)eutffttonb, -(c)g, Germany ber Xi^ttv, -3, — , poet btrf, thick ; fleshy bienen, w., to serve ber ^ten^r, -§, — , servant ber Sicttft, -., to traverse bUVt^^maiQen, «'., to pass through, ex- perience bur(6fc^au^cn» «'., to see through, penetrate burdrfd)(QSen, sir. refi., to make one's way ber Uurftfdjttttt, -(e)^, -e, average y btttfen, w., to be allowed biirr, thin, withered burfttQf thirsty bitftet, dark, gloomy e(en, adv., just now ; adj., level cbcnfo, just as bic ®cfc, -n, corner cftc, ronj., before bie ©five, -n, honor t\^X\\^, honest bie €^rnd)fcit, -ctt, honesty ei, why ! bie 61^ c, -n, oak ber ©ib, -{e)^, -e, oath ber ©ifcr, -3, eagerness, zeal elftcn, adj., own bic ©tflcnart, -en, peculiarity ba§ ^iflCntUW, -^, ^ev, property eilCtt, M'., to hurry (fein) elit» one, a, an etltatt'bcr, one another, each other etu'6t{ben, w. refl.^ to imagine ber ©tttbrurf, -{e)g, ^e, impression ctnfa^, simple ber ©infnil, -8, ^c, scheme, idea ein'fftHctt, sir. rejl., to occur; to in- terrupt (fein) ; e^ faUt ntir ein, it oc- curs to me Ctu'flttbcn, str. rejl., to come, to join in ber ginflu^, -ffe§, ^ffe, influence Ctn'flCllCtt, str., to agree (with) etn'flrobcn, str., to bury bie Ginficlt, -en, union eintjettn^, homogeneous A, eitttR, ivt one, unified etntgef several, a few, some eiittge§, some ctn'ft^rcit, "'., to lodge with, stop (fein) ctum(t(, once ; once upon a time ba^ @tnma(eins)', — , multipMcatloH table bie @inr{ti)tun(}, -en, arrangement -,^-3 — treffcn, to make arrangements (infant, lonesome, alone eln'fdjtftfcn, str., to go to sleep (fein) eln'fdjHcftCtt, sir., to enclose cln'frftreltcn, str., to intervene (fein) Ctn'fcftcn, str., to admit elnft, once, at some time etn'ftccfctt, 10., to pocket eln'trctcn, str., to enter ^ ber ©intritt, -(e)§, -c, entrance v bag ^intierftiittbnid, -ffe^, -ffe, under- standing ein'minigen, w., to consent / bie (Stntno^nersofil, -en, population \/ einjifl, only, sole bag @ifcn, -g, — , iron bie ©if cnftonec, -n, iron rod, staff ; ber ©lcfrtnt'» -en, -en, elephant bag ©tementar'fad), -eg, ^er, branch of elementary instruction ber e(cmcntar'nntcrrid)t, -3, ele- mentary instruction elf, eleven bic ©Item, plw., parents cmtJOtTommcn, str., to rise (in the world) (fein) emtior'f^auen, «'., to look up 304 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN tm\i0V'Uvthtn, w., to seek to rise bag (Sttbe, -§, -n, end euben> w., to end cni»H«ft, final ; finally enB(c), narrow y, bcr @nact, -3, ~, angel bag eufilottb, -§, England CltBlifft, English CtttfleB'ncn» w., to reply Ctttftat'tCtt, *«r., to contain entra'ten* sir., to escape bie ©ittfftcl'bUttBf *cn, decision Cntf^tittJ'fen, w'., to escape; to slip away (fein) entflftttJltt'bCtt, str., to disappear (fein) Ctttjc^'Utft, terrible [ment bie @nttau^f^unBf -en, disappoiut- enttoei'l^en, w., to desecrate ettttui'rfeltt, w., to develop bie @ttth>irf'(e)IUttB, -en, development entju'rfett* w., to charm bic Stio'llge, -n, epoch er, he tvbt'btn, V}., to tremble bie @tbe, -n, earth baS @rctB'nt§, -ffe§, -ffe, event bie @irf al^'vunB' -en, experience tX^Xt'^tXi, sir. refl., to pour forth crBrel'fcn» sir., to seize J^ etr^al'ten, str., to receive ; to maintain tt\tt'htXl, sir. refl., to rise bie ©rfie'fittttBr -en, rise, uprising, ttln'XlttXt, w. refl. , to remember ^^ etfctt'ticn, irr.f to recognize ; of. App. 88 crfto'rctt, w., to explain, disclose bie @tf((irunBr -en, explanation crfUn'BCttf str., to resound (fein) ertau'fiett, w., to permit ber ^v\V6nx%, -3, -e, erl-king ernft, earnest tXQ'htvn, to conquer ertiro'Ben, w'., to prove, to test crpttttfcn, tf., to refresh crrei'djcn, 'w., to reach crf^al'tcttf^f . to resound (fein) crfdjci'ncn, str., to appear (fein) bie @tf$ci'nunB> -en, phenomenon erfftto'flett, str., to slay et;flftb|)'fcit, M*., to exhaust etf^tCCfCtt, w. trans., to frighten; str. intrans., to be frightened crflftt'lteft, evident Crft, first, only ba§ @tftaunen» -§, astonishment erftOUtt'tlft, surprising etftaUttt', astonished crftcnS, first erftrc'rfcn, w., to extend ettva'djotf w. i»/r., to wake up tXiOdV'Xtn, w., to expect, wait for CrItiar'tUttfiStJOn, expectantly erttjcr'bcn, str., to earn er)a^'(en, w., to relate bic ©rjie^'unBr -en, education C§, it ber @fet, -§, — , ass, donkey effctt, sir., to eat bag @fTcn» -8, food, victuals ettUQ^r something, somewhat cucr, your eurojjo'tfd), European CtuiB' everlasting, ever bag ©la'mcn, -g, — , examination bag ©icm'tJCI, -g, — , example tlWtWxtn, w., to exist bag Sftftf -(e)§f ^er, branch bag gobftCtt, -§, — , fH»«., slender^ thread ber Sabcn, -g, "■, thread bie Softue, -n, flag fa'^ten, str., to go, drive, ride (fein) ber {^Ql^ritieB' - -"/ -"/ falcon ber 3f«»Hf -{e)g, ^e, case fatten, «?"ep. ■Jft'^A ace, against, toward bic @escnb, -en, region ba§ @cftcim'tti§,-ffeS, -flc, secret Rtfitimni^tioU, secret X St!^cn» 5t§'btcttct, -g, — , beadle BCttt, lieber, liebft, gladly ; ic^ l^abc — , I like ; i^ Qe^(f)t'f)tn, sir., to happen (fein) BC[ftctt', smart, clever bag @cfftcnf% -{c)g, -c, present bic ®t\{iiWtC, -n, story, history BCfd)tncrbiB, pliable BCfdjhJtttb', quick V-^ ber ©cfcl'Ie, -tt, -tt, companion bag ©cfldjt', - -ett, -ett, count, earl ber ©rantf -(e)g, sorrow Btfttt, gray bag (Bvauen, -g, horror Btaufen, w., to shudder ; eg flvauft il^ttt, he shudders bag @rauf en, -g, horror Btei§, old, hoary ber @tobtan, ruffian ; lout Broft, large, great BtofjarttBr grand, magnificent bic ®viifit, -tt, greatness GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 307 bic ®VOfitUttn, plur., grandparents bie ®tOfnnuttCV, ^, graudmother ber ^ro^tiatcr, -^, ^, grandfather Btiitt, green ber @runb, -(e)§, -^e, ground, reason Qtiinben, «'., to establish, found Btunbttftr thoroughly Brilftctt, w., to greet gutfctt, w. , to peep, gaze slyly BUtbcn, golden bie @unft, favor \ gut, good, well ba3 (iitjmna'fium, -§, -ien, prepara- tory school 6 bag ^aav, -(e)§, -c, hair IjaOcn, w., to have ber fyabidit, -3, -e, hawk ber Qal)n, -(c)^, -"e, cock, rooster Iiald, (idj-, half l^iay bee ^QltifctcrtOfl, -{e>3, -c, half-holi- bie J&otftc, -n, half ftalten, sir., to hold, stop; — toon, think of ber jammer, -3, ^, hammer bie ^anbr ^c, hand bie Qant>axbtit, -en, fancy work, sew- ing ber Iponbcl, -3, trade ; fight Iianbcdt, w., to treat, act bie OaUbc(Sftabt, ^e, commercial town fian^tn, sir. inlr., to hang tliinoen, w. Ir., to hang I) art, hard ber ©afe, -n, -n, hare fiaffcn, w., to hate ftofjU*, ugly ber Qauih, -e^/ breath !0(tU(f)Cn, «'., to breathe bag fyau\it, -(e)§, "er, head ftoit^tfa^lid), principal ber ^ttU^tfolj, -eg, "e, principal clause ber ^au^t^(ht*)Cvt>miU, -(e)§, -e, main emphasis bie OoutJtftobt, ^e, capital city bag ^au§, -eg, ^er, house; 5u §auf(e), at homo ; nad) ^auf(e), home(ward) bag ©ftuStlct, -(e)g, -e, domestic ani- mal I)Ct(ia, holy, sacred bag Qeim, -eg, home I)Ctnt, adv. (towards) home bag ^cimattanb, -immcts(aM{c), -en, elysian fields bic fyimmtl^^avbt, -n, heavenly sheaf bag ©immctsadjt, -(e)g, light of heaven bag .€)tmmct§jclt, -eg, sky InmmUfd), heavenly 308 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN Jiin, away, along, on, thither IjtUOb', down l)inbuird)', through t)inein% in, within IliltUseU, w., to lay down; refl., lie down l)tnteir, prep. tv'Uh dat. or ace, behind bei- <&ttttcrBrunb, -(e)§, ^c, back- ground fiilt ttttb !)Cr, to and fro Innmi'tev, dowu(ward) lliftor'ifd), historical Iiodi, high (^b^er, l?0(f)ft) bie ^ocflfdiulc, -n, university, tech- nical school f)bd|ft, extremely ber i5of, -e§, ^e, court, yard Itoffen, w., to hoi>c bie i^offttuitn, -en, hope bic ©bljc, -n, height ber i^o^lroeo, -(e)^, -e, gorge f)Olt>, gracious i f)o(en, w., to get, fetch ba? Qolh, -e^, wood Ijdljcrn, wooden tt'oven, w., to hear ba§ j&of^Jitat', -3, "^er, hospital hiibftfl, pretty ba§ ©iificUottli, -e§, "er, hilly country I)itncn, 10., to veil, cover, clothe ber jOujib, -(e)§, -e, dog Jmitbcrttoufenti, 100,000. Cf. App. 47 ber QmxfitV, -§, hunger : — Ijabin, to be hungry I)ttnan8» hungry l)it))fcit, w., to hop. juinp(fein) ber J&ut, -e§, "e, hat bie ^Ut, care, protection .,/ I)ittcn, w., to guard, take care of ' ber J&utcr, -§, — , guardian, shepherd bie ^ittte, -n, hut inbeffeu, meanwhile ; while ber ^fUtiifatttl^ -^, -e, indicative bie ^iibuftrie', -n, industry inbuftricU', industrial ber Ont)nltf -§, conteutsv imtCtt, within . iuSflCfomt', altogether X^ ber Snf^cftor, -^, -en, inspector iutcrcffOttt', interesting ilttcrcffie'tCtt, w. rejl., lo be interested bie ^nucrfiou', -en, inversion iro'nifd), ironicj|l ivvit), wrong IT /* trrctt» ^t?. »"e/Z., to err, be mistaken / ber ^ri'tum, -^, "er, error, mistake ba§ atn'Ucu, -§, Italy italic'ttifrf), Italian io» yes, indeed {nflCtt, "'., to hunt, chase ber ^Hflcr, -§, — , hunter, huntsman ba^ 3rtl)r, -e^, -e, year bic 3nl)rcsjnl)l, -en, date; year bag 3rtt)Cl)im'ticrt, -g, -e, century iiiljrlicl}, yearly ber 3al)rmnrft, -§, ^e, fair bev Oammcr, -§, pain, sorrow, long- ing initduett/ w., to shout with joy f"^ ic . . . bcfto, the . . . the Jcbcr, every, each jcb0d)'» however ientanb, someone, somebody iener, that, the former, he ic^tB, present UHt, now iunfi, young ber Suttfic, -n, -n, boy bie ^uuflfvnu, -en, maiden ber ^uuBtittB, -§, -e, youth iihlBft, recently 3Iir» your; you iftr, her ; their immcr, always tmmcrbor, ever ber SmtJcrtttiU', -§, -e, imperative ba§ 3m|)crfcft, -§, -e, preterite itt, prep. iot7/i dat. or ace, in, into inbem', while; in that ber Sotfcr, -§, — , emperor bag S!atfcrrct*, -g, -e, empire fftU, cold ber ^omcrab'r -en, -en, comrade ber ^om^Jf, -e8, -"e, fight, struggle, battle GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 309 fiimtifem w., to struggle, fight bie JJanilC, -n, can bie UapH, -n, cap bie Uavtt, -n, map bie Sotoftro'iJ^c, -n, catastrophe bcr Soter, -^, — , male cat bie Jialfc, -n, cat faufett/ M'.,to buy ber Slaufmann, -{e)g, ^er, merchant (^aufleute) laum, hardly, scarcely tef}Vtn, w., to turnj feitt, no, not any icuntn, irr., to know, be acquainted with, Cf. App. 88 ber tcrr, -(e)§, -e, fellow fif crlfif cockadoodledoo ! ba§ ^ittb, -eg, -er, child ber ^ittbcrRittt, -{e)g, -e, child's mind bie ^irdde, -n, church ber Sirftturm, -3, H, church-tower, steeple flor, clear bie ^(affC/ -n, class f(affifd), classical fleibettr w'., to clothe bie ^leibuuB, -en, clothing fltin, small, little [school bie tteinftnberfditttc, -n, elementary iUttevtt, w., to climb (fein) bag ^lima, -§, climate fUltSen, str., to resound, ring bag ^(oftet, -§, "; convent Hufl, wise, clever ber $$(umt)eu, -«, — , lump ber ^nabe, -n, -n, boy, lad bie Slneiiie, -n, tavern C^ ber Sod), -(e)§, ^e, cook toUttn, IV., to boil, cook bie Sodjin, -nen, cook fol)Ifd)ltiOtJ, black as coal ber Somet', -en, -en, comet fommen, str., to come (fein) ber Sbnifl, -8, -e, king bie JliintBttt, -nen, queen fontBttdl, royal bag tottiBtCtft, -g, -e, kingdom ber Soniunfttb', -g, -e, subjunctive fbnnen, w., to be able, can, may bcr So^jf , -eg, H, head '[tic bag SoDfredmettf -g, mental arithme- bag Sortt, -<«)^, ^er, grain, corn bcr SbrtJcr, -g, •-, body foimotlDti'tU^/ cosmopolitan foften, w., to cost bie JlofteiU pi-, cost, expense ber SlroflCttf -g, — , collar bie Jlraft, H, strength, force V' froitf , sick, ill ber Sl'reusjus, -g, ^e, crusade fried) en, str., to creep bev S^ricfl, -eg, -e, war friCflCtt, «'., to get, catch ^^.-^ ber JJriCflcr, -g, — , warrior bie ^rottC, -n, crown bie R'rbUUng, -en, coronation bie Sriicfe, -n, crutch bag Siitftlcltt, -g, — , chick bie KuficJ, -n, bullet bie Sul), ^e, cow fiifti, cool fitl^n, brave, daring, bold fulturcU', cultural bie Sunft, 'e, art ber Siinfttcr, -g, — , artist bie Suttftftattc, -n, home of art bag Sunftitierf, -g, ~t, work of art ber SiH)fcrftcd)cr, -g, — , steel en-^V/ graver ber S^urfurft, -en, -en, Prince Elector lurU'reu, w., to euro ber SutrfuS, ^urfe, course furj, short fiiffen, w., to kiss bie Sitfte, -' .coast, shore ((id)e(n, w., to smile Iad)Cn, w., to laugh bie SoflC, -n, situation, site bag !i!anb, -eg, ^er, land, country bie fianbc§morf, -en, border (of a country) ber Sanbtttann, -., to listen laut, loud laxtttn, w., to run ; sound ; be lauitv, sheer, nothing but ItbtXt, w., to live baS ficbCtt, -^, life le6ettbf living bie fieben§art, -en, mode of life, good manners bag Selien§icil|ir, -(e)§, -e, year of one's life leifen, w., to lick leiftnem «'•, to lean (elbtcttf «'., to teach ber gcljrcr, -§, — , teacher bie gcftrcrittf -non, teacher ber ficibfudjS, -(e)^, ^e, fag Ici^t, easy, light ba§ gcib, -eS, sorrow, harm ba§ gcibCtt, -3, — , suffering Ictb tun, to hurt, harm Icifc, soft, gentle bic ficftion', -en, lesson bie ficrftc, -n, lark Icxtltn, w. , to learn IcfCtt, sir., to read ber fief cr, -g, — , reader bic ficfcrittf -nen, reader lc^t» last ; le^tereg, the last-named ^ ICttthUn, w., to shine ^ bie fiettte, plur., people ba§ fit*t, -e§, -er, light lieb, dear bie fitc6e> -n, love ; beloved licbeit, w., to love UcbenStoitrbtB. charming liebliA, lovely, charming ^ ba§ fitcb, -eg, -er, song bag fitebetf rfim., little song liegen, « w., to flare ber fiol^n, -{e)g, -"e, reward, pay ber fiofat'bcjirf, -g, -e, local district »/" bag fio!^, -eg, -e, lot, fate ^ Ibfeit, ^t'-, to loosen, solve losS'flCften, s -n, mien, manner*-^ bie WiQvation', -en, migration mitb, mild bie 9Jti(tie, mildness, generosity bte WiUion', -en, million ber WlUion'dv', -8, -e, millionaire bie WtnWtt, -n, minute niit, prep, with dat., with; adv., along tnttchtait'ber, together bag UJattclb, -§, pity niit'fdjJUOrmCtt, w., to wander along bag arattet, -g, — , means mittclnltcrllrf), mediteval ber 9jattclDunft, - yjiobei, -8, — , furniture bag iWiobarijilfShiort, -(e)g, ^er, mo- dal auxiliary tltOBClt, «'., may, like mofl(td), possible; nxbfllic^ft flut, as good as possible ber a^oitb, -(e)g, -c, moon ber artonbcnfdietiu -g, moonshine, moonlight bag 9)toos>, -eg, -e, moss IttOOfin. mossy ber iUtorb, -{e)g, -e, murder ber iUtorber^ -g, — , murderer tuorncn, tomorrow ber 9JiornCtt, -g, — , morning bag SWorncntrot, -rep. with ace, without bag Cftr, -{c)§, -en, ear ber Dnfct, -§, — , uncle orbentdd), proper, orderly bie Orbnung, -en, order bie DrbtC, -S, command, order ber Drt, -{c)§, ^er, place -n, -n, raven rtidicn, w., to avenge, take revenge bag Siiibliien, dim., wheel ^k ber JRanb, -{e)g^^er, edge, margin rrtfd), quick Y troftcn, to., to rest ber '^ai, -(e)g, advice tntcn, .'itr., to guess, advise ber Statgebet, adviser, counsellor bag9fiatf(fr,-g,—, riddle roul), rough ber JHaum, -(e)g, H, space, room riiumcn, w., to clear tftufdien, w., to rustle bag Sicorntjmnofinm, -§, -ien, high- school (scientific) bie 9iei!^enmaf^ine, -n, counting-ma- chine GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 313 rcdiltCU, «'., to reckon, do ba^ dieifinen, -§, — , arithmetic Vttht, right bie dicbe, -n, speech, discourse ; eine — I^alten, to malve a speech rcbettf w., to speali, tallc bag iHcfortn'Qtjmnafiuitt, -S, -en, high-school rCflC, active bcr dUfitn, -t. — , rain bic 9{egen)eit, -en, rainy season bag dicidt, -(e)g, -e, reahn, empire ret*, rich retdjenf «'., to reach, hand ber 9{eiff|tum/ -(e)g, ^er, wealth, riches rcif, ripe bag 9ieife)ettnnt§, -fteg, -ffc, final ex- amination ; graduating diploma bie Mcifte, -n, row, turn ber 9ictf)CU> -g, — , dance rein, clean, pure bie JRcifc, -n, trip, journey rcif en, «-., to travel (fcin) ber 9ictfent»e, -n, -n, traveller ret^en, sir., to tear, snatch ber 92ettergmoun, -{e)§, ^er (-Icute) rider, cavalryman rctten, sir., to ride (horseback) (fein) ber 9ieij, -eg, -e, charm reijcn, «'., to charm ; to aggravate rctjcnb, charming bie ateHfiion', -en, religion bcr die\t)cU\ respect retten, «'., to save, rescue rtd)ten, »'., to direct ber SHirtjter, -g, — , judge ridjtlji, right ber 9Ji(fttfDru*, -{e)g, -^e, sentence, judgment • ber JRieBcI, -§, — , bolt^ v ber JRicfc, -n, -n, giant ^ tinoen, str., to wrestle, wring rins§, tdt, snow-covered bie Sdinccfloife, -n, snowflake ber (©tftttcibcr, -§, — , tailor fc^nctcn, w., to snow fdjllcH, quick bie ©dmcHiflfcit, rapidity ber 8d)nitter, -§, — , reaper bie (©fthtttcrin, -nen, reaper fftttitrctt, v)., to strap, lace up ftfinttrrctt, «'., to hum fdjOtt, already fd) bu, beautiful ; interj., very well ! bie -nen, pupil, student ber (SdjuIIe'^rerr -§, — , school-teacher bie (Scljultcr, -n, shoulder ba§ iS^U(n)Cfcu> -§, school-system bie 84u()eit, -en, school-time ber 6lf)Uftcr, -^, — , shoemaker, cob- bler f^Uttcftt, w., to shake ber (S^U^, -{e)§, protection fd)it)ad)U^f weakly ber ©^mStftlittB, -§, -e, weakling ber (SdltvaQCt, -§, -^j brother-in-law bie iSd)tutiocrin, -nen, sister-in-law ber ©ifttMOttj, -e§, % tail fdimarmcn, w., to gush ; express enthusiasm ; wander (fein) f^tuarj, black ber ©(fittJarjhuilb, -(e)g, ^er. Black Forest ftfltucbcttf ^f'., to hover (fein) ^ ber Sijjjtjctf, -(e)§, -e, tail •''^ ftf)tUCtncn> «^n, to be silent ba^ ®ii)it)eiocnr -S, silence bie S^tveij, Switzerland f Atuer, heavy, difficult ber @(l)tvcrt)unft, -e§, -e, centre of gravity bn^ (edliuert, -(e)§, -er, sword / bag Sdltticrtscflttt, -«, rattling of swords bie Sdinieftet, -n, sister fd)tuiens, difficult, hard K fdltDUtgen^ 5^r,, to swing, flutter ; refl., to vault f d)tt)0ten, */r., to swear, vow] ber SdittJttt, -(e)§, ^e, vow, oath fcft§, six bag ©ctfjftcl, -§, — , sixth fC(I|Siunbfie&3tn, seventy-six fcdljel^n, sixteen ber ©cc, -§, -n, lake bie ©cc, -n, sea bie ©cctc, -n, soul ber (Scoettf -g, — , blessing 4^ \t\stXX, str., to see / fcljr, very bie iSeibe, -n, silk , fclbCtt, silken fcitt, his fcttt, str., to be (fein) f etnctltienenr for his sake fcit, prep, with dat., conj., since ' bie Scitc, -n, side fcttCttS, prep, ivith gen., on behalf of bie (Scfun'bc, -n, second fclbcr, fctbft, self GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 315 fcWcn, seldom ba§ Scmc'ftcr, -§, — , semester ber (Sena' tor, -§, -en, senator fe^cn. It}., to put, set; refl., to sit down, be seated feufjCtt, w., to sigh fl^, liimself, herself, itself, oneself, themselves fi^cr, sure, safe fie, she; they fleben, seven flefienftUttbert, seven hundred ba§ C^t, -§, -e, woodpecker ber S|)erltns, -^, -e, sparrow ber StltCgct, -§, — , mirror, surface ba§ 8t)iel, -eS, -e, game ftJtclcn, w., to play ber SiJtctmonn, -(e)g, ^er (-leute), fiddler, player fptnncn, sir., to spin ber S^orn, -(c)§, ©jjoren, spur bie S|)rad)C, -n, speech, language ; einc — [?alten, to make a speech fprc^cn, sir., to speak fVticftcn, sir., to sprout (fein) fliringcn, str., to spring ; leap (fein) ber («Dro6, -ffe§, -ffe (bte e^nofie, -n), scion, shoot, sprout. f^rnbeln, «'., to gush forth (fein) bte ., to stare, glare, gaze Si^Wt prep, with gen. instead of ftatt'flnbcn, sir., to take place ftc^en, str., to prick, stab ftetf en, "'., to place, put ; be ber Stetfcn, -§, — , stick, staff, rod / ftclftcn, str., to stand ftcljtcn, str., to steal ftciflcn, str., to climb (fein) ber Stein, -(e)^, -e, stone bie Stede, -n, spot, place ftedcn, w., to place, put ftcrbcn, str., to die (fein) ber Stern, -(e)^, -e, star bag Stcrntcin, -§, — , dim., little star ftctlA, steady, continual bag Sticffinb, -e§, -er, stepchild bie Stiefmutter, '^, stepmother 316 ELEMENTS OF GER'MAN '3-- ftill, soft, quiet, silent bic IV., to put, jam bie uk, to storm, rush ftitrjcn,' w., to fall (fein); refl., to plunge ( ftit^en, w., to support fU^tn, w., to seek, look for ber iSitbeu, -g, south fitblt^, southern, south bie ^nntmt, -n, sum, total fitft, sweet bag j^ bag 2;or, -(e)g, -e, gate tot, dead to ten, w., to kill bag Xotenamt, -(e)g, ^er, burial ser- f vice ' ber JotettBrrifier, sexton '*-* ber SotfditOBf -^, ^C/ murder, man- slaughter bie 2robitton', -en, tradition tvagen, str., to bear, carry ; to wear bic %xa\it, -n, tear tcHnenfeu^t, damp, tear-bedewed ^ ber Svauitt, -y unt'ftiitjen, w., to subvert, overturn Um'tUtt, sir., to wrap Itttbcfottttt, unknown unb, and ungebunben, unrestrained unnefiifir, about / unncfttltbcrt, uuhinderedV ttltflcljorfom, disobedient J, Itnncrftbc, uneven, odd Z bass Uunctiim, -g, -C, monster 1/ ttuntittfltd)/ unfortunate, unlucky bie UntUcvfitot', -en, university bag XlniucrfltatS'tcfiCtt, -g, university life UnmoB'Hrfl, impossible W Uimitl^ useless >ag Unredjt, -/ bag ascrfcljrfe'hjcfcn, -g, social iuter- course f — Ucvfcfjrt', inverted ; wrong tJCrlOtt'nCtt, Ji'., to demand bag iBertan'ncn, -g, demand -+• Ucrtaf'fCtt, 5^r., to leave, desert I tJCtUe'rcit, 5ifv., to lose ber ajcrluft', -(e)g, -c, loss bcrmirfctt, «., to miss ber SJetSr -eg, -e, stanza, verse. Hue uerfSu'mctt, w., to miss tJCrftfjaf'fCU, "'., to procure Ucrfdjic'ticn, diflfereut bie ajcrfrfjic'bcnljctt, -en, difference UCl'frfllic'ffCtt, sir., to lock up, shut off Ucrfdjo'ttCtt, «'., to spare Ucrf^rct'bCU, «., to condemn bert)3unt>'barr vulnerable Ucrjci'lftCtt, sir., to forgive ber JBcttcr, -g, -n, cousin Ijict, much Uielfrift, manifold t)teQet^t% perhaps Dtcr, four Uierf^annta, four-in-hand bag aSicrtcl, -g, — , fourth, quarter uicrunbulcrjin, forty-four btCt-Unb)tuaiUt(l, twenty-four Ulcrjcftu, fourteen iJicrjtfl, forty ber JBoact, -g, ^, bird bag 2$oae(d)en> -g, — , dim., little bird bag S^onUitt, -g, — , dim., little bird bag 5Kolf» -eg, ^er, people ; nation bte JBiJlfcrnianbcrUttfl, -en, migration of races bie S^oltsfi^ute, -n, public school ber JBoHsftamm, -(e)g, ^e, tribe bie 58otf5hlittfd)oft, political econ- omy tJOa/full tloIIbrtn'nCU^ irr., to accomplish \ Mow, prej>. with dat., from, of, out of tiOt, ]>rep. with dat. and ace, before, in front of ; out of, because of tjorbci', adv., past UorliCl'CttCU, w., to prepare bie iSorbcrcitung^ -en, preparation iJOr'fiubcn, str., to discover, iind Dor'fommcu, sir., to occur (jein) bor'HcflCtt, sir., to lie before; ein ;3rrtum liegt Dor, a mistake occurs Uor'traflCtt, sir., to recite tiotit'ber, adv., past as ttiriA, wakeful bie 9Sad)C, -n, watch, guard tuadjCU, w., to"watch, guard tvadlfctt, str., to grow (fein) bie S3ftlf)tf -en, watch, guard tuaantf w., to dare, venture ber SSJftflcn, -g, — , wagon, carriage hjanbrttflR, reckless ber ^abtf^tudlr -^^, ^^i watchword, battle-cry toahv, true tttcifirenb, ndv. ccnj., while ; />re/). wtVA P'en,, during GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY 310 ttJaftrfjuft, truthful, truly toaffvliih, truly ! bte SSaifc, -n, orphan ber SBalb, -eg, -"er, woods, forest bag aSotti'njcititcitt, -§, — , wood- nymph ber aSatbjOUbCt, -§, — , forest charm bte aBatftot'tft, Walhalla (the palace of departed heroes) bte aSalfu're, -tt, valkyrie tnattcn, «'., to wander, drift (fein) bte gSottb, ^e, wall njanbetttf side form to toanbern ber SBonbcrcr, -§, — , wanderer nianbcrm w., to wauder(fein) tuanfcUf w'., to waver, swerve Joontt, when? tuarnu warm njortctt, w., to wait tuarum', why? twos*, what, that which hias fitr eiit, what sort of bag JCSoffcr, -g, — , water bte aajoffcrfdicibe, -n, watershed ber aBc(!)fct,-g,—, change; bill of ex- change totdcn, w. trans., to awaken Uiebec . . . nocfl, neither . . . nor mcfl, adv., away ber aSJcfl, -{e)g, -c, way toCflCll, prep, vnth gen., because of, for the sake of tucg'raumeu, w., to clear away ItJCfl'rciftCtt, sir., to tear away tticljcn, w., to wave ; blow . bte i£8e^mut> wistfulness, nielancholy)o mcfl'tun, str., to hurt n)Ctd)Ctt, str., to yield (fetit) ^/ bte SEBciiftfcl,- Vistula (river) bte JKQcibc, -n, willow bte 9Beit)nad)t, -ett, Christmas hjeit, because bte SBcitc, time; while ber SSctlt, -(e)g^ -c, wine meinen, w,, to weep ttjctfc, wise h)Ct''fctt, str., to show, point bie SScisfjcit, -ett, wisdom Jtjcift, white tucit, far, wide bte aScttC, -n, distance meiter, farther, on tvcC4ier> which melicn, w., to wither (fein) bte $Sc(t, -ett, world bag SSc(tQett)U!f)(, turmoil of the world bte aScttftabt, ^e, metropolis hJCtttfl, little, few tuenigftcnS, adv., at least / tUCUtt, when, if toier, who, he who tuetbett, str., to become ttietfcnf str., to throw, hurl bte SBcrfftott, (-ftatte), ^eit, workshop to ett, worth ber aScrt, -(e)g, -e, value bag SScf en, -g, — , being toesliatbr why, wherefore toeftltl^^ westward, west totbev, prep, tvith ace, against hjtbtift, disagreeable toic, as ; than ; how tuiebcr, again tutrnrit, "'., to rock bie JUJicfe, -it, meadow njitb, wild ber 3BtQe(n)> -ttg, will, determination iuidtR, willing niiafom'mett, welcome ! ber SBinbf -(e)g, -e, wind ber JCBittter, -g, — , winter UliujtB, tiny ber 9[9tpfe(, -g, — , tree-top totrbcln, to., to eddy, whirl hiirfCid), real, true ber aStrt, -(e)g, -e, landlord, boat ^ toiffeu, irr., to knov*r bie iCQitme, -it, widow too, where bie SSodie, -it, week toobur^'f by means of whicb ; by what means? ioofiir', why? for which bte SBone, -n, wave ber aSoBcntJrott, -g, surf tooljet', whence toollitt', whither tooftt, well; truly, probably, I d:.re say, I suppose toolitaemut, cheerful tuoiiueu, if., to dwell, live ber aBolf , -(e)g, -"c, wolf bte 953 If c, -n, cloud ber aSotfcttflrauS, -eg, black clouds 320 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN tOoUtn, w., to wish, desire, want to tDOttttt'r with which ; with what? tOOVan', at which, at what? tttOtHUf'f upon which ; upon wliat? ttiOtauS'f from which ; from what? ttJortn'/ in which ; in what, wherein ? bag SBott, -e§, -^er or-^, word, speech bie gBortftcttUttB* -en, word-order XOOVn'htX, at which ; about what? tuobor'f before which ; before what? tUOJU'f for which ; why ? tuunberbar, wonderful nJttttbertli!^), queer tounbetn, •w. refl., to wonder tounbctf $bu, wonderfully beautiful ber SSQunf^, -eS, "-t, wish, desire toiittftfjctt, ti'., to wish ber SBurm, -(e)8, -^er, worm, serpent bic JEButjct, -n, root ttlitrien, w., to season, fill with scent ba§ JEBurjteitt, -3, — , rfim., little root )»VLUn, w., to rage 3 blc Bttfil, -en, number joljlcn, i*., to count ber 3ol)tt, -{e)§, -^e, tooth ber 3onf , -§, quarrel jatt, tender ber 3ftttbettrftttf, -(e)^, "e, magic po- tion XCl^ttCtt, w., to draw jetsen, w., to show bie 3ctlc, -n, line bie 3cit, -en, time bie 3citlan8, stretch of lime JCrfal'len, str., to fall to pieces ; to decompose 3Crflic'fjCtt# «^., to melt away (fetn) ^ aiel^en, str., to draw, pull ((;aben); go, wander (fetn); in Setrac^t — . take into consideration bag 3tct, -s, -e, goal jicmlid), pretty, rather, somewhat bag 3intntcr, -g, — , room joruta, angry 3 It, to ; too jUifctt, w., to thrill, start aucrff, adv.^ at first iW\\^ iUvM\ adv., back JUturf'ficftcn, str., to go back (fetn) iUritrf'slcIlCtt, 5/7-. re^., to withdraw jufom'tnctt, together [join jufont'mcttfitacit, w., to put together, }U'f|ire^en, s'?"-, to encourage; pro- nounce judgment ju'traucn, w., to entrust, believe, to be capable of jutiot'r adv., before jtwci, two ber 3hJci6, - S3ett, — (e)§, —en. before, otdij. , e^e; prep. Dor (ace. anddat.); (= hitherto), bi§l)er'. beg (= request), bitten, s^r.; (for), um with ace. ; (= beg for alms), bettein, w. begg-ar, ber SSettler, — §, — . begin, an ' f angen,sfr. , begin ' nen,sf r. believe, glauben, w. bell, bie ©dieUe, — n. belong (= be in the possession of), gel^o ' ren, w. (dat. ) ; (= appertain to), getjo'ren gn (dat.). bench, bie SSan!, — e. Berlin, S3erlin',—§. best, beft, ber befte, am beften; auf§ bcjte, au^erft gut. better, bejfer. between, gtoifc^en (ace. and dat.) bird, ber SSoge(,-§,-^. birdling, ta^ SSogeld^en, — §, — . black, fd^njarg. blood, ha^ mm, — (e)§. bloom, blii^cn, w. blow, blafen, str. blue, blau. board (= blackboard), bie XafeC, — n; (= wooden board), ba§ SSrett, — e§, — er. boast of, \id} rii^men, w., (gen.). bold(ly), be^er5t',fii^n. book, ta^ mid), — (e)§, — er, boundary, bie ©renge, — n. boy, ber ^nabe, — n,— n; ber^unge, — n, — n; ber 93urfrf)(e), — (e)n, (e)n. brave, ta:pfer, fiil^n. bravery, bie 5ra:pfer!eit. brew, brauen, w. brightness, ber @(an§, — e§. bring, bringen, irr. cf. App. 88. brook, ber SSac^, — (e)^, — e. brooklet, t)a§> S8ad)Iein, — §, — . brother, ber 33rubcr, — §, — , brother-in-law, ber (3d)n)ager, — §, brown, braun. busy, ge[d)aftig. but, conj., aber; fonbern; aUein; adv. nur. buy, fauf en, w. by, an (dat., ace); neben (dat., ace); bei (dat.); (= agency), Oon (dat.); (= means), burd^ (ace); by myself, fiir mid^, call, riifen, str. can, fonnen, w. can, bie ^anne, — n. canon, ber ^o^Iweg, — (e)§, — e. capital, bie ^aiiptftabt, — e. carriage, ber SBogen, — §, — . carry, tragen, str. castle, bag ©d)lo§, — ffe§, — ffer. cat, bie ^a^e, — n; tom-cat, ber ^ater, — g, — ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 323 catch, fangen, str. cause, laffen, str. ; cause to fall, fallen laffeu. century, ha^ i^a^rfiim'bcrt, — §, — e; century old, t)uubcrtjdl)rig. chair, ber ^iic^Icm, — §, — . child, t)a§> ^\nt>, — (e)§, — er. choose, tt)af)Ien, if?. city, bie ©tabt, — e. climate, bag ^lima, — g, — tc. climb, fteigen, str. (fein); flettern, m (fein). clock, bie Vit)x, —en. close, t)erfd)Iie'feen, str., fdjlie'feen, str., §u'mad)en, w. cloud, bie SBolfe, — n. coast, bie ^iifte, — n. coat, ber 9?ocf, — {e)g, — c. cock, ber ^at)n, — (e)g, — c. cold, fait; catch cold, fid) erfdl'tcn; a cold, eine ©rfdl'tnng. come, fontmen, str. (fein). comfort, troften, w. command, befcl^'len, str. commercial city, bie ^anbclSftabt, — e. compelled, be compelled to, miiffen, w. completely, ganj, tioHftanbig. conqueror, ber @ro ' berer, — g, — . contain, entljal'ten, str. contents, ber i^nl^alt, ~(e)§. convict, iiberfii^'rcn, w. cook, ber ^od), ~(c)g, — e; bie ^oc^in, — nen. cost, !often, w. councilor, ber 9?atgeber, —§, — ; ber mat, —{e)^, ^e. count, ber ^raf, —en, —en. count up, anf ' red^nen, w. courage, ber 9Jlnt, — (e)§. course (of a stream), ber Sauf, — e§, — e ; (at a school), ber ^nrfnS. cousin, ber SSetter, — §, — ; bie ©onfi'ne, — n. covered, bebedt'. crow, frozen, w. crown, bie ^rone, — n. crutch, bie ^riicfe, — n. cry, rnfen, str. ; njeinen, w. cure, fnrie'ren, iv. custom, ber SSrand), — e§, — e; bie ©itte, — n ; bie ©ctuo^n ' l;cit, —en. dame, bie i^xau, —en. dark, bnnfcl. daughter, bie Xodjter, — . dead, tot. dear, tencr. death, ber %o\), — e§, — e. declare, bel^an^ ' ten, iv. ; erfld ' ren, w. deep, tief. defeat, befie'gen, w. ; fdjlagen, str. defy, tro^cn, w. (dat.). demand, bie Slnforberung, — en; to make a demand, eine Slnforbe^ rnng fteHen, w. departure, ha§> f^ortgeiien, — §; ber 5luf brnc^, — g, -^e. dervish, ber ^ertt)ifd), — e§, — e. desk, i>a§> ^nlt, — (e)§, — e. destined, be destined, foEen, w. devour, f ceffen, str. die, fterben, str., (fein). 324 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN difficult, fd)h)er, fc^njierig. diligent, flei^tg. disobedient, uiige^orfam. disobey, ungc^or[am fein, s^r. (dat.) (fein); txo^cn,w. (dat.). distinguish, au^'jeid^nen, w. divergence, bie SSerfd)ie ' bent)eit, —en, do, tun, str., madden, w. ; how do you do? tt)te gel^t eg ^^ntw, h)ie befinben ©ie fic^ ? that won't do, ba§ gel^t nic^t. doctor, ber ® of tor, — §, ^ofto'rcn; ber Slrgt, — (c)g, — e. dog, ber §imb, — (e)§, — e. domestic animal, ba§ §au§ticr, -(e)§, -e. donkey, ber (£fef, — §, — . dot, ber ^un!t, — (e)§, — e. dove, bie Xaube, — n. down, (=below), brunten, uiitcii; (=downward«), nicbcr ; sit down, \\d) fe^en, w. dragon, ber ®rac^e, — n, — n. dreadfully, furc^tbar. dream, traumen, w. ; ber Xrauni, -(e)§, --e. drink, trinlen, str.; ber 2^raii!, Srun!, — (e)g, — e. drive, fal^ren, str. (fein). drop, faGen laffen, sfr. ; she drops it, [ie lafet e§ fallen. each, jeber, jebe, jebeg; each other, un§, eud£), fid^, einan ' ber. eagle, ber 2lar, — (e)§, — e. ear, \>a^ DIjr, — §, —en. early, frill^. easy, Teic^t. eat, effen, str. effort, bie Slnftrengnng, —en. eight, (id:^t elector, ber ^nrfiirft, —en, —en. elephant, ber (Slcfanf, -en, —en. eleven, elf. emerald, ber ©maragb', — (e)§, — e. emperor, ber 5^aifer, — §, — . emphasis, ha^ ©etoic^t', — e§; bie SSeto'nnng, —en. empire, tia^ ^aifcrreid^, — §, — e. encounter, befte ' ^en, str. enjoy oneself, fid) amiifie'rcn, w. enumerate, anf 'goljlen, w. equally, ebenfo fel^r; gleic^; tolove equally, gleicf) gem l^aben, ebenfo feljr (ieben n)ie. error, ber i^itrtum, — §, — er. everybody, jcbcrmann. examination, bie ^riifnng, -en. example, "ba^ ©jem':pel, — §, — ; ha^ S3eif^)iel, — §, — c. exceedingly, anf§ :^od)fte or an- fecrfte; l^odjft, anfjcrft. except, an^er (dat.). exhaust, erfd)i)p'fcn, w. expend, an§' gebcn, str. explain, erf Id ' ren, w. expose, OLM^'^t^nXfW. (dat.). extant, befte 'l^enb. eye, 'aa^ 5lnge, — §, — n. face, bag ©efid^t, — (e)§, — er. fact, bie Satfac^e, — n. fair, ber ^a^rmarft, — (e)§, — e. fall, fallen, str. (fein); fall asleep, ein'fd)tafcn, str. (fein). famous, berii^mt'. farmer, ber SSauer, — n or — §, — n. father, ber SSater,- §, — ; father of gods and men, ber 2lIIt)ater, — §. fear, fiird^ten, w. feather, bie geber, — n. feather-bed, tiOi^ geberbett, — (e)§, -en. ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 325 feeble, ^djtoad). fellow, bcr ^erl, —§, — e. field, bag gelb, — (e)§, — er. fl^ht, fdmpfen, iv. ; fedjten, sir. find, [inben, sfr. finder, ber ginber, — g, — . fir, bic Sanne, — n; bcr Xannen-- baiint, — §, — e. fire, ba§ i^enex, — §, — . firm(ly), feft. first, adj. , erft; adi?. (=not until), erjt; at first, guerft; in the first place, erfteu§; (=next), sunad^jt. five, fiinf. fiame, tobern, w. ; bic fjfamme, — n. flat land, bic ©bene, — n. flower, bic ^lumc, — n. flowret, t)a^ S31iimlein, — §, —, bag S31iimci)cn, — g, — . fly, flicgen, str. (fcin). fo^, ber S^ebel, — §, — . fond, be fond of. licb l^abcn, Qcrii l^abcn; adj., liebenb. foolish, toric^t, bumm. for, prep., fiir (ace); not for years, erft nad) ^al)rcn; for cen- turies, ;^a:^rl)un ' berte lang; look out for him, aiig'fd^auen iiai^ i^m, w.; conj., bcnn. foreign, fremb. forest, ber SSalb, — (c)§, -^^r. forge, fd)miebcn, w. forget, bergef'fen, str. form, bilben, w. former, pron., jencr, jene, jeneg; adj., frii^er, borl^er'ge^enb. formerly, friil^er. four, t)ier. four-in-hand, bierfpannig. fox, ber %m&)^, — e§, — e. free ( =set free), bef rei ' en, w. ; adj., frei. friend, ber f^reimb, —it% ~e. frightened, bang; be frightened, erfc^ro'cfcn fcin. from, t)on (dat. ), au§ (dat.); from that, babon' ; from (out of) what, tt)obon'. full, tjoIL garden, ber ©arten, — §, — . gay, bnnt; frotjlic^. gentle, milb, [anft, giitig. German, bciitfd); a German, ein ©entfd^er, eine %n\i\d)t. Germania, bie ©crma'nia. Germany, tia^ 2)entf(i)lanb, — g. get, bcf om ' men, s^r. ; get out of the way ! ge^ au§ bent SBcg ! girl, bag aRobd)cn, — g, — . give, gcben, str. glass, bag ©lag, —eg, — er; adj.» grofern. gloomy, biifter. go, gel^en, str. (fein); go to sleep, cin'fd^tafen, str. (fein), f^lafen ge^en; go out, aug'gcl^cn, s^r. God, ber @ott, —eg, — er. gold, bag ©olb, — (e)g; gold-piece, bag ©olbftiicf, — (e)g, — e. golden, gotbcn. goldsmith, bcr ©olbfd^mieb, — g, — e. good, gilt. gorgeous, prodjtig, praditboH. gown, bag ^leib, — (e)g, — er. grade, bie ©tuf c, — n. grandfather, ber (SJro^bater, — g, grandmother, bie ©rofemntter, — ♦ grass, bag ©rag, —eg, -^er. gray, grau. great, gro^ green, griiiu 326 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN ^ow (= become), toerben, sir. (fein); (= increase), ti)ad)\cn, str. (fein). growth, ba§ 28ad)§tiim, — (c)g; ba§ SBad^feit, — g; (= increase), bag 5lntt)a(i)[en, —§♦ guard, fi^ii^en, ii?. guess, raten, str.; guess riddles, diat\el 15 fen, z^?. gymnasium, bag ©tjmna ' fiiim, —§>, — fieiu hair, ba§ §aar, — (e)§, — e« half, bie ^olfte, — n; adj., t^alb, hammer, ber jammer, — §, — . hand, bie §anb, — e* hand, reic^en, w. happy, gludliii). hard, tjart, fcfitoer; work hard, fc^toer arbeiten; hard earned, fauer tierbient'. hare, ber §afe, — n, — n. hat, ber §ut, — (e)§, — e, hate, l^affen, w. have, l^aben, tc. ; have a thing done, eitoa§> madden (tun) laffen, have to, miiffen, w. hawk, ber ^abic^t, — §, — e. he, er; ber; biefer, head, ber ^o^f, — (e)§, -^c. hear, pren, w. heart, ta^ §ers, — en§, —en. heaven, ber ^intmel, — §, — . heavy, fd^tcer. help, l^elfen, s#r. (dat.). hen, bie §enne, — n. hence, barum' ; beStuegen. her, iijx, xf^xe, if)V, herd, pten, w. Herman, Hermann, — §. hero, ber ^etb, —en, —en. hers, il^rer, i:^re, i^r(e)§. high, \)od), his, adj., fein, feinc, fein; pron., feincr, feine, fein(e)§; pred. adj., fein. historical, l^ifto ' rifcf). history, bie (5)cfc^id)'te, — n. hold, l^alten, str. home, bie §eimat, —en; adv. (=homewards), nad) §aufe, ^cint ; (=at home), §u ^aufe, bal^eim'. homogeneous, einl^eitlic^. hope, fjoffcn, w. horse, "^(1% $ferb, — (e)§, — e; tia^ 9?ofe, -ffe§, -ffe. hospital, ^a% ^ofpital', — §, — er. host, ber SKirt, — (e)§, — e. hour, bie ©tunbe, — n. house, ha^ ^axi^, — e§, — er. how, n)ie. however, cber, boc!^. humiliate, bemiitigen, w. hunter, ber ^ciger, — §, — . hurt, nie^ tun, dr. husband, ber Wamx, — (e)g, — er; ber (^atte, — n, — n. hut, bie §iitte, — n. I,i(^. if, ttjenn ; ob. ill, franf. impulse, ber ^Vi% — (e)§, — e. in, in (aco. and dat.), in the evening, am §lbenb ; in order to, urn gu (inf.); in it, barin'; in what or which, n)orin'. inclination, bie SFJeignng, —en ; ac- cording to his own inclination, nacf) feinem eignen ^opf. increase, "i^a^ SSergro^crn, — §. indoors, brinnen, int ^au^, industrious, flei^ig. influence, ber ©influ^, — ffe§, —ffe. ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 327 inspiration, bet ginfaU, — (e)§, — c. instead of, (an)[tatt ' (gen. ) instruction, ber Unterrid^t, — §. interesting, intereftant'. tntervention, ha^ (Sinfcl)reitcn, — §. into, in (ace.)- inYulnerable, unbertounb ' bar. it, e§ ; ex, [te. its, adj., fein, feme, feitt; pron., fetner, feine, fein(e)g. joyous(ly), tDO^Igemut, freubig, fro^. judge, ber 9licf)ter, — §, — . jump, fpringen str, ([cin). just, adj., gered^t; adv., gerabe, eben. keen(ly), fcf)arf. keep, bel^ol'ten, str. kill, toten, w. kind, giitig, freimbltdE}. kindergarten, ber ^inbcrgarten, kindly, freunbfid^. king, ber ^bnig, — §, — c. kingdom, ha^ konxQxeid), — (e)§,— c. kiss, fiiffen, lo. knight, ber 9iitter, — §, — , know, (=be acquainted with) fennett, irr., cf. App. 88; (= be cognizant of) toiff en, irr. , cf . App. 83; know a lesson, eine Stnfgabe fonnen, w. known, be!annt'; well known, njol^Ibefannt lady, bie ©crnte, — n; bie fjrau, —en. land, ha^ £anb, — e§, — er or — e. language, bie (Bpxad)C, —n; ancient languages, bie alien ' fc^auen, w.; look at, an'f(i)aucn, w.; an'fel^en, str. loosen, lofen, w. ; lodern, w. lord, ber §err, — n, —en. lose, berlie'ren, str.; lose one's way, fic^ berir'ren, w. lost, berirrt'. Louis, SnblDig, — §. love, lieben, w. ; his first love, fcine erjte Siebe. 328 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN lover, bet Siebl^aber, — §, — . low, nicbrig* lowland, bie ©bene,— n. maiden, bic ^ungfrau, —en. make, madden, w. ; make one's way, \id) biirc^ ' fd)Iagen, str. man, ber 9)Jann, — e§, — er; bcr ^en\d), —en, —en. manufacturing city, bie ©ettjerbS- ftabt, -^e. many, tjtele. marry, ^eiraten, t<7. master, ber §err, — n, —en; ber Wei\tex, — §, — . may, bilrfcn, w. meadow, bie SBiefe, — n. means, by means of, mittel^ (gen.) burc^ (ace.) medicine, bie SD^ebi^in', —en. medieyal, nnttelaltcr(id). meet, begeg ' nen, w. (dat. ), (fcin) ; treffen, str. melt, fc^melgen sfr., (fein). merciiant, ber ^anfmann, — (e)§, — leute. mi^lity, mad)tig. migration of races, bie SSoIfcr- tttanberung, —en. mild, mitb. millionaire, ber ^iUionax', — §, — e. mind, ber (Sinn, — (e)§, — e. mine, meiner, meine, mein(e)§ mislead, berf iil^ ' ren, to. moan, dd^^en, w. modern, neuer; mobern'. money, ta^ @elb, — e§, — er. moon, ber Tlonh, — (e)§, — e. morning, ber aJJorgen, — §, — ; mornings, ntorgen^; this morn- ing, j^ente morgen. mortal, bcr Wen^d), —en, —en. most, ttieift; a most difficult examination, eine pc^ft (or au^erft) fdiioierige ^riifnng; the most difficult examination, bie fd^njierigfte ^riifnng. mother, bie SD^ntter, — ♦ mountain, ber 33erg, — (e)§, — e; the mountain-range, ba§ (SJebirge, — §, — . mountain top, ber ©i^fcl,- §,— . mourn, tranern, w. (urn and ace); betran'ern (ace.) mouse, bie Wlau^, — e. moutli, ber SJlnnb, — (e)§, — er. Mr., ber §err, —n, —en. mucli, biel; fel^r. multiplication table, bo§ ©inntal- ein§',— ,— . Munich, \)a^ aJJiinc^en, — §. museum, ha^ 2JJnfe'um, — §, Win- f e ' en. must, mii[fen, w. ; you must not, bn barfft nid)t. my, ntein, meine, meiiu name, ber 9?ame(n), — men§, —men. narrow, eng. national, national'; national hymn, bie 9'?ationar'!^l)mne, — n. native land, t>a§^ ^eimatlanb, —{c% — er. natural, natiir'fici); natural science, bie 9Jatnr'n)iffenfc^aft, —en. near, nal^. need, brand^en, w. neighborhood, bie ^at)e, — n. neither. . .nor, ttieber. . .noc^. nephew, ber S^Jeff e, — n, — n. never, nie. new, neiu ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 329 next, nac^ft. ni^ht, bie '^a^t,—e* nine, neiuu no, itein ; !em, fcine, f ciiu nor, no(i)'f nor I either, icij and; nic^t. northern, norbUc^, norbifdj. not, nic^t. now, mm, je|t. number, bie ^a% —en; bic SfJiim^ ttter, — n. nut, bie 3lu% — ffe. oak, bie (5id)c, — n. obedient, gc^or'fam, fclgfanu obey, QcfiOX'd)cn, w. obliged, be obliged, miiffen, w. obli^in^, gefcil'Iig. observant, beo'bad)tenb. observe, bemcr'fcn, w. occur, ftatt ' ftitbcn, str. o'clock, U^r; at six o'clock, um fed)§ U^r, of, t)on (dat.); of course, natiirlid); of it, that, bat)on'; of which, what, njot)on'. ofl'er, bictcii, str. ofllcer, ber iDffiaier', — §, — c. often, oft, old, alt. on, auf, CL\\ (dat. and ace), on ac- count of, ttjcgen (gen. ). one, ein§; adj., tux, cine, cin; pron., einer, eine, eine§; indef. pron. , man. only, nur. open, adj., often; open the door, ntac^e bie Xixx auf. or, ober. order, in order, um (inf.) orphan, bie SSaifc, — n. our, unfcr, unfre, unfcr. ours, unfrer, unfrc, unfer§; unfcr. out,prep. aug (dat.); adv., 'ijcxau^' , I)inau§', bran^cn. own, eigen. pa^e, bie ©eite, — n. pair, ha^ ^aat, — e§, — e. paper, ha^ ^apicx', —^, — e. past, nac^ (dat.); oorbci', ooriibcr; half-past ten, Ijalb etf. pastor, bcr ^farrcr, — §, — . peace, bie 9f{u^c; bcr ^ricbcn, — §. peasant, ber 33auer, — § or— n, — n ; bie SSduerin, — ncn. penny, bcr pfennig, — §, — e. people, bie Scute ; "hg.^ SSolf, — (c)§, — er. permitted, be permitted, biirf en, iv. phenomenon, bie (gr[d)ci ' uung, —en; ba§ ^pnomcn', — §, — e. pick, )jidcn, w. piece, "ba^ QiM, — (e)§, — e. place, bie ©tcUe, — u; bcr ^la|, — e§, — e ;bcr Drt — (e)g, — er. place, tegcn, w. ; ftcGen, w. ; fe^en, w. plant, ipflangcn, w, play, fpiclcu, w. play, \)(i^ 6^icl, — §, — c. please, bittc ; gcf atlcu, str. ; it pleases me, e§ gcfallt mir. pliable, gcfd)mei'big. poet, ber ®id)ter,—§, — ; bcr^oct', —en, —en. poor, arm. population, bie ©inmo^ucrgal^r, —en. praise, loben, w. prefer, Ueber ^aben, w. ; bor'gicl^en, str. prepare, Oor'bereiten,t(?. prescribe, oerfd)rciben, str. present, ta^ ©cfd^eri', — §, — c. 330 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN pretty, l^iibfc^. prince, bcr giirft, —en, —en; bcr $rin§, — en, — en'» princess, bie ^ringef'fin, — nen. probably, hjo^l; ttja^rfdiein'Iid). promise, tjerfpre ' d)en, s^r. protection, ber (S(i)U^, — e§. proud, jtolg, Prussian, :preu^ifc!^, punish, ftrafen, w. pupil, ber ©d)uler, — §, — ; bie ©(i)ulerin, —nen. purse, bie SSorfe, — n. queen, bie ^onigin, —nen. queer, tonnberlid). quick(ly), [rf)nell. quite, gang. raise, l^eben, str.\ gur SSIiitc ber- l^el'fen, s^r. rapi(l(ly), [d)neE. rather, bod^. raven, ber ^aht, — n, — n. reach, errei'd)en, m ; reid)en, ?^. read, lefen, str. receive, befom' men, s^r. ; er^al'ten, str. reckless, toog^alftg. red, rot reformation, bie 9?ef orntation ' , —en. rejoice, fid^ fren'en, w. (uber and anf with ace.) relate, er§a:^'Icn, w. ; beric^'ten, w. release, txVb'\n\,w.\ befrei'en, w. remain, bleiben, str. (fein). remember, \\6) erin'nern, 2^. remind, erin ' nern w. (an and ace. ). reply, antttjorten, w. ; entgeg'nen, w. resemble, al^nlic^ [e!^en, str. (dat.); gleid^en (dat.) resound, er!Iin ' gen, str. return, bie ^uriic! ' f nnf t. return, §nriic!' !ef)rcn, w. (fein); gnriid'Jommen, str. (fein). revolutionize, nrn'^turgen, w. reward, bie SSelol^'nung, — en; ber Sol^n, — e§, — e. Rhine, ber 9f{{|ein, — §. rich, reic^. riddle, \ia^ 9?atfel, — §, — . ride, reiten, str. (fein). ri^ht, recl)t, rid^tig ; be right, rcc^t l^aben. ripe, reif. rise (of the sun), anf'ge^en, str. (fein); (of persons), anf fte^en, str. (fein). river, ber %lvi% — ffe§, — ffe. robe, bo§ @ett)anb'— (c)§, — cr. Roman, ber Oiomer, — §, — ; adj., rontifcf). romantic, rontan'tifc^. ragged, ^erb. run, lanf en, str. (fein) ; run away, fort 'lanf en, s^r. (fein). rusli, fic^ ftiirgen (onf and ace.) iv. rustling, ranfd^enb. safe(ly), fielder. sauerkraut, ba§ ©anerfrant, — (e)§. save, retten, w. say, fagen, w. ; said to be, foKen, w. scenery, bie ©generie', —en; bie SanbfcEiaft, —en. school, bie ©d^nle, — n;schoollife, tid^ ©d^ulleben, — §. school system, ba§ ©dinlnjefen, science, bie SBiffenfd^aft, — en. scold, fd)elten, str. search, in search of, nad^ (dat. ) ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 331 secret, ba§ ^e^etm'ni§,—ffe§, — ffe. see, fe^en, str. seek, \ud)en, w. sell, tjertau'fen, «7. semester, bo§ Seme'fter, — §, — . sentence, ber (2q^, —eg, — c; bcr 3f?id)t§f^rnc^, ©pruc^, — (c)§, -^c. servant, ber Wiener, —^, — ; bcr ^ned)t, — (e)§, — e, set, un'tergei^en, s^r. (feiii); ftcHen, w.\ tegen, ttJ. ; fe|en, tt;. seven, [tebem shake, fc^iitteln, ti7. she, fie. sheep, "aa^ ©d)af, — a^ ®enf '^ mat, — §, — er. stay, bleiben, str. (fein). steal, fte^len, str. step, treten, str. (fein); step for- ward, bortreten, str. (fein). stepmother, bie (Sticfmutter, — . still, nod), stork, ber ©tord^, — §, — e. story, bie ©efc^ic^tc, — n. 332 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN Strassburg", ta^ ©trapxirg, — §; adj., ftrapurger. stream, ber glit§, — ff^^/— fl^j ^^^ a^ ©tnbinm, — §, — bten» style, ber ©tU,— (e)§, — e; style of ^ architecture, ber- S3anftil. subject, \)a^ ^ad), — (e)§, — cr ; ber Untertan, — §, —en; adj., iinter= tan. subject, nnterorbnen, m sudden(ly), ^jlo^Iic^. suffer, leiben, str. sum, bie ©nmme, — n. summer, ber ©ontmer, — §, — ♦ sun, bie ©onne, — n, Sunday, ber ©onntag, — §, — e. superior, liberie 'gen. support, fid) itii|en, w. suppose, be supposed to, foUen. surprised, iiberrafdit; be surprised at, fid^ hJnnbern iiber. sweetly, fii^. sword, t>a^ ©c^njert, — (e)§, — er. system of instruction, ha^ Un^^ terri(i)t§mefen, — §, — . table, ber %\\<^, — (e)§, — e. Tacitus, ber SacitnS, be§ SacituS, tailor, ber ©dineiber, — §, — . take, ne^nten, str., take to heart, [id) gn ^ergen nel^men. take off*, ab 'nefinten, s*r.,ob'legen, w., an^giel^en, str. tankard, bie ^anne, — n. teacher, ber Sel^rer, — §, — ; bie Sel^rerin, — nen. technical, ted)nifc^; technical school, Ue tec^nifd)e ^od)\d}uU, -n. tell, fagen, w., ex^af)'ien, w. ten, gel^n. than, al§. that, dem. pron. , jener, jenc, jeneS ; ber, bie, ba§; rel, ber, bie, bo^; con/., ha^ tlie, def. art, ber, bie, ba§; the. . . the, j;e...befto. their, i:^r, tf)re, it)x. theirs, i^rer, i^re, i^r(e)§. there, \)a, bort; there is, are, c3, ift, e§ finb, e§ gibt therefore, barnm', beg^alb, be^mc- gen. they, fie. thing, ta^ S)ing, — (e)§, — e, the second thing, 'i)a§> l^meite. think, benfen, irr., cf. App. 88; think of, geben'fen (gen.). third, britt thirty, brei^ig. this, biefer, biefe, biefe§ (bie§). thoroughly, tiid)tig. thought, ber (5Jeban!e, — n^, — n. three, brei. through, bnrcf) (ace), through it, baburc^ ' ; through which, tt)oburd)'. time, bie 3eit, —en; the first time, t)a§> erfte Ttal tiresome, langttjeilig. to, §u (dat.); nacf) (dat.); an (ace); to and fro, !^in unb ^er. too, §u; and). tower, ber Surm, — (e)§, — e. trace back, jnriid'fii^ren, ti?. treat, befjan ' bein, w. tree, ber SSaunt, — (e)§, — e. tree top, ber SBipfel, — §, — . trice, in a trice, im 3Zn» ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY 333 trunk (of a tree) ber ©tamm, turn, !e^ren, w. twelve, gujolf. twenty-four, t)icrunb5n)an^ic|. two, gttjei. uncle, bet Dn!cl, — §, — . uniform, ein^eitUd). unite, tjerei'nen, lo. university, bie Unibcrfttat, — cit. until, big; not until, cr[t. upon, auf, (ace. and dat.); once upon a time, einmal' ; upon the whole, tm gan^en; upon this, that, barauf; upon vsrhich, ttjoraitf. use, gebraiid^en, w. ; beiiii^cn, lo. usually, geh)oi)ufid). yalkyrie, bie SSalfii'rc, — n. vast, mdt^tig, rie[ig. very, fe^r. village, 'ba^ %ox\, — (e)§, — er. visitor, ber SScfu' c^er, — §, — . vulnerable, tjertDunb ' bar. wagon, ber SSagcn, — §, — . wagoner, ber f^u^rmaun, — (e)§, — leiite. walk, gel^en, fpagie'reu gc^eit, str. (fein). walk, ber @ang, — e§, — e. wall, bie SSJJaiier, — n; bie 3Banb, — e* want, tDoflen, w. war, ber ^rieg, — (e)§, — e. warrior, ber ^rieger, — §, — . watch, bie 2Bacf)t, —en. watch, pten, w., n)arf)cu, w., be* ttja ' c^en, w, water, ha^ SBaffer, — §, — . watershed, bie a8a[jer[d)cibe, — lu way (=manner), bie 2Bei[e, — n; (=road, path) ber 28eg, — (e)§, — e» we, tt)ir* wear, tragen, str. week, bie SSodie, — n, well, ad/., gefunb; ctdi;., gut; fc^on; wo^l; I am well, \6) befiube mid^ t»oi)l; I do not feel well, mir ift nic^t tuo^L well, ber SSrunnen, — §, — . west, ber SBeften, — §. western, tueftUd). what, trag. when, interr. adv., tuann; conj., Wenn, aB. whence, trto^er'. where, tt)o; where to, tropin'; where from, njot)er'. whether, ob. which, reZ., hjeld^er, ttjctd^c, tDeld)e§; in which, ttJOrin' ; upon which, ttjorauf ; interr., tuer, toa^. while, bie 335eile; conj. or prep., tuQ^renb. whither, tuo^in'. why, ttJarum'; inter j., ei, nun, wicked, b5fe (bog), fc^led)t. wide, hjeit widow, bie SBitwe, — n. wife, bie f^rau, —en; bie (ijattin, — nen. will (wish) wollen, w. willow, bie SBeibe, — n. window, tia^ ^enfter, — g, — . wine, ber SSein, — (e)§, — e. winter, ber ^Sinter, — §, — . wish, triinfd^en, lo.; ber SBunfc^, — e§, — e. with, mit (dat.); with it, bamit', with which, what, ttJOmit'. withdraw, fic^ guriid'aie^en, str. 334 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN without, oI)ne (ace); (= out-of- doors), brau^en. wolf, ber SSolf, — (e)§, ^e. woman, bie i^xau, —en. wonderful, tuunberbar. wood, ta§> ^oI§, — e§, — er. wood-nymph, ha^ SBoIbtDcibleitt, woodpecker, ber 'Bpe^t, — (e)§, — e. woods, bet SBolb, — (e)§, — er. wood-sprite, t)a§^ SBalbmeiblein, — §, work, bie 5lrbeit, —en; arbeiten, work of art, \)a§> ^mi\itvext, — §, — e. world, bie 2BeIt, —en. worm, ber SSiirm, — (c)§, — er. write, f(l)reiben, str. wrong, falfcf); unri(i)tig. year, ba§ ^a^r, — (e)§, — e. yes, ja. yield, nad^'geben, str. (dat.); aug'== ttJeic^en, str., (dat.) (fein). you, bit, 6ie, i:^r. young, jung. your, bein, beine, bein; ^t)r, ^:^re, ^t^x; ener, eure, euer. yours, beiner, beine, bcin(e)§, i^firer, ^^re, ^^reg; eurer, eure, eure§. youth, ber ^iingling, — §, — e. zephyrs, bie Siifte. THE LAKE GERMAN SERIES. ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. By Henrietta K. Becker, Ph.D., The University of Chicago. A beginner's book intended to cover the work of the first year's German in high school or the first six months in college. A series of graded lessons cover- ing the main points of grammar, based upon carefully selected stories and poems, cioth, 334 pages. Price, $1.00. EASY GERMAN STORIES. Vol. I. By Philip S. Allen, Ph.D., and Max Batt, Ph.D. A collection of short stories, including two of Baumbach's Somniernidrchen, two of Rosegger's rustic sketches, and Heyse's VArrabbiata. The book contains practical Exercises for German conversation based upon the text, a Grammatical Appendix, Notes and Vocabulary. A book of first readings in German prose. Cloth, 242 pages. Price, 70 cents. GERMAN STORIES. Vol. II. By Philip S. Allen, Ph.D., and Max Batt, Ph.D. A continuation of the above. Contains Liliencron's Der Narr, Riehl's Der Leibmedikus, and Wilden- bruch's Das edle Blut. For second-year reading in high school or college. Cloth, 242 pagres. Price. 70 cents. SCHILLER'S MARIA STUART. Edited with Notes and Introduction by Carl Edgar Eggert, Ph.D., of the University of Michigan. Cloth, 280 pages. Illustrated. Price, 70 cents. SCOTT, FORESMAN & CO., 378-388 Wabash Avenue : : CHICAQO. UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY BERKELEY Return to desk from which borrowed. This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. ; 120ec'5tR!' UBecMlP , \«i^^*^^^ pj,6 8 1388 99 HUG 18 1952 Uli U0cV56Bli SEP20«8'4p .1 REC'D LD SEP 27 1956 i0cf64SM REC'D I .D SEP 2 fc '64- IPM LD 21-95m-ll,'50(2877sl6)476 9266^ THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA UBRARY J